JP6866601B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, Oite the gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, in the case of per lottery results executed based on the starting winning are those favorable contact state is provided to the player. In some of these conventional gaming machines, for example, at least a part of the hits is provided with a time saving state in which a starting prize is likely to occur. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, for example, a game board is provided with a plurality of starting winning openings, and a game ball can easily win a prize in some of the starting winning openings due to a time saving state. It had attempted over the Xing taste of the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-230825

However, such a conventional game machine, there may not be able to sufficiently improve the interest in the game of the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, and a launching means capable of passing the gaming ball launched by the launching means. The first path, the second path different from the first path, and the position where the game ball passing through the first path can enter and the game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter. The first ball-entry means provided and the position where the game ball passing through the second path can enter the ball and the game ball passing through the first path are provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball. 2 The ball-entry means, the determination means for executing the discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, or the second ball-entry means, and the first state in which the game ball can enter. When a second state where a game ball than the first state becomes difficult ball entrance, in a variable, variable ball entrance means, predetermined based on the fact that to its variable ball entrance means a game ball to ball entrance Based on the privilege granting means for granting the privilege and the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminating result, the variable ball-entry means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to and a game ball that is launched into the first path rather than the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition is used to determine the discriminating means. A plurality of game states including at least a first gaming state in which the determination means is more likely to be executed, and a second gaming state in which the determination of the discrimination means is more easily executed when the gaming ball is launched in the second path than in the first path. A common effect mode that does not depend on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, based on the game state setting means capable of setting one of the game states and the execution of the variable game. It is an effect different from the first effect based on the fact that the first effect executing means for executing the first effect composed of the above and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied during the execution of the first effect. including at least a second effect consists in the specific effect possible embodiment suggests path corresponding to the playing state, which is set as a game state after execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means to the player The variable game is based on the fact that at least a first condition different from that of the second effect executing means for executing the above and the determination result of the determination means in the second gaming state is satisfied. and a second game condition setting means capable of setting the first game condition without going through a game ball is fired into said first path during the previous SL first effect Even if a game ball to the second path is Ru Oh configuration in which the specific condition even when it is fired may be established.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes display means capable of displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, a first path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, and a first path thereof. A second path different from the route and a first entry where the game ball passing through the first path can enter and the game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter. The ball means, the second ball-entry means provided at a position where the game ball passing through the second path can enter and the game ball passing through the first path is difficult to enter, and the above-mentioned a determining means for first ball entrance means or a game ball to the second ball entrance means executes the discrimination based on the fact that the ball entrance, a first state in which the game ball is possible ball entrance, from the first state a variable, variable ball entrance means also a second state in which the game ball is difficult ball entrance to, privilege granting means to its variable ball entrance means a game ball to impart specific privilege based upon the ball entrance A variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. First, it is easier to discriminate the discriminating means when the gaming ball is launched to the first path than to the second path based on the variable game executing means for executing the above and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination of the discriminating means is more likely to be executed when the gaming ball is launched on the second path than on the first path. A first effect composed of a game state setting means capable of setting a state and a common effect mode that does not depend on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed based on the completion of the execution of the variable game. Based on the fact that the first effect executing means for executing the first effect and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied during the execution of the first effect, the effect is different from that of the first effect and is described by the game state setting means. the second effect execution of the variable game execution executes at least comprising a second effect consists in the specific effect possible embodiment suggests path corresponding to the playing state, which is set as a game state after the completion of the player Based on the fact that the first condition, which is at least different from that of the means and the discriminating result of the discriminating means in the second gaming state, is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied without going through the variable game. comprising a second game condition setting means capable of setting a gaming state, a, even if the game ball is fired into said first path during the previous SL first effect, the second path Game balls into the Ru Oh configuration in which the specific condition even when it is fired may be established.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid and the operation of an opening / closing plate in 1 jackpot. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the opening selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the avoidance period in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the launch direction notification effect in the second embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the launch direction notification effect in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the latent return effect in the second embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initial ball entry process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the LXXVII part in FIG. 76. It is a figure which showed typically the timed change of the operation of the flow path solenoid, and the timed change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate for each jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method from one game state to another game state about three kinds of game states set in a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol strings are changing in the variable display effect, and (b) is a diagram in which the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the reach effect which suggests to a player that there is a high possibility of this. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the reach effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display contents of the reach effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in a normal state or a probable change state, and (b) is an example of a customer waiting demo screen. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure which showed an example of the demonstration screen during change of special figure 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the symbol variation in the latent state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the case where the variation display is completed within 30 seconds. c) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the case of 30 seconds or later after the end of the variable display. (A) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. It is a figure which showed an example of the revival production which is a kind of production performed in the latent state. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number table. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the screen display selection table schematically. It is a block diagram of the electrical structure of the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the standby command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure variation in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect B is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is the additional effect C as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen at the time of execution. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of the additional effect during the residual period. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the demo display A screen (customer waiting demo screen) in the third symbol display device, and (b) is the demo display B screen (customer waiting demo screen) in the third symbol display device. ) Is shown in the figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special display A screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special display B screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table (for less than 2 times after the end of latent probability) in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the normal table in the fourth embodiment (b). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of (for 3 to 8 times after the end of latent probability). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table in the fourth embodiment. Is. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a ROM configuration of an audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection table according to the fourth embodiment. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the additional effect selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure variation in another example of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, and (b) is a hit game during the latent state (during a small hit game). ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 182) is executed during the special map fluctuation in the latent state, and (b) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the hit effect in the latent state. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table in the fifth embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notice effect is executed. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the pressing addition effect is executed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode when the pressing addition effect is executed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode when the non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the latent state is set. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the non-display mode in the latent state. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 in the non-display mode and the latent state ends, and (b) is the non-display mode. It is a figure which showed the display mode (pinch de-appearance) when it was set and the remaining number of times of latent state was 5 times or less, and it became a big hit. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the participation degree normal table in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the low participation table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the jackpot table in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pressing period table in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table in the sixth embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the hold notice determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during the addition effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during hold notice executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the addition effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold notice setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the residual probability variation count command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the non-display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability (second half) table in the first modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is the first modification of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the screen display selection 3 table in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table (for 3 times or more after the end of the latent state) in the 1st modification of the 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot middle pressing process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the processing at the end of pressing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the residual probability variation number command process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the press-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the press-press command processing during reach executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the scroll change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the scroll non-change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the first modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot middle press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character storage area in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the character storage area in the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the storage area for symbol arrangement in the 2nd modification of the 6th embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table referred to during the period in which the first latent probability state in the seventh embodiment is set, and (b) is the seventh. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the latent probability table which is referred to during the period in which the 2nd latent probability state is set in embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entry opening. When 67 is passed, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit D". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game is based on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The two types of "big hits A and B" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits C and D" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery that is executed when the ball enters the ball is called the second special symbol lottery.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided.

When "Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are reached, the number of rounds is 8 rounds in a special gaming state (8 rounds big hit). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit C" and "big hit D", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15 rounds big hit). Further, after each of the above jackpots is completed, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 described later), the game shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability variation of the special symbol) after the jackpot ends. When a high-probability state of a special symbol is given, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased continue from the end of the big hit until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends 50 times. .. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball did not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased is the change of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Continues until the end of 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (high probability state of the normal symbol) means a gaming state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is in a time-saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory being released by hitting the ordinary symbol once. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it is in the "high probability state of the special symbol" from the end of the jackpot until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed 50 times. The probability variation period of the special symbol is not limited to 50 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit, and when the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, it shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol". In this case, the set "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued from the end of the jackpot until the variation display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After becoming a big hit of a special symbol, if it does not become a big hit of a new special symbol by the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Then, if a new jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" will be further special for 50 or 100 times after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display of the symbol is completed.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640, for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entry slot 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a ball that flows down from the right direction is provided. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, it is basically necessary to let the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80 flow down (so-called right-handed hitting).

A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 in which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period during which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) and the special discharge passage for the ball in the first round of the jackpot. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to be different depending on the game state and the jackpot type.

More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after the start of the jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot (opening period) is changed according to the game state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. As a result, the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period during which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to play the game during the jackpot by paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the game during the jackpot becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first entry slot 631 side. It is configured to. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to let the game ball enter the second entrance 640 while hitting right, and the game method immediately shifts to left after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is detected as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. In the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is in the range of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after the start of the jackpot and in the range of 3.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds. It operates and the flow path leading to the probability change switch 65e3 can pass through.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one jackpot and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot can be changed according to the game state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period in which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down is changed. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the time-varying change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the opening A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before the start of the big hit. That is, before the start of the big hit, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues for 0.5 seconds even after the jackpot starts (the opening period is reached). Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

When the 0.2 second on state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again. The period of this off state continues until 3.5 seconds elapse from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds elapse after being set to the off state). Then, when the period of the off state elapses, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state again for 2 seconds (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass through), and thereafter, it is kept in the off state until the jackpot is completed. Dripping.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, when the big hit starts, one round of the big hit starts after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, in one round of big hits, 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, or the open / close version 65f1 is set to the open state until one second elapses from the start of one round. Will be done. Since it is difficult to make 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, basically, in the first round of the jackpot, the opening / closing version 65f1 is opened for 1 second. When one round is completed, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and an interval period is set. After that, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the open / close version 65f1 is set to the open state until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 0.2 second on period of the flow path solenoid 65k. However, since there is a time lag before the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. Is difficult to advance to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the ball cannot reach the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is basically set after the big hit. Even when the opening A is started, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at the same time as the start of the first round and the ball flows down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h Allows the ball to flow down into the special discharge channel 65e2 before the inlet of the special discharge channel 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the probabilistic state.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, when the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 3.5 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. To. This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where the opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. After that, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated in the same manner as the jackpot in which the opening A is set.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 2-second on period of the flow path solenoid 65k. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. Therefore, as long as the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, a special symbol is displayed after the big hit. It is possible to shift to the probabilistic state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (two types) of opening types are provided, and the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the set opening type. The opening type is selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is obtained in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set and the jackpot A or the jackpot C is obtained. If so, the opening B is set. That is, in the normal state, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, while when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached, the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot type and play the game because it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol or it is difficult to shift depending on the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it is almost certain that the special symbol will shift to the probable change state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first input. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. 2. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball into the ball entry port 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12A). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is added to the first hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "1 to 10" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability (1 to 10). See FIG. 12 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "10/400".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit C". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D". As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined according to the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (d). As shown in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And at least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) are set.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 13B. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 13 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for detachment (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "0 to 149" for the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various super reach out of the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12 (c)). By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random value that is a hit of the normal symbol, and the hit is "0". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is "○". ”Is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 3 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 3 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the opening time The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 32) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table 202e is at least remembered.

The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, only "0" is defined as the jackpot judgment value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 jackpot judgment values of "1 to 10" are defined as the jackpot judgment value in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Judgment value is specified. When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A), a special symbol is used. It is determined that it is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 12B, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". .. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 8 rounds like "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit B", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). If the winning state of this "big hit B" is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball presses the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it becomes difficult to pass) and the winning state is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, if the jackpot B is reached in the normal state, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the case where the jackpot A is reached in the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, "big hit C" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, the jackpot C is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" is a big hit with 15 rounds like "big hit C". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). If the winning state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set for this "big hit D" (that is, the ball presses the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it becomes difficult to pass) and the winning state is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If this "big hit D" is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large like the "big hit C", and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. It will be advantageous for the person. On the other hand, if the ball is won in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the "big hit A" and the "big hit C".

In the normal state, the opening A is set when the "big hit D" is set, which is an irregular game in which the ball is launched (right-handed) aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state. This is to suppress the method. If the opening B is set even in the normal state when the lottery of the second special symbol is "big hit D" (that is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the game When the probability change switch 65e3 can be easily passed regardless of the state), the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to shift to the probability change state is set) of the first special symbol. There is a possibility that some players think that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set in the case of a big hit than the lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the big hit of the second special symbol is made in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol is made a big hit. As in the case of the situation, the opening A is set at a rate of 50%, which makes it difficult to shift to the probabilistic state. With such a configuration, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the irregular game method for improving the inrush rate in the probable change state from being established.

In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state. It may be configured as. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence against an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 12 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to. , It is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the game state at the time when the jackpot is won in the case of a jackpot. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, the opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each game state at the time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as the opening type determined when the jackpot A is reached, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state), and The opening B is defined in association with each of the normal symbol time-saving state) and the probabilistic state (probability-changing state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol). That is, when the jackpot A is reached, the opening B that facilitates the transition to the probabilistic state is read and set from the opening selection table regardless of the game state at the time of winning, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot B is obtained, the opening A is defined with respect to the normal state, and the opening B is associated with the time saving state and the probability change state, respectively. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached in the time saving state or the probabilistic state, the opening B is set so that it is easy to shift to the probabilistic state. Opening A is set, which makes it difficult to do. Therefore, if the jackpot B is obtained in the normal state, it is disadvantageous for the player.

As the opening type determined when the jackpot C is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, respectively, as in the jackpot A. Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot D is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state and the opening B is associated with the time saving state and the probability variation state, respectively, as in the jackpot B. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the opening selection table 202e, the opening type is switched based on the type of the jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is obtained in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set and the jackpot A or the jackpot C is obtained. If so, the opening B is set. That is, in the normal state, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, while when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached, the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot type and play the game because it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol or it is difficult to shift depending on the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it is almost certain that the special symbol will shift to the probable change state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation effective flag 203o, a probability variation effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time reduction / medium counter 203r, a jackpot flag 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding). It has a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that the same applies to the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S207 in FIG. 25).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S208 of FIG. 25, FIG. 27). See S405). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 29). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 50 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Further, each time it is determined in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) that the variation time has elapsed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S220 in FIG. 25). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 28). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability time is used. While the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the table 202c, if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time. A lottery will be held. Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 in FIG. 28).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to turn on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1311 in FIG. 36). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S1303 in FIG. 36). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be ON for 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, and when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to ON. 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). A counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the operation counter 203k when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, and it is set to 2 seconds when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203n is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1407 in FIG. 37). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even after the first round of the jackpot set with the opening A is completed, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 2 seconds is estimated. It is possible to suppress fraud that causes the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, while the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball can be illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano can be passed from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball with a wire or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1411 in FIG. 37).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change state is not set after the big hit game, the time reduction state shifts to the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 times.

The jackpot flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203s becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25), the jackpot flag 203s is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 25).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability change state flag 223e, a time saving state flag 223f, and a production counter 223g. , The power off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. Therefore, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a hold of the variation effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b determines the number of reserved balls as the type of the special symbol. It is designed to be managed every time.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is indicated. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The probability change state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol. The probability change state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probability change state based on the probability change state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, change of the back surface type) is performed according to the determined game state.

The time saving state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time reduction state based on the time reduction state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, change of the back surface type) is performed according to the determined game state.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter that is referred to when various effects (back surface type, etc.) are selected. The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 199”, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which the effect mode to be determined is associated with each value of the effect counter 223 g. By using the effect counter 223 g, various effects can be randomly selected and executed.

The power off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power off flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38) (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 has the address specified by the bus line 240 indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, while the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There is.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entry 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 18, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 18A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 18 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 18 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 19B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage" and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 20 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 19, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 corresponds to the back side. First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 20 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 19 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) excluding FIG. 20 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 20A to 20B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 20A and 20B) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, in the example of FIG. 22). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 in FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 50 (a). ) S3002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2705 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b). , See S2905 in FIG. 49). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2505 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b), FIG. See S2905 of 49). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S213.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S206).

If it is determined in the process of S206 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the number of first special symbol reserved balls The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S207), and the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process is transferred to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S212 or S209, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213), and ends this process. The details of this special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A to D is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S217: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done (S1003). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the processing of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S221), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is set to 1. Subtract (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process is terminated. Although not shown, the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the processing of S220 becomes 0, or the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r subtracted by the processing of S222 becomes 0. , Set a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. When it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol for high probability. Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 12A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value "0" stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the jackpot type is. .. As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the big hit is A (8 round big hit). However, if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot is B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a big hit C (15 round big hit), and " If it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot is D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 13A). Fluctuation time) is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is determined.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), and the process shifts to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process as well, as in the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry port 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entry port 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entry port 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. It is stored in the first free holding area (holding 1st area to holding 4th area) of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. .. In the processing of S412, as in the processing of S406, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the value of either counter is determined. If also 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entering opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the second specific winning opening 650a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

In the processing of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12 (c)).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "1-239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 12 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S514), and if it is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S519), and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1). If it is determined (S519: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process ends. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 3 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S812 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S812 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of FIG. 32, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. The main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 after transmitting the payout initialization command.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S833, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed. .. In the RAM initialization process (S83, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

After the processing of S814 is completed, the processing is shifted to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S810 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the start winning process (see FIG. 27) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for each round of jackpots, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device is used when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 30 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 31). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 32). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14), the current jackpot type and the opening type according to the current gaming state are selected. Determine (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when the opening A is set as the opening type, it becomes difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that it becomes difficult to set the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the ball easily flows down into the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the probability change state is easily set as the game state after the big hit.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1007). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1007: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1008: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

On the other hand, in the process of S1008, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

If it is determined in the process of S1010 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the processing of S1012, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1012: No), the winning processing for performing the processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is performed. Execute (S1014). The details of this winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After the winning process (S1014) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1015), and this process is performed. finish. Details of this abnormality processing (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1013), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1009). This jackpot operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening ports (first large opening port 65a, second large opening port 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotating body 661.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening port 65a is set (S1102), and this processing is completed. To do. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), the opening pattern according to the jackpot type can be accurately set.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1013). This jackpot end process (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot end.

In this jackpot end process (S1013), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so 50 is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203g. By doing so, the probability change state is set 50 times after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the processing of S1204, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game status after the end of the jackpot is issued from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r updated in the processing of S1202 or S1203. Set (S1204). Next, both the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are set to off (S1205), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 35), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In this winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). In the process of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j to update (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1306. On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1305), and if the round time has elapsed, it is determined. (S1305: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306.

In the processing of S1306, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the processing of S1304 (S1304) and the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1308.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308), and if the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), 1 is added from the value of the operation counter 203k. Subtract (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 in the process of S1308 (S1308: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 2 seconds) is determined (S1318). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1310, and the process of monitoring the probability change switch 65e3 and updating the probability change setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being improperly passed the ball and being given the probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to off (S1319), the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310), and if the sphere has not passed the probability change switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and S1313 processing is performed. Move to.

In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313), and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability change enable flag 203o is set to on (S1315), and this End the process.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1015). This abnormal processing (S1015) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for determining whether or not it has been done.

In the abnormal processing (S1015), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to the process of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404: Yes), the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203n to update (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), the book is used as it is. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the total number of discharges (the value of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203q). It is determined whether or not the winning number (value) matches the winning number (value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

If it is determined in the process of S1407 that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items do not match (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to the process of S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the illegality of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing it through the probability change switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1411), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 37), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to the clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of such a problem at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1616 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1616. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1616 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1616. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1616 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is judged to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S1508. ..

If the power-off processing flag is on in the processing of S1502 (S1502: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1616. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1505: Yes). S1506), the process shifts to S1508. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. .. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 is reached at the moment when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is a case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S1616 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1509) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

After the processing of S1510, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the notification content of the state command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). .. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the processing of S1511, interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed by S1508. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S151 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1509 is that when the processing of S1508 is reached via the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing of S1504 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variation display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the process of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1605 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1607 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S1611. In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1613 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S1615), and the power is supplied. The disconnection process is executed (S1616). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1617), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1701). In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). .. Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (Number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) or the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted and this Is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). Further, in the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 is completed, this processing is completed.

Here, the hold ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1708 as the main control device 110. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol is drawn, and the first special symbol holding ball counter of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the values of 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the rotation position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability change state is notified based on the information according to the game state (whether or not it is the probability change state) included in the state command, the probability change state flag 223e is set to on and the time saving state is notified. If this is the case, the time saving state flag 223f is set to on, and when the normal state is notified, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are set to off. As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1709: No), then whether or not the jackpot related command (any of the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command) has been received. Is determined (S1711). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related process for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1711, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1713), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the jackpot-related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related process (S1712).

In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1801), and if the opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 is completed, the main jackpot related processing (see FIG. 41) is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1803). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1803: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1805, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1803: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1806). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1807), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this process ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1612). This variation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In the process of, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the processing shifts to S1906. In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908). Next, the display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Will be done.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 56. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then, the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation effect of the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) is displayed. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specificly specify the content of the image. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, front / back out, etc. The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to display the image of S2304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer Initialize 233f to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2505), and this process ends.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is changed by the process of S2501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S2502 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is obtained. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a stop type command for display (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 48A. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2903). S2904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command process, first, by setting the back image change flag 233w to on, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) is notified of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits constituting the back image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back types are set to off (S3002). ), The rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the rear image after the change is changed from each bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B to E, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S2304), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to E according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3002 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

In this embodiment, a lottery (determination) is performed to determine whether or not to change the back type when executing the variable display. Since the fluctuation display is set to a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, 2 is set in the command buffer area. The above back image change command should not be stored, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as the back image change command. .. In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2416 (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. This is a process that extracts only the type commands and corresponds to each command. Fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)) are executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the processing corresponding to the command. I do.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2501. In addition, the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3202), S3203 to S3204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3301).

In the task processing (S2304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3205.

In the process of S3205, the pointer update process is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3401, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3403), and if it is a demo display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3403: No). S3406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 51 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S3209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3217) and then writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 18B and 18C) to be stopped and displayed, is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3501 (S3501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that the data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Further, as a result of the processing of S3601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3603.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3702), and if it is the transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Further, in the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

In the process of S3706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3707.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

If the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

In the process of S3709, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S3709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the rear surface A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the normal video RAM 236 is resident. There is no image data to be transferred to. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The discrimination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 (S3801). That is, in the processing of S3801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3802 (S3803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of (two types) of opening types are provided, and it is easy to shift to a probabilistic state according to the set opening type (1 jackpot). The ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2) is different. More specifically, the opening A in which the probabilistic state is difficult to be given (the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is low) and the probabilistic state is more likely to be given than the opening A (entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2). Opening B (which has a high ball rate) can be set. The opening type is selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, the opening A is set when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached in the normal state, and the opening B is set when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached. There is. That is, when the jackpot is B or the jackpot D in the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes low during the jackpot (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3), while the jackpot A or the jackpot When it becomes C, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the jackpot A or the jackpot C, which has a high ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2, will be obtained.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to play a game in each game state with the expectation that a big hit will be made before the end of the probability change state or the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a feeling of tension that it is necessary to win the jackpot within the limited number of lottery of special symbols (the number of probable changes or the number of time reductions). Also, as expected, if a big hit occurs within the limited number of lottery, the opening B will be set without fail, so there is a sense of security that the transition to the probable change state will be almost confirmed when the big hit occurs. Can be embraced.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state in the first round of the jackpot so that the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the road 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be arbitrarily determined. In the rounds other than the first round, as a method of changing the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 using the opening A and B, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round up to the round in which the ball can be entered. The opening time of is constant. That is, as in the case of the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition of each round is defined as "from the start of the round until 2 seconds have passed as the specified time, or until 10 balls have entered as the specified number". You just have to keep it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) in which it is practically difficult to insert a specified number (10) of balls, each round can be surely continued until the specified time elapses. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be specified in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. With this configuration, it is possible to decide in a later round whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state for a longer period of time.

In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state. You may. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence against an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the opening A for starting the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and the period in which the ball can be easily passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Although it was configured to provide two types of opening B to start the first round, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the period of the first round may be configured to provide an opening type that overlaps a part of the 2 seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state.

In the present embodiment, two types of entrances are provided, that is, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but the entrance may be only the first entrance 64. That is, it may be configured so that only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed. Even with this configuration, the opening B is set for both jackpots A and B in the probabilistic state, so it is possible to easily enter the ball into the probabilistic entry ball opening in the first round of the jackpot won in the probabilistic state. it can. With this configuration, the second entry port 640 can be deleted, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 72. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the opening type according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, a high probability state of a special symbol is given for each gaming state (special in the jackpot). The ball entry rate into the discharge flow path 65e2) was different. More specifically, in the normal state, the probability change state is given at 50% regardless of whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit ( Opening B, which increases the rate of entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2, is determined at a rate of 50%). Even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% of the probability variation state is given (100% of the opening B at which the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is high is determined). As a result, even if the player accidentally enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in a state other than the normal state and becomes a big hit, the rate at which the probability change state is given is increased. It was able to be kept the same as the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence between the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot and the determined opening type, the type of the time saving state is also different. There is. Then, if the jackpot won in the normal state can pass the ball through the probability change switch 65e3, in addition to the jackpot, the next jackpot is also given a high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot is relatively). It realizes a novel gameplay (three times in a row in a short period of time).

More specifically, it is configured to go back and forth between four game states (normal state, time saving state, latent state, and probability change state) triggered by a big hit or the like. Of these, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol and high probability state of the normal symbol) are the special symbol. Since the high probability state is set, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be hit again at short intervals, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is low in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol and high probability state of the normal symbol). Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Of the two advantageous types of gaming states (latent state and probable change state), the latent state is more advantageous to the player. That is, as will be described in detail later, when a jackpot is reached in the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically set again or the probability change state is set after the jackpot. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. In addition, the rate at which the latent state is set again (looping the latent state) is higher than the rate at which the state shifts to the probable change state. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state, it may shift to the time saving state in addition to the latent probable state and the probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition to the time saving state is higher than that of the other two gaming states. Therefore, the gaming state set after the jackpot is hit in the latent state is basically advantageous to the player, but when the jackpot is hit in the probability changing state, the time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The ratio is high. Therefore, the latent state is more advantageous. As described above, in the second embodiment, the state transition is diversified and the player's interest is improved by providing a plurality (two types) of gaming states having different degrees of advantage.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the lottery result of the special symbol is a part (small hit) of the game board 13. A small hit winning device 650 is provided so that a ball can be entered in the case of a ball, a point that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and a main control. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the apparatus 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, the small hit winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the front view of the first ball opening 64. A horizontally long rectangular small hit winning opening 650a is provided in a substantially central portion of the small hit winning device 650 so that a ball can enter the inside of the small hit winning device 650. When the ball enters the prize device 650 for small hits, 10 prize balls are paid out. Further, the small hit winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "small hit", which is one aspect of the deviation. This small hit is selected when it is out of the latent state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) provided as one of the gaming states in the second embodiment. It becomes easy to be done. Since the small hit is an aspect of the loss, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

Although the details will be described later, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when a big hit of a special symbol is made, the opening B is always set regardless of the big hit type (the ball can easily set the probability change switch 65e3). This is the most advantageous condition (which allows passage). However, since it is a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Therefore, in the latent state, it is necessary to play a game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to draw the first special symbol. That is, it is necessary to play the game in the same game method as in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. Under this circumstance, if the control is the same as in the normal state until the big hit, the number of balls held will decrease steadily before the big hit, even though the state has shifted to the advantageous latent state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state, it is easy to make a small hit. That is, since the small hit winning opening 650a is easily opened, a ball that hits the left and does not enter the first entry opening 64 can easily enter the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, the prize ball given by the entry of the ball makes it possible to execute the game in the latent state without reducing the number of balls held. The small hit winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are entered) every time a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the launch direction notification effect will be described as an example of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. This launch direction notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the direction in which the ball should be launched.

Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entry port to be aimed at in order to draw a special symbol) differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state and the latent state, which are set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than that in the time saving state, and the opening period when the normal symbol is hit is shortened. The fluctuation time of a normal symbol becomes long. Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640, it is almost impossible to let the ball enter the second entry port 640. For this reason, in the normal state or the latent state, it is better to hit the ball into the first ball opening 64 by hitting the left ball and execute the lottery of the first special symbol than to hit the ball right. It is advantageous for the player (the consumption of the ball held can be kept low and the game can be played efficiently).

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening period when the normal symbol is hit is longer, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. Therefore, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right, a lottery for the second special symbol is drawn without reducing the number of balls held. Can be executed. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit right than to hit left.

In the second embodiment, the launch direction of the ball, which is advantageous for the player, can be notified by the launch direction notification effect. By executing this launch direction notification effect, it is possible to easily make the player understand the launch direction for efficiently performing the game, and it is possible to notify the player of the current game state. .. That is, when a left-handed hit is suggested, the gaming state is a normal state or a latent state, and when a right-handed hit is suggested, the gaming state is a probable change state or a time-saving state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current gaming state according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot and the content of the launch direction notification effect. In this embodiment, the launch direction notification effect is not executed immediately after the jackpot ends, but until a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) the execution of the launch direction notification effect. With such a configuration, the player cannot specify the current gaming state at least until the specific condition is satisfied, so that the expectation that the advantageous state is set is maintained. Can be embraced.

FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol during the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the launch direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no ball has entered the left and right through gates 67). It is a figure which showed an example (avoidance effect) of the display mode displayed on the apparatus 81. This avoidance effect and the launch direction notification effect described above are basically executed after the end of the jackpot when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a display mode in the period (avoidance period) from the start of the jackpot to the first passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The balloon 714 is displayed on the right side of. The balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the characters "Aim at the through gate !!" are displayed inside the balloon 714. As a result, the player can shoot the ball at either of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13. It should be noted that the condition "until the ball first passes through the through gate 67" is set until it hits the normal symbol and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the advantage of right-handed hitting in a high-probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol compared to left-handed is that the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is won by a lottery of a normal symbol. This is because the 640a is opened and it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides, the lottery of ordinary symbols can be equally performed regardless of whether the machine is hit right or left, so that the ball enters the through gate 67. There is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the ball hits the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period when there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further increased by configuring the configuration to avoid (delay) the execution of the launch direction notification effect. It can last for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58 (b), a display mode of the launch direction notification effect executed when the latent state is given after the big hit will be described. As described above, the launch direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the jackpot, it is detected that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit in the latent state, it is displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The characters inside the balloon 714 are changed to the characters "Instinctively rush !! Left-handed !!". In addition, the display mode is set as if the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the game can be efficiently performed by executing the left-handed hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), a display mode of the launch direction notification effect executed when the probability change state is given after the big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit in the probabilistic state, it is displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character "Please hit right". Further, the shape of the balloon 714 is a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state has shifted from the latent state to the unfavorable probability change state. In addition, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the game can be efficiently performed by executing the right-handed hit.

As described above, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. Therefore, even if the through gate 67 is passed by left-handed strike, the launch direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed, and the normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol fluctuates for 3 seconds. By hitting right inside, the ball can reach the second entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, the expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time without causing a loss to the player.

In the second embodiment, the fluctuation of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot continues to be executed after the end of the jackpot, or the normal symbol held during the jackpot. In order to prevent (suppress) the reserved ball from being digested after the jackpot, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured. With this configuration, even if the through gate 67 is passed during the jackpot, the fluctuation ends immediately, so that it is possible to make it difficult to store the reserved balls of the normal symbol. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0 and the variable stop state is reached.

If the change of the normal symbol of the hit is being executed or held at the end of the big hit, the player loses if the avoidance period is set even though the second entrance 640 is opened. It ends up. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that the reserved ball of the normal symbol exists at the end of the big hit is reduced. As a result, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the launch direction notification effect is not executed until the first detection of the ball entering the through gate 67 after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, the launch direction notification effect can be executed more effectively.

In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state, the ending effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting to the player to stop the launch of the ball during the ending period of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the fluctuation of the normal symbol of the hit is being executed or the fluctuation of the normal symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot, so that the launch direction notification effect can be executed more effectively. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), a latent return effect, which is one aspect of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This latent probability return effect is an effect that is executed when the state changes from the probability change state to the latent state without going through the jackpot. Here, the case of shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent probable state without going through the jackpot is the case where the number of time reductions set in the probable change state is completed. Specifically, when a probabilistic state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a high-probability state of a normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends in 50 times. Therefore, if a big hit is not obtained before the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times after the probability change state is set, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol and low of the normal symbol). Probability state). The latent probability return effect is an effect executed at the time of transition from this probability change state to the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latent probability return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 become "latent probability". It changes to the character "Return !! Left-handed !!". In addition, the display mode is set as if the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. With this display mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the most advantageous latent state can be restored.

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is completed, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed based on the fact that the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13 is passed first after the jackpot is completed. Then, during the avoidance period, the effect of suggesting that the through gate 67 on the left side is aimed at may be executed. With this configuration, when the game state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible to make the player perform a left-handed hit that makes it easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. In addition, even if the game state after the big hit is in a probable state, if the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the through gate 67 on the left side is a win, the launch notification effect is confirmed and then the right side. Even if the electric accessory 640a is hit, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently is set before the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the player loses. You can play without having to play. In this case, during the ending period of the jackpot, the ending effect of a mode suggesting returning to left-handed may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being hit into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make the ball hit left before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can be less likely to lose.

Further, when the launch direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the small hit winning opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a in the final round of the big hit. Good. With this configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit the ball to the left (win) in the small hit winning opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left-handed strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the configuration so that the player is less likely to lose. In addition, instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated ball entry port (effect ball entry port) that triggers the execution of the launch direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the through gate 67 on the left side.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hit random number table 202f and a time saving type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Has been done. In addition, the contents of the first type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the present embodiment, eight types of big hits, "big hit E" to "big hit L", are provided. Of these, "big hits E to H" are jackpot types that can be determined by the lottery of the first special symbol, and are jackpots with eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types is configured with a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. Further, "big hits IL" are jackpot types that can be determined by lottery of the second special symbol, and are jackpots with 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types also has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the time saving state type set after the jackpot. As a result, the pattern of going back and forth in the game state is diversified.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit E". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the game state and the number of time reductions given will be described later.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 74", "big hit F" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit F", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit F". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit G" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 are counter values that are "big hit G", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit G". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit H" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 counter values are "big hit H", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit H". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, "big hit I" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit I", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit I". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 74", "big hit J" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit J", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit J". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit K" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 are counter values that are "big hit K", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit K". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit L" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 counter values are "big hit L", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit L". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, but in the present embodiment, the combination of the opening type determined by using these eight types of jackpots and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot is used. However, each is configured differently. As a result, the pattern of going back and forth in the game state is diversified.

Next, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. Similar to the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot when a jackpot is won. ..

As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is obtained, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is defined for the latent state and the probable change state. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot E is reached in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening B is associated with the probability changing state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot G is obtained, the opening B is associated with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening A is associated with the probability changing state. Has been done. Therefore, if the jackpot G is reached in the probabilistic state, it becomes difficult for the high probability state of the special symbol to be given after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot G is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot H is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is associated with the latent state and the probable change state. ing. Therefore, if the jackpot H is reached in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

As shown in FIG. 61, with respect to the "big hits I to L" determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the "big hits E to H" is defined. Here, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by making the set opening type different according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio of the high probability state of the special symbol being given after the jackpot is set to the game state. It can be changed accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the small hit random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. This small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not it is a small hit when the lottery of a special symbol is missed, and a counter value (random number value) that becomes a small hit for each game state. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, "0,11 to 399" is associated as a counter value (random value) that is a small hit in the latent probability state. Of the 400 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, 390 counter values are small hits, so if a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the probability of small hits is 39 /. It is 40 (390/400). Therefore, in the latent state, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the ball can easily enter the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state in which it is necessary to hit left, the prize ball given by entering the small hit winning opening 650a allows the player to play the game without reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, the game can be enjoyed without worrying about the ball held. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the latent state of the player. On the other hand, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state, there is no counter value (random value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a lottery of special symbols is performed, it will not be a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the time saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. As for the time saving type selection table 202g, FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving type selection table 202g. The time reduction type selection table 202g is used to select the jackpot type and the number of time reductions according to the game state at the time of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot E is obtained, 50 times are associated with the time reduction state, the latent probability state, and the probability change state. As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. Further, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent state and the probability variation state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a high probability state. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent state, the state shifts to the probabilistic state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the latent state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is reached in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is looped. Further, for the normal state, the number of time reductions is not specified (that is, the number of time reductions is set to 0). As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are associated with the probability change state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot F is obtained. As described above, when the jackpot F is reached in the probability variation state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set. Will be. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, the advantageous probabilistic state shifts to the unfavorable time saving state. Therefore, if the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, it is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state, the time reduction state, and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol. Moreover, it becomes a low probability state of a normal symbol. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the state shifts to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot G is obtained, 100 times are defined in association with the time reduction state and the probability change state. As described above, when the jackpot G is reached in the time saving state and the probability variation state, the opening A in which it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a high probability state of. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped, and when the jackpot G is reached in the advantageous probability variation state, the time saving state is shifted to the disadvantageous time saving state. In addition, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot G is reached in the normal state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. It becomes. That is, it loops the normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G is reached in the latent state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Become. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 20 times are associated with the time saving state as the number of time saving times given when the jackpot H is obtained. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. Therefore, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. On the other hand, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state, the latent state, and the probable change state. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the normal state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, it loops the normal state. Further, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent state and the probability variation state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a low probability state. That is, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent state and the probable change state, the most advantageous latent state is set.

As shown in FIG. 63, with respect to the "big hits I to L" determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the "big hits E to H" is defined. Here, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the jackpot is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, the advantageous jackpot type is different depending on the game state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to have a different jackpot type depending on the game state, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a winning state storage area 203t and an initial ball entry flag 203s are added. Further, instead of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u is provided.

The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability change flag 203u indicating whether or not the jackpot is in the probability change state at the start of the jackpot and the time reduction medium counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time reductions are reset. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot (when the number of time reductions is newly set), the state at the time when the jackpot is won cannot be specified from the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time reduction counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t, and then these are reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). .. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of time reductions is selected from the time saving type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With this configuration, the number of time reductions can be accurately set from the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability variation number is limited to 50 times, but in the second embodiment, the probability variation number is indefinite. Therefore, instead of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, the probability variation counter 203u is provided, and if the probability variation flag 203u is on, a high probability state of the special symbol is provided, and if it is off, a low probability state of the special symbol is indicated. And said. This probability variation flag 203u is set to on if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot (see S1211 in FIG. 69). It is also set to off at the start of the jackpot.

The first ball entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the avoidance period (a state in which the first ball has not been entered into the through gate 67) is set after the end of the jackpot. When the entry into the through gate 67 is detected while the initial entry flag 203s is on, the initial entry command is set from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 68). See S612). The voice lamp control device 113 executes a launch suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) when the first ball entry command is received and the special symbol is in a high probability state. .. The first ball entry flag 203s is set to on at the end of the jackpot (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to off after setting the first ball entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, one of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent state, and the probability changing state is set with the end of the jackpot or the end of the time saving number of times. To. The normal state and the time saving state are disadvantageous to the player because the probability of becoming a big hit is low. Of these, in the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and the game can be played efficiently by hitting right, so the time-saving state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state have a high probability of being a big hit and are likely to be a big hit continuously in a short period of time, which is advantageous for the player. Of these, in the latent state, since the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player than the probabilistic state in which the opening A is set in a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state in the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state that is set when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and is basically a gaming state in which the pachinko machine stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, another gaming state may be set with a big hit as a trigger. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and the time saving period is not given (Fig. 61). 63), the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of another jackpot type (big hits E to H) that can be determined by the special symbol lottery, the opening A in which it is difficult to allow the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined (FIG. 61). (Refer to), since the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the big hit. Even when the jackpot F is obtained, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not launched in the first round. On the contrary, even when the jackpot is E to H, when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent probability state after the jackpot.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, there is a possibility that another gaming state may be set with the jackpot as a trigger, as in the normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and 50 time reduction periods are given. Therefore (see FIG. 63), when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability change state is set after the big hit. That is, it falls (ranks down) to a state where the degree of advantage is small. On the other hand, when it becomes another jackpot type (big hit F, G, H), the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), so that the ball is a probability change switch during the jackpot. By passing through 65e3, the latent state is set again after the big hit. That is, it loops the most advantageous latent state for the player. As described above, the latent state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit occurs and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not launched in the first round of the jackpot E, the time is shortened after the jackpot. Similarly, if the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpots F, G, and H, it falls to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the probabilistic state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probabilistic state, not only the game state shifts to another game state triggered by the big hit, but also the game state shifts to another game state at a moment other than the big hit (when the number of time reductions ends). .. Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the big hits J and K are determined at a rate of 65%, it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and a time saving period of 50 times or 100 times is given depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 63), so that the time saving state basically shifts after the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the jackpot L is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (Fig. 61). 63), the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot. That is, it is possible to return from the probabilistic state with a small degree of advantage to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, in the probabilistic state, if the set time saving period of 50 times can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row), the latent probable state is the same as in the case of the jackpot L. Can be restored to. If it is possible to return to the latent state, the opening B is always set at the next big hit, which means that the number of big hits is substantially increased by at least one time. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probabilistic state to the latent state, even if the player falls from the latent state to the probable state, the game is expected to return to the latent state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the probable state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and the time saving period of 50 times is given. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is reached in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is basically looped.

In this way, in the probability variation state, it is advantageous in that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state, but when it becomes a big hit, it shifts to the time saving state where the jackpot probability is low with a high probability (65%). Will end up. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the time saving period will end and the state will return to the latent state, rather than becoming a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the lottery of the special symbol will be continuously lost. In addition, when the jackpots J and K are reached in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the time saving state instead of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that after the loop of the latent state and the probabilistic state is completed. However, it can be motivated to continue the game at least until the end of the short period. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65, in the time saving state, not only the game shifts to another game state triggered by the big hit, but also at a moment other than the big hit (when the number of time saving ends). It shifts to the game state of.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot is determined at a rate of 50%, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is short. Not granted (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is reached in the time saving state, the state basically shifts to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, in the time saving state, when the time saving period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot I, K, L is reached in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61), and 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times depending on the jackpot type. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L won during the time saving state are completed, the time saving state is basically looped.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the time saving state is looped, the time saving period set as the time saving state ends. Until then, at least it can remind the player to continue the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the player shifts to the latent state after the big hit, the player can be greatly satisfied.

As described above, in the second embodiment, by changing the ratio in which the opening B is set according to the game state, the ratio in which the high probability state of the special symbol is given is changed according to the game state. There is. As a result, it is possible to provide a latent state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the end of the big hit. As a result, when the jackpot F in the normal state shifts to the latent state, the jackpot F, the jackpot E in the latent state that shifts after the jackpot F, and the probability change that shifts after the jackpot E A total of three jackpots with J or K in the state will be guaranteed. Therefore, once the player is in the latent state, the player can be given a sense of security and satisfaction because the prize balls for at least three big hits are guaranteed.

In addition, since the latent state loops the same state with a high probability (75%) when it becomes a big hit, if it is possible to shift from the normal state to the latent state, the big hit and the big hit probability are high. The state is likely to be repeated. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the acquisition of a larger amount of prize balls, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, even if the player falls into the probabilistic state due to the jackpot E in the latent state, it can be returned to the latent state if the deviation can be continued 50 times in the probable state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it can be expected that the deviations will be continuous, so that it is possible to provide a novel playability.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. Similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) has a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and a third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern of.

Of the variation start processing 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to S218 and S221 to S223, S201 to S218 and S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S221 to S223 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S216 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and if it is a small hit, it is small. The small hit determination process for starting the hit is executed (S231), and the process shifts to S217. The details of this small hit determination process (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. Further, in the processing of S217, when the lottery result of this special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S217: Yes), the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process shifts to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and set an appropriate time saving period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the small hit determination process (S231) described above will be described. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S241). In the process of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small hit winning opening 650a, it is set so that the ball can enter the small hit winning device 650. After the processing of S242, this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is.

By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small hit winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent state. Therefore, since the ball holding can be improved in the most advantageous latent state, the motivation of the player for the game in the latent state can be improved.

Next, the through gate passing process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The through-gate passing process 2 (S112) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29). This is a process for detecting the passage of a sphere to 67 and executing the corresponding control.

Of the through-gate passing processes 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, the processes S601 to S605 are the same as the processes of S601 to S605 of the through-gate passing processes (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the first entry flag 203v is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S611). That is, it is determined whether the avoidance period is set after the jackpot ends, and if the first ball entry flag 203v is on (if it is the avoidance period), the first ball entry command is set (S612), and the first ball entry is performed. The flag 203v is set to off (S613), and the process shifts to S602. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the first ball entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), each process of S612 and S613 is skipped, and the process shifts to S602.

The first ball entry command set by the process of S612 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the execution of the launch direction notification effect on the condition that the special symbol is in the time saving state. After the end of the big hit, the game state set after the big hit is a latent state or a probable change state by avoiding the execution of the launch direction notification effect until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. It can be difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that an advantageous latent state is set for a longer period of time.

Next, the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. The jackpot end process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 as in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35). This is a process for setting the game state after the big hit according to the situation.

Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, the processing of S1201 and S1205 is the same as the processing of S1201 and S1205 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then (S1211), the process shifts to S1212. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the processing of S1211 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1212.

In the process of S1212, the number of time reductions corresponding to the game state specified by the data stored in the winning state storage area 203t is read from the time reduction type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203r. (S1212). Next, the status command is set based on the values of the probability change flag 203u updated in each process of S1211 and S1212, and the time reduction / medium counter 203r.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1205 is completed, the first ball entry flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and the main processing is ended. As a result, the avoidance period can be set after the jackpot ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 (S1621) executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination process 2 (S1621) is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

Of the command determination processes 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S1701 to S1709 and S171 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processes (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S1713 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S1709 (S1709: Yes), the content of the status command is changed. The state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process is terminated. Details of this state command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received in the process of S1711 (S1711: No), then the first ball entry command is issued. If it is determined whether the ball has been received (S1722) and the first ball entry command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first ball entry process for setting the effect according to the current gaming state is executed (S1723). This process ends. The details of this initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned state command processing (S1721) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. When this state command processing is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability change state flag 223e is on (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223f is on (S3903). Then, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state notified by the current state command is the latent state (S3904).

In the process of S3904, when it is determined that the notified gaming state is the latent state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probabilistic state has returned to the latent state, so that the latent return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (see (b)), the player is notified that the player has returned to the latent state (S3905), and the process shifts to S3906. As a result, the player can be easily recognized that the state has changed from the advantageous probability change state to the more advantageous latent state, so that the player can be pleased.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is off in the processing of S3902 (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No). If it is determined in the processing of S3904 that a gaming state other than the latent state has been notified (S3904: No), it is not a case of returning from the probabilistic state to the latent state, so the processing of S3905 is skipped and the processing is performed. It shifts to S3906.

In the process of S3906, the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the state command notified from the main control device 110, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-mentioned initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described. When this initial ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read out (S4001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), it is not the timing to execute the launch direction notification effect, so this process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70).

On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the avoidance period has ended in the probable change state of the current gaming state. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right-handed stroke (see FIG. 59 (a)), the right-handed display effect command is set (S4004), and this process is terminated. The right-handed display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display right-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the launch direction notification effect (see FIG. 59 (a)) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the right-handed effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is in the latent state and the avoidance period has ended. Among the notification effects, the display left-handed effect command is set (S4005) in order to execute the effect of notifying the left-handed effect (see FIG. 58 (b)), and this process is terminated. The left-handed display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display left-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the launch direction notification effect (see FIG. 58 (b)) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the left-handed effect.

By executing the first ball entry process (S1723) in this way, it is possible to notify the appropriate launch direction in which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game efficiently.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of gaming states including two types of gaming states (probability variation state and latent probability state) that are advantageous for the player. Then, in the most advantageous latent state, it is configured so that it is possible to shift to another gaming state only by the big hit, and the transition destination is basically set to the probabilistic state. With this configuration, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot at least twice in a row, including the latent state, so for a short period of time. You can make multiple jackpots in a row. Therefore, since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probability change state is set again when the jackpot is set in the latent state or when the jackpot is set in the probability change state. It is configured to provide a case where it is done. That is, the number of consecutive big hits in the latent state is changed depending on the luck of the player. With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how many times the high-probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot will be repeated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the second embodiment, even if the latent state is changed to the low-advantageous probabilistic state, a part of the jackpot (big hit I) and the latent probability when a short period of time elapses. It is configured so that it can return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it will be an advantageous state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit at least twice in a row, so that the player can be pleased. Further, in the second embodiment, in order to make it difficult to understand which gaming state the player has transitioned to when the player shifts to the latent state or the probable change state after the big hit, the game state (ball launch direction) is set. The execution of the notification effect (launch direction notification effect) is delayed from the end of the jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is finished, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided until the ball first passes through the through gate 67, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 first, the game is played. The configuration is such that the launch direction notification effect of the mode according to the state is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it unclear for a longer time whether it is in the latent state or the probabilistic state, so the game is expected to shift to the latent state for a longer time. Can be done.

Further, when the opening A is set (that is, disadvantageous) in the probability change state and the jackpot type (big hit J, K) is set, a time saving period is given after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state (latent state, probability changing state) of the special symbol ends, it is configured so as not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game at least until the end of the shortened time period, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, if a big hit occurs in a short time state, it basically does not fall to the normal state. In other words, if a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is basically looped or the state shifts to the latent state. Therefore, when the time saving state is looped, the player can be reminded to continue the game at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the state shifts to the latent state, the player can be greatly satisfied.

In the second embodiment, there is a high probability that a small hit will be made by lottery of a special symbol in the latent state, and a small hit will be made frequently. As a result, the ball holding in the latent state is improved, and the decrease in motivation of the player for the game in the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, the jackpot type with a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the latent state, the big hit of 15 rounds is easy to be determined, while the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in the probable state is easily executed. In the lottery, the 8-round jackpot may be easily determined. With this configuration, in the latent state, it is easy to reduce the number of balls you have by hitting left, but there is a high probability that you will win a big hit, and if you hit a big hit, you will be able to win more prize balls. Even if the badness of possession is taken into consideration, it can be advantageous for the player. Further, by making it easy to select 15 rounds in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to let the player select a game method in which the player dares to hit left in the probabilistic state. That is, in a probabilistic state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes long, a highly stable game of aiming for a big hit of 8 rounds without reducing the number of balls held by hitting right. By hitting left, the ball holding will be worse, but if you hit it, it will be easy to make 15 rounds. High gambling property (If you win with a small number of lottery, the profit will be large, but if you continue to miss, you may lose. ) It is possible to let the player select the playability. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that suits the taste of each player.

In the second embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit continues until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of probable changes may be limited to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension even in an advantageous latent state or probable change state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Further, in the second embodiment, any of 20, 50, and 100 times is set as the time saving period of the normal symbol, but the time saving period is not limited to this, and the time saving period may be arbitrarily set. Good. In addition, a configuration in which a short period of time continues until the next big hit may be made. Specifically, for example, when the probability variation state is set, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol may continue until the next big hit.

In the second embodiment, the main control device 110 outputs the first ball entry command to the voice lamp control device 113, triggered by the detection of the first ball entry to the through gate 67 after the jackpot is completed. .. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the first ball entry command is configured to execute the launch direction notification effect according to the game state when the game state is the latent state or the probability change state, but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in the case of the timing when the main control device 110 determines the game state and executes the launch direction notification effect (the passage of the through gate 67 is detected first after the big hit, and the game state is the latent state or the probability change. It may be configured to output the first ball entry command only in the case of the state). As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the output frequency of the first ball entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the voice lamp control device 113 side determines whether or not the passage is the first time. , The current gaming state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the launch direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to determine whether or not it is the first time, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first ball entry flag 203v, and the processing of the main control device 110 can be performed. The load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the latent probability state or the probability change state is set after the big hit, the launch direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67. The execution condition of is not limited to this. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed when the normal symbol hits, or the launch direction notification effect may be executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). May be. In addition, by combining these, the launch direction notification effect is executed when either the normal symbol hits or the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be configured. Further, for example, the launch direction notification effect according to the game state may be executed after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the big hit. Further, for example, instead of providing an avoidance period, as a mode of the firing direction notification effect, after the big hit, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the direction to be fired. May be good. Here, examples of modes that are difficult for the player to see include, for example, a mode in which characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed as fine characters, and the characters are enlarged with the passage of time. Even with these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the latent state is the latent state or the probabilistic state, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer period of time. ..

In the second embodiment, as an effect during the avoidance period in which the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided (delayed), an effect of notifying the aiming of the through gate 67 is executed. The production mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, it may be notified to aim at the through gate 67 by left-handed regardless of the gaming state. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is prevented (suppressed) that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting right during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability change state is set as the game state, even if the left-handed hit is performed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the right-handed hit and the left-handed hit until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left-handed hit during the avoidance period, the player can efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent state or the probable change state.

In the second embodiment, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are provided as advantageous gaming states, and the latent probability state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probabilistic state may be configured to be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, a time saving period is given at a rate of 75% (that is, the probabilistic state is likely to loop). Configure to be). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot J, K, L (distribution 75%) is obtained in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set and the time saving period is given, resulting in the jackpot I (distribution 25%). In this case, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given (shifts to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent state, the opening A may be set by the majority of jackpot types (for example, at a rate of 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpots F and G (distribution 65%), the opening A is set and a time saving period is given (that is, the person falls into the time saving state), and the jackpot E (distribution 25) is configured. %), The opening B is set and the time saving period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped), and in the jackpot H (distribution 10%), the opening B is set and the time saving period is set. It may be configured to be given (that is, to return to the probabilistic state). With this configuration, contrary to the second embodiment, the probabilistic state can be set to the most advantageous gaming state. Further, in this case, in the avoidance period after shifting to the latent probability state or the probability change state, the effect of notifying the left-handed strike may be executed. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is prevented (suppressed) that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting right during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability change state is set as the game state, even if the left-handed hit is performed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the right-handed hit and the left-handed hit until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left-handed hit during the avoidance period, the player can efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent state or the probable change state. Furthermore, when a right-handed hit is notified when the ball enters the through gate 67, it means that the player has transitioned (or looped) to the most advantageous probability change state, so that the left-handed hit is once notified. By making the player think that he / she has transitioned (or looped) to the latent state, the joy of transitioning (or looping) to the probabilistic state of the player can be amplified.

In the second embodiment, based on the fact that the ball first passes through the through gate 67 after the jackpot is completed, which of the latent state and the probable change state is shifted to by the launch direction notification effect is determined. Although it is configured to notify the player, the notification timing of the game state is not limited to this. For example, when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the game state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t and notified. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the game state at an early stage. Further, for example, the game state after the big hit may be notified during the predetermined round of the big hit (for example, the eighth round) or the ending effect of the big hit.

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is completed, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed based on the fact that the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13 is passed first after the jackpot is completed. Then, during the avoidance period, the effect of suggesting that the through gate 67 on the left side is aimed at may be executed. With this configuration, when the game state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible to make the player perform a left-handed hit that makes it easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. In addition, even if the game state after the big hit is in a probable state, if the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the through gate 67 on the left side is a win, the launch notification effect is confirmed and then the right side. Even if the electric accessory 640a is hit, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently is set before the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the player loses. You can play without having to play. In this case, during the ending period of the jackpot, the ending effect of a mode suggesting returning to left-handed may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being hit into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make the ball hit left before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can be less likely to lose. Further, when the launch direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the small hit winning opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a in the final round of the big hit. Good. With this configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit the ball to the left (win) in the small hit winning opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left-handed strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the configuration so that the player is less likely to lose. In addition, instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated ball entry port (effect ball entry port) that triggers the execution of the launch direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the through gate 67 on the left side.

In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state. More specifically, for example, the difference between the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is small (for example, 1/50 in the low probability state, high probability). The time is 1/49). Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit type with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained is increased (for example, "big hit α" and "big hit α" in which the number of rounds is one round. Beta ”can be determined), and if a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of big hit types that can win a large number of prize balls will be high (for example, the number of rounds will be increased). 15 rounds of "big hit γ" and "big hit δ" can be determined). Then, when the "big hit α" is reached in the normal state in which the game is left-handed, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the jackpot type from which a large number of prize balls can be obtained is easily determined (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), and the time saving state is facilitated. On the other hand, when the "big hit β" is reached in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that the jackpot type with few prize balls can be easily determined (the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed) and the transition to the latent state can be easily performed. Further, in the time saving state in which the game is played by right-handed hitting, the opening A is set when the "big hit γ" is reached, and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, it is configured so that the most advantageous time saving state can be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time saving state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probabilistic state in which the game is played by hitting right is easily set. As a result, when a big hit is made in the time saving state, the time saving state or the probability change state in which the right-handed game is basically set is set, which is the most advantageous for the player. Further, when the "big hit δ" is reached in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probabilistic state in which the game is played by hitting right is easily looped. On the other hand, when the probability change state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous latent state in which the game is played by left-handed is easily set. As a result, the probabilistic state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, but it may shift to the unfavorable latent state after the big hit, so the advantage is lower than the time saving state. Can be done. Further, when the player becomes a "big hit α" in the latent state in which the game is played with a left-handed hit, the opening A is set and a time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that it can shift to the most advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, when the "big hit β" is reached in the latent state, the opening A is set so that the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous normal state in which a game is played by left-handed is easily set. In this way, by changing the combination of the jackpot type and the game state, the correspondence relationship with the opening type, and the correspondence relationship in a short period of time, the time saving state can be made most advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability that the player can be pleased by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the probabilistic state or the latent state which is generally considered to be advantageous. .. In addition, in the normal state or the latent state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the time saving period is not given when the opening B is set as a big hit, so that one round of the big hit in which the opening B is set is not given. By not intentionally hitting the ball with the eyes, it is possible to fundamentally eliminate the anomalous game method that aims to shift to a time-saving state. More specifically, if the opening B is set to give a time saving period at the jackpot, only the time saving period is set after the jackpot by intentionally hitting the switch so that it does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. The most advantageous time saving state is set for. That is, if an irregular game method is performed when a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state, there is a problem that the time is surely set to a shortened state. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the time saving period is not given, so that even if the irregular game method is performed in the first round, the normal state is only set, which is irregular. The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods.

Further, when the time saving state is set to the most advantageous gaming state, the configuration may be such that the probability change state is not provided. That is, the method of shifting the gaming state in the normal state or the latent state may be left as it is, and when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state may be basically looped or the state may be changed to the latent state. More specifically, when the time reduction state becomes "big hit γ", the opening A is set and the time reduction period of 100 times is set. That is, it is configured so that the most advantageous time saving state can be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time reduction state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set so that the time reduction period is not given. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to a disadvantageous latent state. With this configuration, even if the player intentionally does not launch the ball in the first round when the time is reduced to "big hit δ", the player does not move to an advantageous state (time saving period). Is not given, so the normal state is entered), so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the ball is not intentionally launched in the first round. That is, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent state, and the time saving state. In addition, since the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the latent state which is generally considered to be advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel playability that can be done.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent state or the probable change state is set after the jackpot ends, but the avoidance period is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, a configuration may be provided in which the launch direction notification effect is executed immediately after the jackpot is completed and the launch direction notification effect is executed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set when the latent probability state is set may be higher than that when the probability change state is set. With this configuration, when the avoidance period is set, the expectation for a more advantageous latent state can be increased.

<About the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the second embodiment described above, the configuration is such that four gaming states of a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state are switched back and forth.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the three gaming states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are switched back and forth. Then, in the probabilistic state, a loop is made when a big hit occurs, or a time saving state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is set. Further, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the time saving state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is looped, or the state is returned to the most advantageous probability change state in this modified example. With such a configuration, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, even if a big hit occurs, it basically does not shift to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the game can be played with peace of mind.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a method of shifting the gaming state in the modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, when the jackpot F is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (and the jackpot J is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol), the probability change state is replaced with the latent probability state. The method of transitioning to the gaming state is the same as that of the second embodiment, except that the transition to is performed. That is, when the jackpot F is obtained in the normal state (and the jackpot J is reached), the time saving type selection table 202g is basically given a high probability state of the normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set and the opening B is set, the time saving type selection table is given 100 times. 202g has been changed.

In addition, even in the time-saving state, if a jackpot J is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and a jackpot F is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), the state is changed to the probability change state instead of the latent state. Except for the above, the method of shifting the gaming state is the same as that of the second embodiment. That is, in the case of a jackpot J (and a jackpot F) in the time saving state, the time saving type selection table 202g is basically given a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set and the opening B is set, the time saving type selection table is given 100 times. 202g has been changed.

Further, in the probabilistic state, the most advantageous probabilistic state is obtained when the lottery of the second special symbol results in jackpots J, K, L (and when the lottery of the first special symbol results in jackpots F, G, H). It has been changed to loop. That is, when the jackpots J, K, L (and the jackpots F, G, H) in the probabilistic state, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set in each case. .. In addition, when the jackpot is J, K, L (and the jackpot F, G, H) and the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, and the jackpot J , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H), and if the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 100 times is set. Has been done.

In addition, in the probabilistic state, when a jackpot I is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and a jackpot E is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), the time is shortened. That is, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability change state (and the jackpot E is reached), the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set. Further, when the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is reached and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, and the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is obtained, and the probability variation switch 65e3 is pressed. When the ball does not pass, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 50 times is set.

As described above, the probabilistic state can be set to the most advantageous state among the three types of states, that is, the transition method of the gaming state shown in FIG. 73, the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state. Then, when a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state, it can be basically configured to loop the probabilistic state or shift to the time saving state. As a result, when a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I) occurs in the probabilistic state, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most unfavorable normal state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game (so-called immediate disappointment). Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, it is configured to return to the probability change state or the time saving state loops. With this configuration, when a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I, K, L) occurs in a short time state, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most disadvantageous normal state. This can reduce the motivation of the player for the game and prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game (so-called immediate disappointment). Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the jackpot type is unfavorable in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the time saving state is set. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside a ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, the game is played. Some of them are given special games that are advantageous to the player. Only the privileged game is given to such a privileged game (added value after the privileged game is not given), and as the added value after the privileged game, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Some are provided with a second privilege game that is set to a favorable game state. Further, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance provided with a specific area inside. Therefore, once the ball can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state, the privileged game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. Since it is easy to play, it forms an extremely advantageous state for the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous gaming state, the player falls to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. Therefore, when the normal gaming state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the advantageous probabilistic state ends, it is prevented from falling to the most unfavorable normal state, and a relatively advantageous time saving state is set as compared with the normal state. Since the configuration is easy, even when the advantageous probability change state ends, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered, and thus it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the advantageous jackpot type is different depending on the game state, but the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type may be fixed. .. More specifically, for example, the jackpot F and the jackpot J may be an advantageous jackpot type, and the other jackpot types may be a disadvantageous jackpot type. Then, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot F and J are set to shift to the latent state (probability change state in the case of the modified example), and the same state is looped by being set to another jackpot type. May be good. Further, in the latent state, the latent probability state may be looped by becoming a jackpot F and J, and the latent probability state may be changed to another jackpot type. Further, in the probability change state, the probability change state may be looped by becoming jackpots F and J, and the time saving state may be shifted to another jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an advantageous jackpot type and a disadvantageous jackpot type are easy to understand.

In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the game state (latent state or probable change state) that is advantageous when a big hit is made in the time saving state is shifted to, or the time saving state is looped. However, the game state set when a big hit is made in a short time state is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit occurs in a short time state, the opening B may be set so as to be sure. That is, the jackpot may be won before the short period of time elapses, so that the game can be returned to an advantageous gaming state without fail. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit before the time saving period elapses, so that the player's interest in playing the game in the time saving state can be further improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is passed during the jackpot. In this case, a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is given after a big hit according to the big hit type and the game state at the time when the big hit is won. That is, instead of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and this data table is referred to at the end of the jackpot to set the gaming state after the jackpot. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the same effect as that of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the same operation is set for the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type and the game state, but the opening period is changed according to the jackpot type and the game state. Alternatively or additionally, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. With such a configuration, the same effect as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, as long as the probability change switch 65e3 is continuously passed, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuous without limitation, but the number of consecutive times may be limited. Specifically, for example, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is counted, and when the number of consecutive times becomes a specific number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability changes at the next jackpot. It may be configured so that the passage of the switch 65e3 is invalid (the probability change counter 203g or the probability change flag 203u is not updated even if the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on, or the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed). .. Further, a special gaming state is provided in which the flow path solenoid 65k does not change even if a big hit occurs (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is not opened during the big hit), and the number of consecutive high-probability states of the special symbol is a specific number of times. When (for example, 5 times), the flow path solenoid 65k may be shifted to a gaming state in which it does not operate. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the high-probability state of the special symbol from becoming excessively continuous, and thus prevent (suppress) the unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

In each of the above-described embodiments, four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, latent state, and probabilistic state) are configured to go back and forth with a jackpot or the like as an opportunity, and among the four gaming states, the latent state is In order to be more advantageous to the player, when the jackpot is won in the latent state, the gaming state set after the jackpot is completed is higher than when the jackpot is won when other game states are set. It was configured so that a game state advantageous to the player could be easily set.

In addition, in order to embody the technical idea that the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the configuration described in each of the above-described embodiments, that is, the transition ratio of the gaming state set after the big hit is different. It may be configured so that the privilege (for example, a prize ball, etc.) given to the player in the game when the latent state is set is the largest.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 149, as a third embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. Details will be described later, but in the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called). , The simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted), and in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery is structured so that it is easier to win a small hit. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the latent state is set as the gaming state is configured to be shorter than when other gaming states are set, and the most during the latent state. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the latent state more advantageous to the player among the plurality of gaming states (normal state, latent state, probable changing state) that can be transferred triggered by a big hit or the like. it can.

First, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 74, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 670, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form a peripheral portion thereof. It is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 74.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 75) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 74) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 74) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 74) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the third embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the third embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second entrance 1640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 1640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 1640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The electric accessory 1640a may be changed to increase the number of times it is opened more than usual. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 1640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 1640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Triggered by the passage of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays a variation of the third symbol, and balls of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is made visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 75), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 75), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the second symbol display device, each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are displayed. Is a variable display that alternately lights and lights for a predetermined time. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, the pachinko machine 10 draws a winning lottery. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 has an electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the third embodiment). Is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 1640a of the second entrance 1640. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second ball entrance 1640.

It should be noted that the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 1640a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 1640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 670 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the third embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the first symbol display device 37A and 37B. It may be performed by using a part of the 3rd symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 670 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 75), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 1640 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first ball entry port 64. When a ball wins in the second entrance 1640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 75), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins (winning), and the second entry opening 1640 is a winning opening in which the ball wins (winning). Then, one ball is one of the winning openings to be paid out as a prize ball. In the third embodiment, if the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 1640 are different. However, the same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 1640 (for example, both 5). It may be configured as (pieces).

Further, an electric accessory 1640a is attached to the second entrance 1640. The electric accessory 1640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball can easily win a prize in the second entrance 1640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a is longer than that during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entry port 1640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 1640. is there. However, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second entry slot 1640 than when the ball wins the first entry slot 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have the electric accessory 1640a as in the second ball entry port 1640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry 1640. Therefore, the first entry without an electric accessory A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. , It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is likely to be opened, and the second entrance 1640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 1640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and passes through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at making the electric accessory 1640a open and aiming for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is directed to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time is shortened, or is in the normal state). You can change the way of firing "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper side of the second ball opening port 1640, and on the right side thereof is an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the inside of the variable winning device 65 by being closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 1640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is won after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the opening / closing plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until five balls are won).

The opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes and drives the opening and closing plate 65f1 that prevents the ball from entering the entrance portion (specific winning opening 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for this purpose. The opening / closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the second ball entry port 1640, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with only one out port (out port 66), but a plurality of out ports may be provided, for example, a region on the right side of the game board 13 (out port 66). For example, the second out port 66a may be provided on the right side of the second entry port 1640). With this configuration, it is necessary to provide a configuration (flow path) for allowing the ball that has flowed down the game board 13 to flow down toward one location (out port 66) in order to guide the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown). Therefore, the game area of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 2020 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 2020 is executed. A certain RAM 2030 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 2030 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 2030 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 2030 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 2030. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 2030. Writing to the RAM 2030 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 2030 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 2220 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 2230 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 149. In the third embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), and the latent state (the latent state (the time saving state of the normal symbol)). Three gaming states (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) are provided. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed based on the ball entering the second entry port 1640 is made shorter than in other gaming states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds) configuration. In addition, the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state) and the time saving state of the normal symbol (high probability state) are configured so that the hit probability of the normal symbol is almost the same (231/240 → 232/240). The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol is common (1 second x 2 times). As a result, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second entrance 1640 rather than the ball is launched at the first entrance 64 (so-called left-handed). By launching (so-called right-handed), the lottery of special symbols can be executed more efficiently. Hereinafter, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. The lottery of special symbols executed based on the ball is called the second special symbol lottery.

In the third embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period (1.648 seconds x 1 time, 0.06 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times) in a part of the loss. ) It will be released. For this reason, even if the lottery of the second special symbol does not result in a big hit, there are many opportunities to get the prize ball by entering the ball into the specific winning opening 65a, which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol. Will be. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the lottery in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the prize ball is increased in the latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short by opening the specific winning opening 65a even if it becomes a small hit. You can keep it going. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, so that the frequency at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened due to a big hit or a small hit is a latent state. It is significantly reduced compared to. Therefore, in the normal state or the probabilistic state, even if the ball is hit to the right, more balls are used for the game than the prize balls. Therefore, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, it is more advantageous to hit left. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

In the third embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). The variable method is adopted). As a result, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other fluctuation display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop is displayed with the off symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

First, the details of the variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. 76 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76, a second through gate 67 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 86, and a variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. There is a possibility that the ball will reach these second through gates 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player makes a right-handed hit. Note that, in FIG. 76, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided on the front side of the front view of the variable winning device 65 is shown by deleting the portion other than the outer peripheral portion. (CLXXX part in FIG. 76).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b). FIG. 77 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. 76. As shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detection opening 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of the game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing plate 65f1 and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter). It is variable to. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the ball can flow down on the right side of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to open the opening of the specific winning opening 65a by tilting toward the right side in the front view.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable winning device 65 and moves to the second entrance 1640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is allowed to enter the second entry opening 1640 to draw the second special symbol, and the specific winning opening 65a is used in the case of a small hit or a big hit. It is possible to win a prize ball by inserting a ball into the ball by simply continuing to hit the right side. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily in the latent state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game ball winning the specific winning opening 65a is distributed into the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later. The configuration to be used will be described.

First, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). In FIG. 77 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h is in a state of protruding to the left side of the front view (the flow path side where the ball flows down), so that the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 It is a figure which shows the state which the opening surface is closed.

When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of the switching member 65h hindering the flow down the special discharge flow path 65e2, the normal discharge flow path is normal. It is guided to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls from the normal discharge flow path 65e1.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a diagram showing a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by operating the flow path solenoid 65k and immersing the switching member 65h to the right side in the front view. ..

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a V-passage switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is used as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the out balls detected by the V-passing switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot is changed to the probabilistic state of the special symbol ( It is set to the probabilistic state or the latent state). That is, the V-passing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probabilistic state of a special symbol. Further, the switching member 65h has a configuration for allocating the game state after the big hit to the low probability state or the probability change state of the special symbol.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the longest. In the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 78, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is operated for 4 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continuing to the V-passing switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the road 65e2.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection opening 65a1, the winning ball (in the present embodiment, for one ball winning) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected by the detection port 65a1 and configuring it so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V-passing switch 65e3, whether or not to give a probabilistic state of a special symbol. You can also run a lottery. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic state of the special symbol separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one jackpot and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the ease of flowing the ball with respect to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is changed. In the third embodiment, two types of patterns (a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter into the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically showing the time-varying change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpot. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 77 (a)). This off state continues until the start of one round. Then, when the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for only 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 77 (a)). When the 4-second on state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again (normally set to the state where the ball can flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1), and thereafter it is in the off state until the jackpot ends. Is kept in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the case of a jackpot C, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. This open state lasts only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept in the closed state until the elapsed time from the start of one round is 2.9 seconds. Then, when 2.9 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state lasts only for 0.1 seconds, after which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept in the closed state until one round ends and two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. The 1st round in the present embodiment ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 1st round. Since it is very difficult to let the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, basically, when the jackpot C is reached, , The big hit ends without letting the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3. Can be transferred to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the game can be performed with the expectation that the probability variation state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), when any of the jackpots A, B, D to G is obtained, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started. That is, an opening / closing pattern is set that makes it easy for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Therefore, the V-passing switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 3 seconds, which is longer than that of the jackpot C. Therefore, when the jackpots are A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

The on-period of the flow path solenoid 65k is longer than the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for 1 second because the ball reaches the special discharge flow path 65e2 after entering the specific winning opening 65a. This is because it takes a maximum of 1 second. That is, even if a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V passage switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot, a probabilistic state of the special symbol can be given after the jackpot regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an opening / closing pattern that can easily shift to the probabilistic state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed, so that the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed hit is made, it becomes easier to enter the first ball entrance 64. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 79, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), after the jackpot ends, FIG. 79 It shifts to the probability change game state ST2 (probability change state) shown in the center of. Further, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when the jackpot is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot is determined at a rate of 58% in total, the jackpot B or D is determined. It shifts to the latent probability change game state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). To do).

As described above, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency when right-handed is increased, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so that the game efficiency when hitting right is extremely lowered, and the game state becomes disadvantageous compared to the latent state. .. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the jackpots B and D will be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous latent state.

In the normal state, it is normal to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting the left side, but the player intentionally hits the right side and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. Or, as a result of a part of the left-handed ball entering the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be made in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, it is common to all jackpot types (big hits EG) and shifts to the probabilistic game state ST2 (probability change state) after the jackpot ends. If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hits B and D), while the second in the normal state. If a big hit is achieved by a lottery of special symbols, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Further, as described above, even when the jackpots are A, B, D to G, if the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot. , The game state after the big hit is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (loop the normal state). On the other hand, even if the jackpot is the most unfavorable, if the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous as compared with the normal state, but disadvantageous as compared with the latent state. In the probabilistic game state ST2 (probability change state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is continuously out of the lottery for a specified number of times (120 times) after the probabilistic change state, it will move to another game state. Transition.

Specifically, as shown in the central part of FIG. 79, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the left side of FIG. 79 after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) shown in. On the other hand, if either of the jackpots B and D, which is determined at a total rate of 58% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability change game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 79 It shifts to (latent state). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variation state is set again after the jackpot ends (the probability variation state is looped). .. Further, in the probabilistic state, if the lottery of the special symbol of the specified number of times (120 times) is continuously lost, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times elapses.

In the probabilistic state, it is normal to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting the left as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery of symbols. In this case, the probability change game state ST2 (probability change state) is looped after the end of the jackpot, which is common to all jackpot types (big hits EG). If a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hits B and D) as in the normal state. If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, the possibility of shifting to the advantageous latent probable state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and thus it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed. In the latent probability change game state ST3 (latent probability state), when the player is continuously out of the lottery for a specified number of times (120 times) after the latent probability state is reached, the game shifts to another game state. To do.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 79, when the latent state is set and the lottery of special symbols continues for a specified number of times (120 times), it is usually lost after the specified number of times has elapsed. It shifts to the game state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot is reached in the latent state where the game is played by right-handed (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), after the jackpot, it is basically specified (during the jackpot). (If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing game state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the jackpot is completed. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before it is missed 120 times in a row, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. It will be a very advantageous gaming state for the player. Although the details will be described later, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. Since the probability of losing 120 times in a row in the 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), the percentage of jackpots within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Therefore, once the latent state is reached, the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%, which is an extremely advantageous state.

In the latent state, it is normal to play the game by hitting right, so basically the ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed. , If the player makes a mistake in the launch direction, or if the player shifts to the latent state with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol will be displayed even in the latent state. A lottery may be run. In this case, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot C (distribution 10%) is reached in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the normal state is entered after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the big hits A, B, and D are obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent state is set again even after the big hit.

In addition, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the latent state is set even after the end of the jackpot A because of the reserved ball of the first special symbol accumulated before the transition to the latent state. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous probability change state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state shift and a big hit is obtained. Immediately after shifting to the latent state, the reserved 1st special symbol lottery is performed and it becomes a big hit, and if it shifts to the probabilistic state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without benefiting from the latent state. Since it falls, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the advantageous latent state, the ratio of looping the latent state after the big hit is higher than that in the normal state or the probability change state. It is set as. As a result, even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the motivation of the player for the game from being lowered.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 87. FIG. 80 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 80A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on a rear symbol that imitates various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variation display is completed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and other than that. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping diagonal line and an upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 84). ). It is rare that the player does not enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1640 even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 1640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entry port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently reserved. In the third embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probabilistic state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, the variable display of the three third symbols in a simple mode composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probabilistic state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds to) is referred to as a main variation, and in each game state, it is referred to as a main variation. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the normal game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the bird's face as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the variation display based on the holding balls corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, the effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has been started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the variation display effect (variation pattern effect) of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 81A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are changing in the variable display effect. When each symbol string is changing, each symbol sequence is scrolled from the right side to the left side of the screen (variable display). By executing the variable display, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the lottery of the special symbol has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be performed with the expectation that the jackpot stop symbol will be obtained after the end of the variable display effect (the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned with any of the effective lines V1 to V5).

FIG. 81B shows an example of the display content when a reach effect that suggests to the player that the big hit stop symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed occurs in the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is a figure.

Here, the reach means that the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variablely displayed, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. This is an embodiment showing a state in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, and suggesting that the main symbols with the same number are a chance to be aligned on the effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (b), two main symbols with the number "1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line V4, and the number "2" is added on the effective line V5. It shows a state in which two main symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, since the main symbol with the number "1" or "2" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a jackpot stop symbol, so that the player is given a jackpot. You can expect it to be.

When the upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed and reach occurs, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the changing middle symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 81 (b). .. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the stop symbol of the jackpot will be stopped and displayed at the end of the variation effect in which the reach has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a special reach effect which is a kind of reach effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In this special reach effect, after all the symbol columns L1 to L3 are once executed as if they were stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment (temporary stop effect), what is the symbol sequence L1 to L3? A special form of reach in which a different symbol sequence is newly displayed and a reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol sequence and a part (two) of the stopped displayed symbol rows L1 to L3. It is a production. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set so that the expectation that it will be a big hit is higher than the normal reach effect (it will be difficult to select if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order). There is.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the detached stop symbol without being accompanied by reach. In this case, the stop symbol of the combination that reaches the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed when another symbol row exists above the upper symbol row L1. To. In the example of FIG. 82 (a), the main symbol with the number "1" is displayed in the middle row of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. That is, if there is a symbol row further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol "1" on the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number "1" is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are aligned in a straight line. In addition, as the mode of temporary stop in the special reach effect, there are a plurality of modes other than the mode in which the main symbols having the same number are arranged in the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and in the middle row of the middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols having the same number on the left side, the middle row, or the right side are arranged in the vertical direction, or the middle row and the middle symbol of the upper symbol row L1. There is also a mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers on the right side of the column L2 are lined up to the right.

In the special reach effect, after the third symbol of each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), each third symbol displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2. Among the symbols, the main symbol changes to look up. By changing the mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the current variable display effect has not been completed.

After each main symbol is changed to look up, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the looking up direction (upward) of each main symbol. Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of this screen is performed, a new symbol sequence L4 that is changing is displayed at the shifted destination (a new symbol sequence L4 is framed in). Along with this, the lower symbol sequence L4 is framed out from the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frames in), the new symbol row L4 and the "1" displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. The reach state is composed of the main symbol with a number and the main symbol with the number "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol with reach (the main symbol with the number "1") has been changed to wear an aura, and the word "reach!" Is displayed above the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed on the right side when the fluctuation of the new symbol string L4 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number is attached on the new effective line V6. (It becomes a stop symbol of the jackpot), so it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that it is a chance to win the jackpot.

As described above, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. ing. As a result, even when the stop display is displayed due to the combination of the outliers, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols in the expectation that it will develop into a special reach effect. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of stop symbols by paying attention to whether or not the combination of stop symbols can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol sequence L4 is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to expect the development of a special reach effect each time the variable display is stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed above the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. Further, for example, a new symbol string L4 may be displayed between the symbol rows. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4 form a reach. May be good. Further, in the third embodiment, when a new symbol row L4 is displayed, the lower symbol row L3 is deleted, so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Since the type of the displayed symbol string is changed, the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach effect and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach effect can be unified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol sequence L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 84A is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the normal state or the probabilistic state. If there is no hold of the first special symbol (when the number of reserved balls is 0), the combination of the third symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop is 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first entry port 64. Continues to be displayed across. Then, when 30 seconds have passed, the screen switches to the customer waiting demo screen shown in FIG. 84 (b). In the example of FIG. 84 (b), a movie in which the sun sets on the mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demo screen. In this movie, the display content changes with the passage of time. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain according to the elapsed time. By switching to the customer waiting demo screen, the player who is not playing the game can easily determine whether or not the table is vacant. When the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is simplified and displayed (only with numbers) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the normal state or the probable change state, the variation display (sub-variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. Is started, or the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the customer waiting demo screen is displayed even when 30 seconds have passed while only the sub-variation is being executed. It is configured to be done. As described above, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds), the game efficiency is improved when the left-handed hit is performed rather than the right-handed hit. .. For this reason, when the player accidentally hits the right in the normal state or the probabilistic state, and the player quits the game immediately after the fluctuation display (sub-variation) of the second special symbol is started. Will continue to execute the sub-variation for about 600 seconds. Under this circumstance, if the specification is such that the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed during the execution of the sub-variation, the third symbol display device 81 is used even though no one is playing for a maximum of about 600 seconds. There is a risk that the displayed content will appear as if the game is in progress. Therefore, other players may hesitate to start the game on the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation is completed, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the main fluctuation, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen regardless of whether or not the sub-variation is being executed. Then, this customer waiting demo screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main fluctuation is started) regardless of whether or not the sub-variation is being executed. There is. With this configuration, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, it takes about 30 seconds. Later, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is vacant, so that the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84B, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the demo display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed. The stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in substantially the same size, but for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub-variation. It may be displayed. Further, in the display screen shown in FIG. 84 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the center. The special symbol of the above may be stopped and displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side of the sub-variation may be stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen. As a result, regardless of the game state, the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation can be easily grasped only by checking the specific portion of the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the third embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect different from the normal variable display (an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the latent state, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Then, the variation display (sub-variation in the latent state) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed in the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed in the upper right of the screen. As described above, in the latent state, it is a regular game method to aim at the second entrance 1640 by hitting right, so the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. Is displayed in a display area larger than the fluctuation display (sub-variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that becomes the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that becomes the sub-variation is the second special symbol. Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is not changed from the center of the upper part of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, at least a part of the data for executing the display related to the sub-variation (variation display or demo display) can be shared and used.

In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. By displaying this character, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that right-handed is a regular game method.

Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm, a guideline for the remaining number of times in the latent state (a guideline for the number of lottery until the transition to the normal state) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 85 (a), "40 times remaining" is displayed, and if the lottery of the special symbol is missed 40 times in a row, the player may shift to the normal state. Suggests to. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of times the latent probability state is continued when the first transition from another gaming state (normal state or probability change state) to the latent state. It is displayed, and the value is subtracted and displayed one by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, even if a big hit is made by a lottery of a special symbol, the number of times before the big hit is continuously displayed even after the big hit is completed without resetting the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. That is, when it becomes a big hit, the number of times displayed and the actual number of remaining times deviate from each other). If the player keeps hitting right according to the displayed instruction (the character "right-handed"), the ball can be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it can be done, 120 new latent states are set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if a big hit occurs during the latent probability state, the number of times the latent probability state actually continues is larger than the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. The details will be described later, but the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of latent states on the actual display is the remaining number of times on the display when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0. Is added (added) to (see FIG. 87). As a result, even if the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0.

As mentioned above, it is easy to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so even if the opening / closing plate 65f1 is movable (variable) in the open state, it may have been moved by winning the big hit. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if a big hit or a small hit occurs, the character 811 remains in the display mode in which the character 811 runs during the big hit or the small hit, so that the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit from the appearance. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or a small hit. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of times on the display is set to 0. If this happens, it can be difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be added and displayed. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the remaining number of times will be added and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

As described above, since the variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 1640 are both arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter by hitting right, the display during the big hit and the small hit is displayed. Even if the mode is the same as that during the change of the third symbol or the stop display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from acquiring and missing the prize ball of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0 without causing a loss to the player, it is possible to more strongly expect that the number of times is added and displayed.

FIG. 85B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is completed within 30 seconds. In this case, the same display mode as during the change (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is displayed except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the third embodiment, the function of holding the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not provided, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds) in the latent state. Therefore, the frequency of the fluctuation stop state becomes extremely high. Under this circumstance, if the display mode is changed (switched) between when the symbol is changing and when the movement is stopped, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. Further, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 may increase.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the display mode of the main display area Dm is standardized between the variable display of the symbol and the stop display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode from being frequently switched, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused. In addition, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the latent probability state while the fluctuation is stopped, the display mode is switched to the display mode (demonstration display for latent probability) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stops. By switching the display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation stop state continues for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation was stopped in the latent state, a screen different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 84 (b)) (demo display for latent probability) is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in a latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, trouble that another player starts the game on the pachinko machine 10 is prevented (suppressed). can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and it is unlikely that the player will quit the game during the latent state. Therefore, the player who is playing the game is only temporarily away from his / her seat. This is because it can be recognized by other players.

Further, in the latent state in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short. Therefore, when the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) is displayed, the second input is performed thereafter. When the ball enters the ball opening 1640 and it takes a long time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the fluctuation time ends before the effect accompanying the entry is displayed. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel distrust that the effect is not executed even though the ball has entered the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, instead of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 85 (b)) in the latent state, the same character 811 as during the fluctuation is continuously displayed for the latent probability demo display (FIG. 85 (c)). Since the configuration is such that (see) is performed, the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched when a ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86A, the latent state end screen displayed when the latent state ends will be described. FIG. 86A is a diagram showing the latent state end screen. This latent state end screen is displayed when the number of remaining lottery in the latent state becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit switches to the mode of falling to the ground, and on the upper side of the character 811, "Return to end left-handed. The display area 812 on which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. Further, on the right side of the character 811, the characters "return to left-handed" are displayed. With this display, it is possible to make the player more surely return to the left-handed strike. It should be noted that this latent state end screen detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 and the fluctuation display is started, or the first special symbol is changed and stopped after the latent state is completed. It will continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have passed. Then, when any of these two conditions is satisfied, the prize ball acquired during the latent state and the result screen showing the total number of times the latent state has continued are displayed. The details of this result screen will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b).

FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is first detected and the variation display of the first special symbol is started after the latent state is completed, the variation is caused. A result screen showing the result of the latent state is displayed using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the characters "456GAME" are displayed as the number of times the latent state has continued (the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the latent state), and the number of times the latent state has continued. Below the character indicating, the character "10030 points earned!" Is displayed, which indicates the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the normal state without questioning the finished latent state. In addition, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, the player can be made to play a game aiming at a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the result of the latent state during the latent state, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the result of the latent state is displayed during the variable display that is finally executed in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for an extremely short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after the end of the latent state, the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so that the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player more surely confirm the result of the latent state, two special symbols are drawn after the latent state is completed. A fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can more reliably confirm the result display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the latent state was completed, no entry into the first entry port 64 was detected (the variation display of the first special symbol was not started). , The result is displayed instead of the customer waiting demo screen. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol, which is executed when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is first detected, is completed. As a result, even a player who has left the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like immediately after the latent state is completed can be surely confirmed the result of the latent state.

In the third embodiment, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. Then, the display may be continued until the variable display of the first first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the finished latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-handed ball, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

Further, when displaying the result of the latent state immediately after the latent state ends, a measuring means for measuring the period after the latent state ends is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, 12) is provided by the measuring means. The result may be displayed until the elapse of seconds). In this case, if the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts before the predetermined period elapses, the result is continuously displayed until the fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts after the predetermined period elapses. In that case, it may be configured to execute a normal display other than a result display in the fluctuation.

Further, when the variation of the first special symbol for displaying the result in the latent state is won, it is preferable to change the display mode of the result. For example, it is preferable to display "10030 points or more !!" as a suggestion display suggesting that the player has won the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. 86 (b). In this way, by displaying the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol using the result content of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol without discomfort. .. In addition, if a jackpot is won during the period when the result display of the latent state is executed and the result shifts to the latent state again, the result contents in the previous latent state are taken over and updated. Good. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played the game during the period when the result display in the latent state is being executed.

In addition, as an effect during the latent state, a display similar to the display screen of the result of the latent state displayed after the end of the latent state is used by using a period of one special symbol change or a plurality of special symbol changes. An effect in which the screen is displayed (pseudo-end effect) may be used. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and even when the latent state is actually terminated and the result display of the latent state is executed, the latent state is continued for the player. You will be able to expect that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a revival effect, which is a type of effect executed during the latent state, will be described. This revival effect is an effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lottery times in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes 0. More specifically, when the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining number of lottery on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number is added to the remaining number on the display. It is a production to be displayed.

When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes 0 times, as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 86A) is displayed. , The effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 87, the character 811 that has once fallen to the ground stands up, and the characters "Resurrection" are displayed around the character 811. By executing the effect of this aspect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous latent state continues, so that the player can be pleased. Further, as the character 811 stands up, the actual number of remaining latent states is displayed in addition to the remaining number display area D1. FIG. 87 illustrates a case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to the content of "remaining 10 times" because the actual number of remaining latent states remains 10 times.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state and the remaining number of times (actual remaining number) of the latent state is updated to 120 times, the remaining number is left. The remaining number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area D1 (the remaining number of times on the display) is not reset, and the display contents of the big hit are inherited. Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display and the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the difference from the actual remaining number of times is added and notified. It is configured to execute the production. With this configuration, even when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the latent state.

In the present embodiment, in the revival effect, the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state and the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the revival effect to be executed first, a value smaller than the difference may be added and displayed, and once the revival effect is executed, the revival effect may be executed a plurality of times. As a result, if the resurrection effect is first executed in the latent state of 1, it is confirmed that the resurrection effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times added by the resurrection effect ends, so that the resurrection effect is executed next. You can play the game with confidence until the production is performed. In addition, the game can be played while looking forward to how many times the revival production will be performed. Further, when this resurrection effect is executed, it is preferable to execute the result display displayed when the latent state is completed, and then execute the resurrection effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 75) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 2030 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 88) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 2030. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 2030, each counter value is stored for each of the winning counter values for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a and the second entrance ball opening 1640. A second special symbol execution area 2030b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value becomes the second. 1 It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, and when a game ball wins in the second entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first ball opening 64. If the number of reserved balls in the first entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player only as a prize ball (five prize balls in this embodiment) without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 with respect to the first entrance 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 1640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 88. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 479), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1640. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b of the RAM 2030. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 2020a (see FIG. 90A) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit defined in the first random number table 2020a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 2020b (see FIG. 90B) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 2020a will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (a). The first hit random number table 2020a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90A, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of is any of "7,8", and if it is any of "7,8", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "0 to 5". If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Next, the small hit random number table 2020b will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (b). The small hit random number table 2020b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90B, the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the game state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a or the second special symbol execution area 2030b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first is 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "7, 8" are the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 2020a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first hit random number table as described above. It is stored in 2020a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 6 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 2020b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 2020e (see FIG. 91 (b)). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIGS. 92 to 94) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 2020 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 2020f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 92 to 94). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 2020f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of them according to the result of the winning / failing determination. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 2030.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 2020c (see FIG. 90C) stored in the ROM 2020 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit specified in the second hit random number table 2020c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 2020c will be described with reference to FIG. 90 (c).

FIG. 90C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 2020c. In this second hit random number table 2020c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 231 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 230". .. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 231. Therefore, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "231/240".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 232, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/240". As described above, in the present embodiment, since the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol differs only by one between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probabilities are almost the same. There is. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 when the normal symbol hits are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 1640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the probabilistic state is extremely longer (to 600 seconds) than the fluctuation time in the latent state. As a result, in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes more difficult to be executed than in the latent probable state. Therefore, in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the player is aimed at the first entrance 64. Can be done.

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 3 seconds. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second hit random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 230", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entry port 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 2020g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. (See FIG. 95) is specified in the ROM 2020 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map variation pattern table 2020g will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

As described above, the RAM 2030 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Next, the contents of the ROM 2020 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 95. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 2020 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 2020, in addition to the first hit random number table 2020a, the small hit random number table 2020b, and the second hit random number table 2020c already described above, the big hit type selection table 2020d, the small hit type selection table 2020e, and the variable pattern selection At least a table 2020f and a normal map variation pattern table 2020g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 2020d will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). The jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 2020d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 31". .. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 32 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 32% (32/100).

In addition, when it becomes "big hit A", whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given depends on the game state at the time when "big hit A" is won and whether the V passing switch 65e3 is passed during the big hit. It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), if the "big hit A" is obtained in the normal state and the probabilistic state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, at the end of the big hit. The time reduction number of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V-passing switch e3 is not passed during the jackpot, or when the jackpot is hit in the latent state and the V-passing switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the time reduction number is not set. (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when the "big hit A" is reached in the normal state or the probability change state, in many cases, the number of probability changes of 120 times and the number of time reductions of 120 times are set by passing the ball through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit. The game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state. On the other hand, when the hit is "big hit A" in the latent state, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times (and the time reduction number of 0 times) is set, and the game state after the big hit. Is in a latent state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, the normal state most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. To.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but in the normal state and the probable change state, it is basically a probable state as a game state after the big hit ends. Is set (an advantageous latent state is not given), which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big hit. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit ends, so that it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player in the latent state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "32 to 80", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" has 7 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the end of "big hit B", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit B", the latent probability state (probability variation number 120 times, time reduction number 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 48 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 48% (48/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the fewest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 during the big hit (right hit) (If this is done), the game shifts to a latent state that is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state, which is advantageous in terms of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. ..

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "81 to 90" in association with "big hit C". This "big hit C" has 7 rounds, and as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 78 (b)) that makes it difficult to pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot is set. To. In addition, after the end of "big hit C", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "big hit C", the normal state (both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Big hit C" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the smallest and the normal state that is basically the most disadvantageous is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. is there. Although the possibility is low, if the ball can be won into the specific winning opening 65a within a short time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the end of "big hit D", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit D", the latent probability state (probability variation number 120 times, time reduction number 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Big hit D" has the largest number of rounds, and basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so the most advantageous big hit type for the player. one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. ..

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79". This "big hit E" has 7 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. In addition, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "big hit A". That is, it becomes "big hit E" in the normal state or the probability change state, and when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the time reduction number of 120 times is set, and the game state after the big hit becomes the probability change state. .. In addition, if the ball passes the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot by winning the "big hit E" in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the jackpot is the latent state. Becomes (loops the latent state). If the ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of time reductions is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 80 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

This "big hit E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit E" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit, so it is a game state after the big hit. Is in the player's favor.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the ball becomes "big hit E" in the normal state or the probabilistic state and shifts to the probabilistic state when the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 is an irregular state in which the ball always hits right even in the normal state or the probable change state. This is to suppress various game methods. That is, even if the "big hit E" is set in the normal state or the probability change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the normal state is expected to shift to the advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (right-handed) even in the probabilistic state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot (big hit EG) of the second special symbol is obtained in the normal state or the probabilistic state, and when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probabilistic state is set as the game state after the jackpot. Is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state or the probabilistic state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 95", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "big hit A" and "big hit E". That is, when the "big hit F" is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 are counter values that become "big hit F", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

Although the number of rounds of this "big hit F" is large, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other jackpot types. More specifically, in the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "big hit F", an opening / closing pattern (special opening / closing pattern) in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds is set. Since it is difficult to get the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to win the prize ball in the 2nd to 15th rounds of "Big hit F". In this way, when the "big hit F" is reached, the special opening / closing pattern is set by the small hit or the "big hit F" when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state. This is to make it ambiguous. Although the details will be described later, the small hit of the present embodiment includes a small hit A in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C that repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, by setting a special opening / closing pattern when the "big hit F" is obtained, the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be made similar to the case where the small hit B or the small hit C is obtained after the small hit A. it can. As a result, it becomes "big hit F" during the latent state, and it is difficult to identify whether the latent state of 120 times has been reset or whether the small hits have been won consecutively and the number of times has been subtracted. Can be done. Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual remaining number of times (whether or not the latent state ends when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0) is determined. Since it can be difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0 times, the game is played with the expectation that the revival effect (see FIG. 87) will be performed and the remaining number of times on the display will be additionally displayed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while the player is in the latent state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 99", "big hit G" is associated and defined. This "big hit G" has 15 rounds, and as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern that allows (easily) pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (c)). Is set. Further, the number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as "big hit A", "big hit E", and "big hit F". That is, when the "big hit G" is won in the normal state or the probable change state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit G", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

This "big hit G" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hits, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit G" in the latent state, it basically loops in the latent state even after the big hit, so it is a game state after the big hit. Is also advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a left-handed hit is made in a normal state or a probability change state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a 58% ratio (big hits B and D) is an advantageous latent state. It is configured to move to. Then, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits EG). Therefore, once the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640 by hitting right. It is easy to execute, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can play the game for one purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 2020e will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). The small hit type selection table 2020e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the small hit type selection table 2020e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 91 (b), "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only for 1.648 seconds x 1 time during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs the opening / closing operation once or a plurality of times is executed, triggered by the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to a big hit or a small hit when the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation in the latent state. Can be done. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the latent state has never been a big hit, the revival effect is performed when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display approaches 0. Can be expected. In this embodiment, when the second special symbol is drawn, the percentage of small hits is about 46%. For this reason, in the 120 special symbol lottery set as the latent state, the small hit is won about 55 times. Therefore, since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened / closed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 2020f will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 2020f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 92, the fluctuation pattern selection table 2020f includes the normal table A2020f1 for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal state and the normal table B2020f2, and the fluctuation pattern for determining the fluctuation pattern in the probability variation state. At least a probability variation table 2020f3 and a latency table 2020f4 for determining a variation pattern in the latency state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table A2020f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. This normal table A is a table that is referred to when the game state is the normal state and the lottery of special symbols other than twice is executed immediately after the end of the latent probability change state. FIG. 93 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table A2020f1. As shown in FIG. 93, the normal table A2020f1 has a random number value (counter of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type of the special symbol. Value) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. To do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, when the number of reserved balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds). The fluctuation pattern of is associated with the normal reach (20 seconds) out of the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151-170", and the out-of-order super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171-198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, a variation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation type. As the value of the counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150", and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170". Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been done. The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A2020f1 (see Y307 of Y210) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved sphere of the first special symbol (see Y303 of FIG. 102). It will be executed later. Therefore, the normal table A2020f is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4), the balls are further moved to the first entrance 64. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the loss has occurred.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table A2020f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the normal table B2020f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a). The normal table B2020f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is in the normal state and the number of lottery of special symbols is within 2 times after the latent state is completed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the normal table B2020f2 is referred to, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation after ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ing. When the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, the out-of-ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first or second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery after the latent state is completed, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. During this 12 seconds, the result display of the latent state described above (see FIG. 86 (b)) is performed. By selecting a fixed fluctuation time, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for displaying the result. Therefore, the player can be made to sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), for the lottery of the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the case of the normal table A2020f1. Since the contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned normal table A2020f1 with reference to FIG. 93, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, after the end of the latent probability, the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set not only when the first special symbol lottery is completed but also when the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed first between the end of the latent state and the return to left-handed. .. As in the present embodiment, if the variation time of 12 seconds is set even in the second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent probability, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is started first. Since the fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set by executing the lottery of the first special symbol after that, regardless of whether or not the lottery of the first special symbol is executed first, each time. The result can be displayed for the same time after the end of the latent state of. Further, in the latent state, it is conceivable that the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed twice in a row. However, as described above, when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the latent probability state ends (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds), the result display is performed. It has a structure. Therefore, even in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

In addition, instead of displaying the result of the latent state during the latent state, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the result of the latent state is displayed during the variable display that is finally executed in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for an extremely short time. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after the end of the latent state, the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so that the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in the third embodiment, in order to make the player more surely confirm the result of the latent state, two special symbols are drawn after the latent state is completed. A fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can more reliably confirm the result display.

In the present embodiment, the fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display content of the result display to be executed is the first. It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display suggesting a win may be executed in addition to the display content of the result display. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol whose change is executed at the same time (in parallel) as the change of the first special symbol whose result display is executed based on the change of the first special symbol is won. In addition to the display content of the result display executed based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display suggesting a hit may be executed. With this configuration, the game result in the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed twice in succession after the latent state is completed, the result display is executed only for the first fluctuation. In the second variation, the variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game result in the latent state is excessively displayed and the variable display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

Further, the probability variation table 2020f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A2020f1, so it will be briefly described. However, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is the same as the normal table A2020f1. Each fluctuation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected by the selection ratio. Further, even when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the normal state. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than in the normal state is easily selected. This is because the jackpot probability increases in the probabilistic state, and if the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time frequently occurs despite the deviation, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed during the probability change state, the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is set. The structure is such that the player is more strongly expected to be a big hit when selected.

Next, the details of the latent probability table 2020f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). The latent probability table 2020f4 is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the jackpot of the first special symbol is defined by associating the hit middle fluctuation (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Has been done. Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation ultra-short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the jackpot of the second special symbol hits the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 and has a super short variation (0.5 seconds). Is specified in association with each other, and the small hit ultra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for the small hit of the second special symbol. In the deviation of the second special symbol, the deviation ultra-short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the latent state, since the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed, the fluctuation time is about 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently (speedily) by hitting right in an advantageous latent state. Further, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is missed in the latent state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time, so that, for example, there is one or more hold of the first special symbol. When the player enters the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, the player can be made to concentrate on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is the main fluctuation in the latent state.

In addition, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, a relatively long fluctuation time (60 seconds) is set when the big hit of the first special symbol is made in the latent state. This is because there is a possibility that the latent state will end. Specifically, when the jackpot C is reached in the latent state, an opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 78B) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 is set for the switching plate 65f1, so that the jackpot is basically a jackpot. The game state after the end becomes the normal state. When such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a relatively long fluctuation time is set, and a right-handed hit is performed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to perform the second special. It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed multiple times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won about once every two times (at about 46%), so that the second special symbol is won before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation of. As described above, in the present embodiment, a simultaneous variation method capable of simultaneously executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is adopted. In addition, if the fluctuation display of one special symbol is confirmed as a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit during simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. Regardless of the result, it will be forcibly stopped with the off symbol. Therefore, even during the jackpot change of the first special symbol, the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded by first confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the small hit due to the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, which may end the latent state, with a high probability, so that the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. You can do it.

In the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol set according to the latent probability state, but the probability is small (for example, "1/199"). ) May be configured to select a long variation time (eg, 12 seconds). Further, when the long fluctuation time is selected, a result display showing the above-mentioned game result in the latent state (actually, the game result during the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player think that the latent state has ended during the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, which is an effect that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the normal map variation pattern table 2020 g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 2020g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 95, in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g, the value range of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2. Fluctuation patterns are associated. Further, even when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the game state is the latent state, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal map fluctuation type counter. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is associated with the range in which the value of CS2 is "191 to 198". When the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the time from the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol to the release of the electric accessory 1640a is predicted by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It can be difficult. Therefore, one ball is launched into the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, and when the ball passes through any of the through gates, the electric accessory 1640a hits the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method of hitting a ball by predicting the timing of opening, and to make a continuous right-handed hit during a latent state.

In the third embodiment, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have variations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is set to either 1 second or 3 seconds, but the fluctuation time is 2 types. However, it may be configured so that a larger fluctuation time can be selected. The more variation the fluctuation time has, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player make a more reliable and continuous right-handed hit during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to this, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent state, and after that (51). (From times to 120 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is set. The smaller the number of lottery held and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time is easily selected as the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol increases. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to accumulate, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 2030 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 2030 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, a second special symbol execution area 2030b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 2030d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 2030e, V winning flag 2030f, time saving counter 2030g, winning counter 2030h, special figure 1 standby flag 2030i, special figure 2 standby flag 2030j, probability variation counter 2030k, jackpot flag 2030m, winning state storage area 2030n, small hit It has at least a flag 2030o, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p, a look-ahead hold storage area 2030r, a special figure 1 variable timer 2030s, a special figure 2 variable timer 2030t, a big hit medium flag 2030u, a small hit medium flag 2030v, and other memory areas 2030z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a is the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 2030b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. In the second special symbol execution area 2030b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through either the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 2030c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 2030a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the third symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see Y1504 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Y303 in FIG. 102).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (Y304 in FIG. 102, FIG. 114 in FIG. 114). See Y1505). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is a reserved ball for variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts a number (number of waits) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. As the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see Y1704 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Y1605 in FIG. 115).

When the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second through gate 670 or the second through gate 67. The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c (see Y1705 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 670 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 2030e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c. Not stored (see Y1703: No in FIG. 116).

The V winning flag 2030f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probabilistic state. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the V-passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77B) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON (see Y2410 in FIG. 123). On the other hand, the V winning flag 2030f is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122). The V winning flag 2030f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the V winning flag 2030f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the V passing switch 65e3 has passed, the V winning flag is won. The flag 2030f may be formally set to on and configured to return. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the V-passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, for example, a passing counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 is provided, and the value of the passing counter is greater than 0. It can be determined by the presence. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the V winning flag 2030f is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The time saving counter 2030g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. The time saving counter 2030g is set to 120 when one of the jackpots A and E to G is won in the normal state or the probability variation state and the V winning flag 2030f is turned on at the end of the jackpot game. Further, the time reduction counter 2030 g is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see Y607 in FIG. 105). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed by referring to the table for high probability time. (See Y1610 in FIG. 115). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 2030 g is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability (see Y1611 in FIG. 115).

The winning counter 2030h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a in each round of big hits. When the value of the winning counter 2030h becomes 5, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see Y2406 in FIG. 123). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 2030h is less than 5, the round is ended when the round period set for each round is reached. The value of the winning counter 2030h is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected in the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in the variable stop state. If the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in the variable stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is changing or the first special symbol is on hold. It means that it is the state immediately before the start of the fluctuation display based on the sphere. The special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see Y311 in FIG. 102). On the other hand, when the fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set, it is set to off (see Y309 in FIG. 102).

The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. When the special figure 1 standby flag 2030j is on, it means that the second special symbol is in the variable stop state, and when it is off, it means that the second special symbol is changing. The special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to on when the second special symbol is not changing and the starting prize for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (see Y809 in FIG. 107). On the other hand, when the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to off (see Y807 in FIG. 107).

The probability variation counter 2030k is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (special) of the special symbol. Indicates that the symbol is in a low probability state).

The initial value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 is set at the end of the jackpot (see Y2304 in FIG. 122). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 105) executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by 1 (see FIG. 105). See Y602). Further, the probability variation counter 2030k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see Y708 in FIG. 106 and Y1309 in FIG. 112). The probability variation counter 2030k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108). (See Y402 in FIG. 103 and Y902 in FIG. 108).

The jackpot flag 2030m is determined so that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second entry port 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. In this case, it is a flag set to ON (see Y406 in FIG. 103 and Y906 in FIG. 108). The jackpot flag 2030m is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y708 in FIG. 106 and Y1309 in FIG. 112). A 2-bit storage area is allocated to the jackpot flag 2030m, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bit and the information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bit. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 2030m is "10B", it means that the lottery of the first special symbol is a jackpot, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is "01B", it means that the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot and the variable display indicating the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2030m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot fluctuation is not executed.

When the jackpot flag 2030m is on and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on ends, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the off symbol is executed (Y705 in FIG. 106, FIG. 112). Y1306). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 2030n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the values of the time saving counter 2030g and the probability variation counter 2030k are both 0), the normal state is shown in the winning state storage area 2030n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state (if the values of the time reduction counter 2030g and the probabilistic counter 2030k are both 1 or more), the winning state storage area 2030n is used as information indicating the probabilistic state. "01H" is stored. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more), the latent state is hidden in the winning state storage area 2030n. "02H" is stored as information indicating a certain state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 2030n is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the time saving game after the jackpot ends (see Y2301 in FIG. 122). As described above, when the jackpots are A, E to G and the ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state. I'm letting you. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the game state at the time of big hit winning is stored in the winning state storage area 2030n, and by referring to the information at the end of the big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type and the game state at the time of big hit winning. An appropriate gaming state can be set.

The small hit flag 2030o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entry port 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see Y1002 in FIG. 109). The small hit flag 2030o is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see Y1405 in FIG. 113). When the small hit flag 2030o is on and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see Y1403 in FIG. 113). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. it can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even if there is a new entry to the second entry opening 1640. (See Y801: Yes in FIG. 107). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see Y703 in FIG. 106), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If so, it is set to off (Y811 in FIG. 107).

The look-ahead hold storage area 2030r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing when the original special symbol lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, immediately after the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols is drawn separately from the original lottery. From the counter value, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated). In this way, predicting various information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead". In the look-ahead hold storage area 2030r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning prize for the first ball opening 64, the look-ahead result based on the counter value (the result of winning / failing the lottery of the special symbol, in the case of a big hit) The jackpot type and fluctuation pattern) are stored. Further, in the look-ahead hold storage area 2030r, the same number of look-ahead results as the number of hold balls (that is, a maximum of 4) can be stored.

The special figure 1 variable timer (special figure 1 variable time timer) 2030s and the special figure 2 variable timer (special figure 2 variable time timer) 2030t are used to measure the variable times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer (special figure 2 fluctuation time timer) 2030t. (See Y701 in FIG. 106 and Y1301 in FIG. 112).

The jackpot hit flag 2030u is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 2030u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. The jackpot middle flag 2030u is set to on when the jackpot start is set (see Y709 in FIG. 106 and Y1310 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see Y2307 in FIG. 122).

The small hit medium flag 2030v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. When the small hit medium flag 2030v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. The small hit medium flag 2030v is set to on when the start of the small hit is set (see Y1406 in FIG. 113). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see Y2512 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 2030z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 2020 and the flags and counters provided in the RAM 2030, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 79 can be realized.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 97A, the ROM 2220 has at least a variation pattern selection table 2220a and a screen display selection table 2220b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 2220a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110. The mode of the special reach effect described above (see FIGS. 82 and 83) is also defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 2220a, and the fluctuation content indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is a hit super reach A or a missed super reach A. It is selected in some cases.

The screen display selection table 2220b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have elapsed from the state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. As described above, in the present embodiment, the simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, the situation in which the other special symbol is changing frequently occurs. Further, depending on the game state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, or the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol that should be noticed by the player is switched. The screen display selection table 2220b is referred to in order to appropriately display the variation display of the main symbol in each game state and to set the demo display corresponding to the game state in the state where the main variation is stopped. The details of the screen display selection table 2220b will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 2220b. As shown in FIG. 98, the screen display selection table 2220b is a third symbol display device in association with the combination of the game state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the 81 is specified. The special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol were stopped from fluctuating, respectively. It is a flag to indicate. When each flag is on, it indicates that a predetermined time has passed, and when it is off, the fluctuation is being displayed based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or the fluctuation is stopped for a predetermined time ( 30 seconds) or less.

As shown in FIG. 98, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state, the display content (screen display type) is displayed for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. ) Is specified as normal display. In this normal display, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display contents. In the normal state, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation. Therefore, by setting the normal display, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed.

In the normal state or the probabilistic state, the demo display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When this demo display is determined, a customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 84 (b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is completed, the display is switched to the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether the sub change is being executed or not. As a result, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entry port 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is vacant, so that the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

A demo display is also associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are off in the normal state or the probabilistic state. Therefore, in this case as well, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 84 (b) and 84 (c)) is set. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the special display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. This special display means the above-mentioned latent probability demo display (see FIG. 85 (c)), and a special mode of demo display in which the same character 811 as during the fluctuation is continuously displayed is set. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched. The special display is also set when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both turned on. That is, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation was in the fluctuation stop state, the special display is displayed. Set.

In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special symbol was put into the variable stop state, the variable display or the stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

Next, the RAM 2230 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 includes a command storage area 2230a, a winning information storage area 2230b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 2230f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g, effect counter 2230h, state setting area 2230i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, special figure 1 standby counter 2230k, and sub special figure 2 Stand-by flag 2230m, special figure 2 standby counter 2230n, remaining probability variation number area 2230o, effect probability variation number area 2230p, remaining time reduction number area 2230q, special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, special figure 2 standby flag 2230t. And other memory areas 2230z are provided at least.

The command storage area 2230a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 2230a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 2230b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first entry hole 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 obtained in response to the start winning prize, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 2230b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to 4 times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d stored in the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c sets the reserved ball number as the special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c (see Y4310 in FIG. 130). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2230c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2230c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 2230c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the display control device 114 holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 2030d of the main control device 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see Y4304 and Y4307 in FIG. 130) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4702 and Y4706 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230, and is included in the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See Y4401 in FIG. 131), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Y4710 in FIG. 135). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 2230h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 2230h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 128) is executed, the value is added and updated by 1. Will be done.

The state setting area 2230i is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from the main control device 110 is received in the status setting area 2230i, the information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is updated (Y4011 in FIG. 127, FIG. See Y4506 in 132). More specifically, the state setting area 2230i is allocated a 2-bit storage area, and in order from the high-order bit, whether or not it is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and whether or not it is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 2230i is "11B", it means that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the probabilistic state), and if it is "10B", it is special. It means that the symbol is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol is in the normal state (that is, the latent state). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is in a normal state.

By updating the state setting area 2230i in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped by the voice lamp control device 113.

The sub-special figure 1 standby flag 2230j and the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 2230m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is in the fluctuation state. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i and the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j of the main control device 110.

The special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. When the count value corresponding to the special symbol that is the main fluctuation in the current gaming state of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game is played. Demonstration effects are set according to the state (see Y4211 in FIG. 129).

The remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 2230q are storage areas for storing the remaining number of times of the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 2230q are notified by the residual probability variation number command and the remaining time reduction frequency command that are output each time the values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g are updated in the main controller 110, respectively. It is updated to the number of times (see Y4652 and Y4662 in FIG. 134). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining time reduction frequency area 2230q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g of the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device can be updated. The remaining number of probability changes and the number of time reductions grasped by 113 can be matched with the actual number of probability changes and the number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The effect probability variation number area 2230p is a storage area for storing a guideline for the remaining number of times in the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent probability state. In this effect probability variation number area 2230p, 120 is set when the game transitions from another gaming state to the latent probability state (see Y4505 in FIG. 132). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is changed in the latent state (see Y4657 in FIG. 134).

The special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if they are on, It indicates that the fluctuation stop state of the corresponding special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is changing or is within 3 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. The special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are turned on when the count values of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k and the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n correspond to 30 seconds, respectively. It is set (see Y4204 and Y4208 in FIG. 129).

The standby set flag 2230u is demo-produced with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) as 30 seconds have passed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol was stopped from fluctuating. This is a flag indicating whether or not the screen display such as (see FIGS. 84 (b), (c), and 85 (c)) is set. This standby set flag 2230u is set to on when the screen display is newly set with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b in the customer waiting effect processing (see FIG. 129) (see Y4212 in FIG. 129). ). Further, when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is newly set to on (see Y4204 and Y4208 in FIG. 129), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t When is newly set to off, the standby set flag 2230u is set to off.

The power off flag 2230y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 2230y is set to on before the power-off process is executed after receiving the power-off command from the main controller 110 (see Y4115 in FIG. 128). After that, since the RAM 2230 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 2230 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 2230y is turned on in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 127) (see Y4008: Yes in FIG. 127), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 2230y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 2230 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 2230. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 2230 is cleared (see Y4009 in FIG. 127). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 2230z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 2340a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 2340a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 2340a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 2340a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 has the address specified by the bus line 240 indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, while the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed after the boot process (see Y6001 in FIG. 136) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see Y6003 and Y6004 in FIG. 136).

The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 136) (see Y6005 in FIG. 136). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see Y7605 in FIG. 147 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Y6301 in FIG. 138 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 138 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 138 (b) see Y6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Y7501 in FIG. 147 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 147 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 138 (b). ), The pointer update process (see Y7205 in FIG. 144) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 138 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Y7207 in FIG. 144). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see Y7713 in FIG. 148). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Y7714 in FIG. 148). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Y7802 in FIG. 149).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see Y6306 in FIG. 138 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see Y7001 in FIG. 143 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see Y7709 in FIG. 148), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see Y7710 in FIG. 148). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 143 (a). ) Y7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (see Y7221 in FIG. 144), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b). , See Y6905 in FIG. 142). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 144) (Y7214 in FIG. 144), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (Y6505 in FIG. 140 (a), Y6705 in FIG. 141 (a), Y6805 in FIG. 141 (b), FIG. See Y6905 in 142). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 100 to 126. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (Y101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (Y103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479, 99, 232, 99), respectively, it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2030.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Y104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (Y105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 to 114.

After the start winning process is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol variation process for performing a process for passing a sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed (. Y106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (Y106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Y108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Y109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a special symbol variation process (Y104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (Y104). The special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 101, Y104) makes various determinations and decisions based on the counter values acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 1640, and determines the predetermined value. Control to enable the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode determined by the control of the above, or to stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 101, Y104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 101, Y104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot middle flag 2030u is on) (Y201), and the jackpot is in progress (big hit middle flag). When it is determined (2030u is on) (Y201: Yes), it is not necessary to set the lottery of special symbols, the stop of the variation display, and the like, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot medium flag 2030u is off) (Y201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether or not the small hit medium flag 2030v is on). Is determined (Y202). If it is determined in the processing of Y202 that a small hit is in progress (the small hit medium flag 2030v is on) (Y202: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit medium flag 2030v is off) (Y202: No), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (Y203). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is in progress (Y203: Yes), in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (Y205), and the process shifts to Y206. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is forcibly forced to be the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation. The process of stopping and displaying is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. The first special symbol change start process for executing the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed (Y204), and the process is transferred to Y206. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (Y204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.

In the processing of Y206 executed after the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (Y204) or the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display. (Y206), if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed (Y206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (Y208), and this process is terminated. Similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y208) is the second special symbol when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. This is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Y206: No), the second is provided on the condition that a new start prize is detected in the second entrance 1640. The second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing the special symbol lottery is executed (Y207), and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (Y207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the first special symbol variation start process (Y204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 101, Y104), will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (Y204).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIGS. 102, Y204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2030d is acquired (Y301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter is acquired (Y301). It is determined whether (N1) is a value larger than 0 (Y302). In the processing of Y302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2030d is larger than 0 (Y302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2030d is set. After subtracting 1 (Y303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d after the subtraction is set (Y304). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and is voiced in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 2230. Store in 2230c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2230c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030d.

When the processing of Y304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a is then shifted to the previous data (Y305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the processing of Y305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is then executed (Y306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306) will be described in detail later, but is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is then executed (FIGS. 104, Y307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is a result of determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not, and a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (Y308). The details of this game state update process (FIG. 105, Y308) will be described later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability variation counter 2030k, time reduction counter 2030g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 This is a process for updating the status. When the processing of Y308 is completed, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to off, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating off is set (Y309) to end this processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is 0 (Y302: No), whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on. If it is determined (Y310) and it is determined that it is on (Y310: Yes), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the Y310 is off (that is, not on) (Y310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y311), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After setting (Y312), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 102, Y204), will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (Y306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a is acquired (Y401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (Y402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probability change state of a special symbol). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (Y402: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 2020a for high probability time It is determined whether or not the random number value is matched with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (Y403). On the other hand, in the processing of Y402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (Y402: No), the first random number table 2020a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (Y404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired by Y403 or Y404 is a big hit (Y405), and if the lottery result is a big hit (Y405: Yes), the big hit flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (Y406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (Y407). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y408), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 2030n (Y409), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y405, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (Y405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y410), and then , End this process.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 102, Y204), will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103, Y306), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot of a special symbol is set (Y501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the processing of Y406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 103).

When it was determined in the processing of Y501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol was set (Y501: Yes), it was acquired by the processing of Y401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 103). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 2030m for the first special symbol is off) (Y501: No), the processing of Y502 is performed. Skip and move to the process of Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 92 to 94) according to the game state is read out (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The gaming state is determined based on the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the time reduction counter 2030g. In the processing of Y505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y505). Y506).

When the processing of Y506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y508), and ends this process.

Next, the game state update process (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102), will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (Y308).

When the game state update process (see FIG. 105) is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is greater than 0 (Y601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y601: No), the processing of Y602 to Y605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of Y606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is larger than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (Y602), and the residual probability variation count command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set (Y601: Yes). Y603).

The residual probability variation number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and is voiced in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the residual probability variation number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 2030k from the residual probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the residual probability variation number area 2230o of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the residual probability variation number area 2230o according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 2030k of the main control device 110. However, the value can be updated. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state, and can execute the corresponding effect.

When the processing of Y603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 2030k after subtraction is 0 (Y604), and when it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (Y604: No), Y605 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to the Y606 process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (Y605), and the process proceeds to Y606.

In the processing of Y606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606), and if the value of the time saving counter 2030g is 0 (Y606: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Y606, when it is determined that the time saving counter 2030g is larger than 0 (Y606: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 2030g is subtracted by 1 (Y607), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is set. After (Y608), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and is voiced in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction command, it extracts the value of the time reduction counter 2030g from the remaining time reduction command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining time reduction area 2230q of the RAM 2230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction frequency area 2230q according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 2030 g of the main control device 110. However, the value can be updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 101, Y104), will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y205).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 106, Y205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Y701), and when it is determined that it is the end timing (Y701). Y701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (Y702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON for the first special symbol (Y702: Yes), the special Figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y703), and the special Figure 2 fluctuation stop is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 2030p is turned on is set (Y704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (Y705).

When the processing of Y705 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (Y706), and the jackpot flag 2030m, the probability variation counter 2030k, and the time reduction counter 2030g are reset (Y707). Next, the jackpot middle flag 2030u is set to ON (Y708), and the process proceeds to Y709.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y702, if the jackpot flag 2030m is set to off for the first special symbol (Y702: No), the processing of Y703 to Y708 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Y709.

In the process of Y709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is fixed and stopped is set (Y709). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Y710), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y701). Y711), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (Y205), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display elapses (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the fluctuation display (Y703 to Y710) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (Y702: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (Y703, Y704) is executed.

In the third embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set by the processing of Y706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 103). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of Y706 based on the game status stored in the winning state storage area 2030n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (Y207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (Y207).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 107, Y207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation stop flag 2030p is set to ON (Y801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to on (Y801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to off, and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop display of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is turned on in the processing of Y801, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of Y802 to Y810 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y801: No), the second entry port 1640 is used. It is determined whether or not the winning is detected (Y802). If the winning of the second entrance 1640 is detected (Y802: Yes), then the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value of is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is executed based on each stored counter value. (Y804). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

When the processing of Y804 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of Y803. Execute (Y805). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. After the processing of Y805 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update processing (see FIG. 105) is executed (Y806), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby command indicating off is issued. Set (Y807) and end this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning of the second entrance 1640 is not detected in the processing of Y801 (Y801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is on (Y808). ), If it is on (Y808: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off in the processing of Y808, the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to on (Y809), and the second special symbol is in the variable stop state. A special figure 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the fact is set (Y810), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 107, Y207), will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) described above is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 103) is executed. The differences from (see) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (Y804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 2030b is acquired (Y901). Then, the processes of Y902 to Y904 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) except that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b. Control is executed.

When the processing of Y903 or Y904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Y905), and if it is determined to be a big hit (Y905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processes of Y906 to Y909 for setting the jackpot are executed, and this process is terminated. In each of these processes Y906 to Y909, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103), the same process as each process of Y406 to Y409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot is executed. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y905, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (Y905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. Special figure 2 The deviation processing is executed (Y910), and this processing is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (Y909).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (Y909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired by the processing of Y903 or Y904 in FIG. 108 is a small hit of the second special symbol (Y1001), and the lottery result is a small hit. If (Y1001: Yes), the small hit flag 2030o is set to on (Y1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (Y1003). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (Y1004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y1001 that the lottery result is out of order (Y1001: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y1005), and then. This process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 107, Y805), will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 104, Y307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 2030b (Y1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 108, Y804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (Y1102). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 2030m is turned on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON in the processing of Y906 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 108).

In the process of Y1102, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (Y1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Y901 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 108) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91 (a)). The type is determined (Y1105).

When the processing of Y1105 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y1105), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (Y1106). Then, the process proceeds to Y1108.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y1102, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (Y1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (Y1107) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y1108. Transition.

In the process of Y1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (Y1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y1109), and then ends this process.

Next, the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (Y1107) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (Y1107).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 111, Y1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (Y1201). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is on (Y1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (Y1202). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 2020e (see FIG. 90B) (Y1203).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (Y1204), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read. Is selected (Y1205). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (Y1206), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y1201, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (Y1201: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 93 and FIG. 94) are read (Y1207), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y1208). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (Y1209) based on the selected deviation pattern, and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 101, Y104), will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y208).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Y208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301). In the processing of Y1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 2030m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether or not it is set to (Y1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 2030m is set to ON for the second special symbol (Y1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1305). The process proceeds to Y1306.

Next, the processing after Y1306 differs from the above-mentioned processing after Y705 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 106 and Y205) in the following points. In the processing of Y1306 and Y1312 corresponding to the processing of Y705 and Y711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of Y1311 corresponding to the processing of Y710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special drawing. 2 It differs in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of Y1301, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y1301: No). Y1302), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of Y1303, if the jackpot flag 2030m is set to off for the second special symbol (Y1303: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (Y1304), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the special figure 2 deviation stop process (Y1304), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112, Y208), will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 detachment stop process (Y1304).

In the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (FIG. 113, Y1304), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is set to ON (Y1401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (Y1403).

When the processing of Y1403 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (Y1404). After that, the small hit flag 2030o is set to off (Y1405), and the small hit medium flag 2030v is set to on (Y1406).

When the processing of Y1406 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (Y1407). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to fluctuate with a small hit symbol (Y1408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y1401, when it is determined that the small hit flag 2030o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (Y1401: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (Y1409). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is disengaged and stopped fluctuating at the symbol (Y1410), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and to play a big hit game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a start winning process (Y105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Y105). The start winning process (FIGS. 114, Y105) determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening (first entrance) 64, and if a winning is made, the upper limit number of holdings (in the first starting opening 64). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values up to (up to 4) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 2030a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail judgment result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 114, Y105) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 114, Y105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64, which is the first starting port (Y1101). Here, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (Y1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d is acquired (Y1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (Y1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d (Y1504). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (Y1505). Each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a of the RAM 2030 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (Y1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (Y1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (Y1508), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly held and stored, the winning / failing determination result is based on the holding and stored information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the reserved sphere can be changed (for example, the color of the reserved sphere can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail judgment result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to perform an effect of displaying a notice symbol or the like and suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a normal symbol variation process (Y106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (Y106). The normal symbol variation process (Y106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 115, Y106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (Y1601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device (not shown) to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 1640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (Y1601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Y1601: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device is in variable display (Y1602). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (Y1602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (Y1618). ). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of Y1617, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device (not shown).

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of Y1011 (Y1618: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y1618, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (Y1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (Y1619). In the processing of Y1619, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of Y1613, the "○" symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the processing of Y1615, the second symbol display device (not shown) has an "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to stop display (lighting display). When the stop display is set by the processing of Y1619, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of Y1613 and the processing of Y1615. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (Y1620). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (Y1620: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 1640a is set (Y1621). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (Y1620: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (Y1602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (Y1603).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is larger than 0 (Y1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is 0. (Y1604: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is not 0 (Y1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is subtracted by 1 (Y1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is shifted (Y1606). In the processing of Y1606, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, the normal symbol hold 2nd area → the normal symbol hold 1st area, the normal symbol hold 3rd area → the normal symbol hold 2nd area, the normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c is acquired (Y1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (Y1608). More specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 2030g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state is set. In the processing of Y1608, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Y1608: No), the hit / fail judgment is made based on the hit judgment value of the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 90 (c)). Get the result (Y1611). On the other hand, in the processing of Y1608, when it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (Y1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (Y1609). In the processing of Y1609, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being made (Y1609: Yes), the processing of Y1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (Y1609: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability (see FIG. 90 (c)). The hit / fail determination result is acquired based on (Y1610).

Next, when it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (Y1612) and the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is a miss). (Y1612: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (Y1615), and the process proceeds to Y1616. On the other hand, in the processing of Y1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a hit (that is, a hit) (Y1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is "○". (Y1613).

Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (Y1614). Then, in the processing of Y1616 executed after executing the processing of Y1614 or Y1615, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g (see FIG. 95) is read (Y1616), and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is read from the read normal figure fluctuation pattern table 2020g. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of (Y1617) is set, and this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (Y107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (Y107). This through gate passage process (Y107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 100), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passage process (FIG. 116, Y107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Y1701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 2030e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Y1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Y1703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Y1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 2030e is not less than 4 (Y1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Y1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is less than 4 (Y1703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is added by 1 (Y1704).

When the processing of Y1704 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated by Y103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) described above is changed to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 2030c of the RAM 2030. It is stored in the first area (Y1705) of the area (4th area on hold), and this process is terminated. In the processing of Y1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2030e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state.

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the general drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using the pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 1640a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second entry port 1640 (the entry port to which the electric accessory 1640a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 1640a opens, and it is in a normal game state. Also has the effect of increasing the possibility that the ball will enter the second entry port 1640.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 2030 (Y1801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 118), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (Y1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (Y1902). Then, the access of the RAM 2030 is permitted (Y1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Y1904), and if it is turned on (Y1904: Yes), the process shifts to Y1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905), and if it is not stored. (Y1905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to Y1910 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y1905: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (Y1906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (Y1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to Y1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 2030. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 2030 is correctly saved.

In the process of Y1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Y1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Y1911, Y1912) of the RAM 2030.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 2030 initialization process (Y1911, Y1912) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (Y1911, Y1912) of the RAM 2030 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (Y1911, Y1912), the used area of the RAM 2030 is cleared to 0 (Y1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 2030 is set (Y1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 2030, the process proceeds to the process of Y1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (Y1904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (Y1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (Y1907: Yes), the power off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 2030 (Y1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (Y1909), and the process proceeds to Y1910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (Y1913). After that, each value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g is read (Y1914), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (Y1915). When the processing of Y1915 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (Y1916), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process (Y2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process (Y2000). In this main process (Y2000), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main processing (FIG. 119, Y2000), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 100), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2230 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (Y2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Y2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Y2003) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (Y2004). The jackpot control process (Y2004) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 120, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (Y2004) is executed, the small hit control process (Y2005) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (Y2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (Y2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Y2007).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Y2008). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (Y2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (Y2010: Yes), the process is shifted to Y2001, and each process after Y2001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Y2010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Y2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Y2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 2030, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Y2002 (Y2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Y2001 to Y2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Y2009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 2030 (Y2009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 117 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Y2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Y2013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Y2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Y2015), the access of the RAM 2030 is prohibited (Y2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 2030.

The processing of Y2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in Y2001 to Y2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of Y2011 and Y2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of Y2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Y2001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (FIG. 118, Y1901), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Y2001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Y2004). This jackpot control process (Y2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, Y2004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (Y2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (Y2101: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2101, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (Y2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (Y2102), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (Y2103). ). More specifically, in the processing of Y2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of Y2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

If it is determined in the processing of Y2103 that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (Y2103: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (Y2104), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is not (Y2103: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105).

If it is determined in the processing of Y2105 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (Y2106), and this processing is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (Y2106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (Y2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2105: No). Y2107). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (Y2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed by the processing of Y2108 (opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a). The solenoid is set to off so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and this process is terminated. The above-mentioned discrimination processing of Y2105 to Y2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (Y2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (Y2109: Yes), the ending command for jackpot is set (Y2110), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (Y2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of Y2111 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (Y211: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the game state after the jackpot ends (Y2112) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (Y2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (Y211: No), the first winning process is executed (Y2113), and this process is ended. The details of the first winning process (Y2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106), which is one of the jackpot control processes (FIG. 120, Y2004), will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (Y2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 121, Y2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (Y2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 77) is set based on the data read by Y2201 (Y2202), and then the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached to the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 77). The release operation is set by the data read in the process of Y2201 (Y2203), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hit game, the operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Next, the jackpot end process (Y2112), which is one of the jackpot control processes (FIG. 120, Y2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 122. As described above, this jackpot end process (Y2112) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (Y2112).

In the jackpot end process (FIG. 122, Y2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 2030n (Y2301). Next, it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is ON (Y2302). When it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is on in the processing of Y2302 (Y2302: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V passing switch 65e3 during this big hit, so the value of the probability variation counter 2030k. Is set to 120 (Y2303).

Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (Y2304). In the process of Y2304, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (Y2304: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is jackpot B to D (Y2305). If it is not a jackpot B to D (Y2305: No), the value of the time reduction counter 2030 g is set to 120 (Y2306), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) in the processing of Y2302 (Y2303: No), or in the processing of Y2304, the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state. If it is determined that (Y2304: Yes), or if the jackpots are B to D in the processing of Y2305 (Y2305: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2307. As a result, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state, or if the gaming ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit types are jackpots B to D, a probability change state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is the jackpot A, the probability variation state of 120 times and the time saving state of 100 times are set after the jackpot.

In the processing of Y2307, both the jackpot middle flag 2030u and the V winning flag 2030f are set to off, and the winning state storage area 2030n is cleared (Y2307). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (Y2308), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on, and if it is on, the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state is set to the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is set. The corresponding value (120) is set. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the V-passing switch 65e3 and set the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3). Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so that during the jackpot game Also, the game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 122) (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the values are set to the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g. Is not set, that is, the normal game state ST1 is set after the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON (Fig. A predetermined value (for example, 50) may be set in Y2303: No) of 122 and the time saving counter 2030 g. As a result, even if the game ball does not pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the player can be given a predetermined privilege (less than when the game ball passes through the V-passing switch 65e3). It will be possible.

Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 2030f is not set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 122) (Y2303: No in FIG. 122), the type of jackpot won this time is determined, and the jackpot won this time is determined. Is a jackpot type (see FIG. 91 (a)) in which the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set so that the game ball can pass through the V-passing switch 65e3. (For example, 50) may be set. With this configuration, a plurality of different benefits (games set after the jackpot ends) corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game content during the jackpot game (whether or not the game ball has passed through the V-passing switch 65e3) The degree of advantage of the state) can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the details of the first winning process (Y2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (Y2113). This first winning process (Y2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. is there.

In this first winning process (FIG. 123, Y2113), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (Y2401). Here, the round validity period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (5 seconds). Is. In the process of Y2401, if it is not the round validity period (Y2401: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2402), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2401, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (Y2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (Y2403). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (Y2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a prize for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected in the processing of Y2403 (Y2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h to update (Y2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2405), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( Y2405: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (attached opening / closing plate 65f1) is set. (Y2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408). If the V winning flag 2030f is on (Y2408: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the V winning flag 2030f is off (that is, not on) (Y2408: No), it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 is on (Y2409). In the processing of Y2409, if the V-passing switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (Y2409: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of Y2409, when the V passage switch 65e3 is on (Y2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on. Then, the V winning command is set, and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (Y2005), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (Y2005).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 124, Y2005), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (Y2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the processing of Y1404 of the special drawing 2 out-of-order stop processing (see FIG. 113) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the processing of Y2501 (Y2501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2501, if the small hit scenario is set (Y2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (Y2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503). More specifically, in the processing of Y2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of Y2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of.

If it is determined in the processing of Y2503 that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (Y2503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (Y2504), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the round start timing of the small hit scenario (Y2505).

If it is determined in the processing of Y2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (Y2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (Y2506), and this process ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (Y2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (Y2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the processing of Y2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (Y2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of Y2508 (first). The solenoid is set to off so that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (Y2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509).

If it is determined in the processing of Y2509 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (Y2510), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 2030, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Y2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (Y2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the processing of Y2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (Y2511: Yes), the small hit middle flag 2030v is set to off (Y2512), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (Y2511: No), the second winning process is executed (Y2513), and this process is ended. Details of this second winning process (Y2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the small hit operation setting process (Y2506), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIG. 124, Y2005), will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (Y2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 125, Y2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (Y2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 77) attached thereto) is set by the data read in the process of Y2601 (Y2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the second winning process (Y2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (Y2513). This second winning process (Y2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 124), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second winning process (FIG. 126, Y2513), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (Y2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the processing of Y2701, if it is not the round validity period (Y2701: No), the winning counter 2030h is reset (Y2702), and the main processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2701, if it is determined that the current round validity period is (Y2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (Y2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (Y2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the processing of Y2703 (Y2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 2030h to update (Y2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2705), and if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( Y2705: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 2030h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (Y2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 accompanying the winning opening 65f1) is set (Y2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (Y2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (Y4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of Y4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (see FIG. 128). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Y4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 128 and Y4113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Y4116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of Y4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (Y4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of Y4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM2230 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 2230 by the processing of Y4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 2230, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 2230 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 2230 is confirmed (Y4003: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2004 and the initialization of the RAM 2230 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 2230 is not confirmed (Y4003: No), the process proceeds to Y4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230 (the memory of the RAM 2230 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM2230 is destroyed (Y4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Y4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of Y4116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 2230, the data of the RAM 2230 is determined to be normal (Y4003: No), and the data shifts to Y4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (Y4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power off process of Y4116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 2230 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to Y4004 and the initialization of the RAM 2230 is started.

In the processing of Y4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 2230 is checked (Y4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 2230, all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 2230 to set the RAM destruction check data (Y4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 2230 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 2230 (Y4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 2230 is notified (Y4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 2230 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the RAM 2230 of an abnormality, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of Y4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Y4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Y4116 is executed (see FIG. 128 and Y4115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Y4116 is executed, the process of Y4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of Y4116 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM (Y4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 and setting the initial value of the RAM 2230 (Y4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (Y4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (Y4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 2230 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Y4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of Y4008 is performed via the processing of Y4004 to Y4006. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Y4008: No), Y4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM2230, is skipped, the process is shifted to Y4010, and the initial value of RAM2230 is set (Y4010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of Y4009 is that when the processing of Y4008 is reached via the processing of Y4004 to Y4006, the processing of Y4004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 2230. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 2230 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of Y4101 was executed (Y4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (Y4101: No), the process proceeds to Y4111 without performing the processes of Y4102 to Y4110. In the processing of Y4101, it is the processing related to the display (directing) of Y4102 to Y4110 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has passed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Y4111 and the variation display setting process of Y4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Y4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the processing of Y4101 (Y4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Y4103 to Y4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Y4101: Yes). Y4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of Y4108 described later (Y4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Y4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the Y4105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Y4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Y4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Y4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (Y4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Y4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Y4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Y4110). After that, the process proceeds to Y4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Y4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of Y4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the command determination process (Y4111) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of Y4112. Details of this command determination process (Y4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

In the processing of Y4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

When the processing of Y4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Y4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Y4113 (Y4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (Y4115), and the power-off processing is executed (Y4116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (Y4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Y4113 (Y4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4114) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 2230, and the RAM 2230 is destroyed. If not (Y4114: No), the process returns to the process of Y4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 2230 is destroyed (Y4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 2230 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the customer waiting effect process (Y4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect processing (Y4105). This customer waiting effect processing (Y4105) is set to be turned on when the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received. FIG. 2 The process of setting the standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 2230 m. Hereinafter, the details of the customer waiting effect processing (Y4105) will be described.

In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 129, Y4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201). When it is determined that the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to ON (Y4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is updated (Y4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is the upper limit value (Y4203). Here, in the present embodiment, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k. That is, the special figure 1 standby flag is set to be on when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k reaches the upper limit value). Has been done.

If the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is less than the upper limit value (Y4203: No), the process proceeds to Y4205.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is the upper limit value (Y4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to off (Y4204), and the process proceeds to Y4205. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to off in the processing of Y4204, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t described later is set to on. When the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, in the processing of Y4201, when it is determined that the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y4201: No), the processing of Y4202 to Y4204 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of Y4205.

In the processing of Y4205, it is determined whether or not the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to ON (Y4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230 m is set to ON (Y4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is updated (Y4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (30000) (Y4207). If the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is less than the upper limit value (Y4207: No), the process proceeds to Y4209.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4207, when the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is the upper limit value (Y4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on, and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m, Then, the standby set flag 2230u is set to off (Y4208), and the process proceeds to Y4209. By setting the standby set flag 2230u to off in the processing of Y4208, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on, the special figure 1 2 When the standby flag 2230t is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, in the processing of Y4205, when it is determined that the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (that is, it is not set to on), (Y4205: No), Y4206, and Y4207 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4209.

In the process of Y4209, it is determined whether or not the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209). When it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4209: Yes), the processes of Y4211 to Y4214 for setting the standby display type are skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, the state in which the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON is a state in which the fluctuation status (standby flag setting status) of each special figure has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the process for setting the standby display type by configuring so that the process for setting the standby display type is not executed when it is determined that the state is such.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 133, but in the present embodiment, a new special figure change occurs when the standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to on. Even when a command indicating that the command has been started (a special figure standby command indicating off) is received, the process of setting the standby setting flag 2230u to off is executed. Therefore, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) can always reset the standby display type every time the fluctuation status (standby flag setting status) of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed. It is possible to more appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby set flag 2230u is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to on (Y4210).

When it is determined in the process of Y4210 that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y4210: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 2230i is read out (Y4211). .. Then, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) based on the read game state and the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t (Y4212).

Next, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set based on the determined standby display type (Y4213). After that, the standby set flag 2230u is set to ON (Y4214), and this process ends.

Next, the command determination process (Y4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Y4111). This command determination process (Y4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (Y4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (Y4111), first, from the command storage area 2230a provided in the RAM 2230, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (Y4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (Y4302), and this process is terminated. Details of this stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of Y4301 (Y4301: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received. Determine (Y4303). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of Y4303 (Y4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to on (Y4304) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (Y4305), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). When you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (Y4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (Y4306). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the processing of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4307), and the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is set to ON (Y4307). FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (Y4308), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (set the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). When you do).

In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Y4306: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4309). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (Y4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2030d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first one). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c provided in the RAM 2230 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( Y4310), this process is terminated. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the number of reserved balls counter 2230c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of Y4310. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the process of Y4310 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2030d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 2230c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 2030d.

Further, in the process of Y4309, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (Y4309: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (Y4311). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of Y4311 (Y4311: Yes), the received winning information command information (whether or not the lottery of the special symbol is won, the winning type, and the variation pattern) corresponds to the winning information. It is set in the storage area 2230b (Y4312), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y4311 when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Y4311: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Y4313). If it is determined that the status command has been received (Y4313: Yes), the status command processing (Y4314) is executed. The details of this state command processing (Y4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 132, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 2230i is executed.

When it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of Y4313 (Y4313: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received from the main controller 110 (Y4315). .. If it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the processing of Y4315 (Y4315: Yes), the customer waiting command processing (Y4316) is executed. The details of this customer wait command processing (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 133, but the special figure 1 is based on the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110. A process for setting the standby flag 2230s or the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is executed.

If it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the processing of Y4315 (Y4315: No), the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (Y4317). If it is determined that either the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has been received in the processing of Y4315 (Y4317: Yes), the remaining number update processing (Y4318) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 134, but the third symbol display device 81 is based on the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the content of the effect display for display in is executed.

If it is determined that neither the remaining probability variation number command nor the remaining time reduction number command has been received in the processing of Y4317 (Y4317: No), the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (Y4319), and this processing is terminated. To do. In the processing of Y4319, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 2230, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the stop type command reception process (Y4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (Y4302). This stop type command reception process (Y4302) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (Y4302) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 131, Y4302), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230 g is set to on. (Y4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (Y4402). End the process.

The stop type extracted in Y4402 is stored in the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate fluctuation display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (Y4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (Y4314). This state command process (Y4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The details of the state command processing (Y4314) will be described below.

In the state command processing (FIG. 132, Y4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 2230i provided in the RAM 2230 (Y4501). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (Y4502). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (Y4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (Y4503). In the processing of Y4503, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (Y4503: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (Y4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y4505), and the process proceeds to Y4506.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4502, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (Y4502: Yes), or in the processing of Y4503, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the indicated state command (Y4503: No), the process proceeds to Y4506.

In the processing of Y4506, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4506), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, the state command processing (Y4314) in the present embodiment is based on the game state set in the state setting area 2230i and the game state indicated by the state command output from the main control device 110. , It is determined that the game state other than the latent state has changed to the latent state, and when the game state other than the latent state has changed to the latent state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A process of controlling "120" as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 85 (a)). On the other hand, if the jackpot is won during the latent probability state and the latent probability state is set again after the jackpot game is completed, it is determined in the processing of Y4502 that the latent probability state is set in the state setting area 2230i (Y4502). : Yes), in order to skip the processing of Y4504 and Y4505, the number of effect probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 85A) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). Never. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state and the actual probability variation number is reset (set to 120 times), the value displayed before the jackpot is won will continue to be displayed. It will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability changes (remaining probability change number) and the remaining number of effect probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 (effect residual probability change number). And can be made different, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent state ends.

In the state command processing described above (Y4314 in FIG. 132), when a new latent probability state is entered, the same number of times (120 times) as the actual probability change number (120 times) of the third symbol display device 81 Although it is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

Next, the standby command processing (Y4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this standby command processing (Y4316). This state command process (Y4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110 is executed. Based on (special figure 1 standby command, special figure 2 standby command), a process of setting the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t to on or off is executed. The setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is referred to in the above-mentioned customer waiting effect processing (see Y4105 in FIG. 129).

When the standby command process (Y4316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command has been received (Y4601). If it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has been received in the process of Y4601 (Y4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to on (Y4602), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received in the processing of Y4601 (Y4601: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is turned off has been received. (Y4603). In the processing of Y4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is off has been received (Y4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 2230j is set to off (Y4604). ), The special figure 1 standby counter 2230k is reset (Y4605). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to ON (Y4606).

If it is determined in the process of Y4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y4606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Y4606, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on (Y4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to off. (Y4607), this process is terminated.

That is, in the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to on (the state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without changing the special figure 1), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to off. When a special figure 1 standby command indicating (the change of special figure 1 has been executed) is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off and the standby set flag 2230u is set to off. In the customer waiting effect processing (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off is set. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is off has not been received (Y4603: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (Y4608). If it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has been received in the process of Y4608 (Y4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230 m is set to on (Y4609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4608, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has not been received (Y4608: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j has been turned off has been received. (Y4610). In the processing of Y4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has been received (Y4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 2230m is set to off (Y4611). ), The special figure 2 standby counter 2230n is reset (Y4612). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to ON (Y4613).

If it is determined in the process of Y4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (Y4613: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Y4613, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on (Y4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the standby set flag 2230u are set to off. (Y4614), this process is terminated.

That is, in the state where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on (the state where 30 seconds or more have passed without changing the special figure 2), the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is set to off. When a special figure 2 standby command indicating (the change of special figure 2 has been executed) is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off and the standby set flag 2230u is set to off. In the customer waiting effect processing (see Y4105 in FIG. 129), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to off is set. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, in the process of Y4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 2030j is off has not been received (Y4610: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the remaining number update process (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (Y4318). This remaining number update process (Y4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining probability variation number command is executed from the main control device 110. Or based on receiving a command with a reduced number of remaining hours. The process of updating the contents set in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o, the effect probability variation number area 2230p, and the remaining time reduction frequency area 2230q is executed.

In the remaining number update process (Y4318), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main control device 110 (Y4651). When it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has been received in the processing of Y4651 (Y4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o (Y4652). Next, it is determined whether or not the data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653).

That is, in the processing of Y4653, it is determined whether the currently set game state is the latent state or the probable change state, and when it is determined that the game state is the latent state, the effect display dedicated to the latent state described later is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the same effect display in the probabilistic state and the normal state, so that this process ends without executing the dedicated effect display. To do.

In the processing of Y4653, when it is determined that the data indicating the latent state is stored (set) in the state setting area 2230i (Y4653: Yes), the number of residual probability changes notified (received) by the main control device 110. Is 0 times (Y4654). In the process of Y4654, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 0 (Y4654: Yes), the end effect of the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (Y4657). Then, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 2230i, and the process proceeds to Y4661.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4654, when it is determined that the number of residual probability variations notified (received) by the main controller 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (Y4654: No), the effect probability variation number area. The number of impressions stored in 2230p is subtracted by 1 (Y4657). Then, it is determined whether the number of production probability changes after the subtraction is 0 (Y4658). In the process of Y4658, when it is determined that the number of effect probability variations after subtraction is 0 (Y4658: Yes), the number of residual probability variation number areas 2230o is set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y4569). After that, a revival effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set (Y4660), and the process proceeds to Y4661.

That is, when the actual number of residual probability changes (actual residual probability variation number) stored (set) in the residual probability variation number area is 1 or more and the production probability variation number (effect residual probability variation number) becomes 0, , In order to notify the player that the latent probability state continues, the value of the effect residual probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual residual probability variation number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (revival effect) displayed on D1 is executed.

By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent state ends, and after making the player think that the latent state has ended, the number of residual probability changes in the effect is increased again. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which this revival effect is executed is defined as the case where the number of production probability changes (the number of remaining production probability changes) is 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the number of production probability changes. On the condition that (the number of residual probability changes in the production) is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the revival effect, and the revival effect is executed based on the lottery result. You may. As a result, it is possible to make the player perform the game while predicting at what timing (special figure fluctuation) the revival effect will occur, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the revival effect may not be executed based on the special figure variation, but may be executed using, for example, the ending period of the small hit game. In this case, on condition that the number of production probability changes (number of production residual probability changes) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent probability state is not determined to continue is displayed). It is desirable to perform a revival effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time in which the revival effect can be executed as the special figure fluctuation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be smoothly provided.

Further, a long fluctuation time in which the revival effect can be executed may be set as the special figure fluctuation time only in the final stage of the latent probability state (for example, the actual number of residual probability changes is 10 or less). As a result, the display state in which the revival effect can be executed (the number of probable changes in the effect (the number of remaining probable changes in the effect) is 0 (or the display mode indicating that the latent state is not determined to continue is displayed) is displayed. In the early stage of the latent state where it is difficult to execute)), it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time during which the revival effect can be executed, and the game in the latent state can be smoothly provided.

Next, the variation display setting process (Y4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Y4112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 128) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 135, Y4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 2230d provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is off (Y4701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of Y4705 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is on (Y4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 2230d is set to off (Y4702).

Next, in the process of Y4703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of Y4303 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111) is used in the other memory area of the RAM 2230. Acquired from 2230z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (Y4703). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of Y4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230, and is displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 2230b is shifted in accordance with (the display has been set) (Y4704).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e provided in the RAM 2230 is set to ON (Y4705). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not on (that is, it is off) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of Y4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is on (Y4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to off (Y4706). In the process of Y4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 2230z of the RAM 2230, and the first 2 Set a variable pattern command for displaying a special symbol (Y4707).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of Y4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 2230, and is displayed by the command output process (Y4102) of the main process (see FIG. 128). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 2230b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (Y4708).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to ON (Y4709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g are not set on (that is, off) (Y4709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on (Y2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f is on. Set the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 2230f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 2230g is set to off (Y4710).

In the process of Y4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 130, Y4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (Y4711), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is incorrect. Will be done. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 149. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Y6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (Y6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Y6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Y6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Y6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Y6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Y6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Y6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see Y6001 in FIG. 136) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Y6002 in FIG. 136) (Y6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the present boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (Y6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 137, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Y6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Y6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of Y6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of Y6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed by Y6101. And Y6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes Y6103 to Y6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Y6103 to Y6105 without performing the processes of Y6101 and Y6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 136. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Y6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Y6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Y6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (Y6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Y6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Y6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 147 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see Y7502 in FIG. 147 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time when the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Y6005, the interrupt permission is set (Y6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Y6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (a). FIG. 138 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Y6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (b). FIG. 138 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Y6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (Y6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (Y6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Y6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143.

In the display setting process (Y6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Y6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (Y6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Y6303) or the simple display setting process (Y6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (Y6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Y6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Y6305), which are determined by the task process (Y6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (Y6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Y6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of Y6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Y6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Y6309) is executed to shift to the process of Y6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Y6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 139, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Y6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Y6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Y6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Y6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Y6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Y6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (Y6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (Y6405), and the process returns to the Y6401 process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Y6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (a). FIG. 140 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (Y6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (Y6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (Y6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of Y6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Y6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Y6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (Y6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (Y6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Y6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by Y6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Y6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. In the processing of Y6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Y6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Y6406). If there is a stop type command for display (Y6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (Y6407), and the process returns to Y6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Y6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (b). FIG. 140 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Y6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (Y6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (Y6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Y6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (Y6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Y6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (Y6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of Y6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Y6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of Y6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of Y6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the processing of Y6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Y6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (Y6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (Y6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (Y6409), and the process returns to the processing of Y6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (Y6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a). FIG. 141 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (Y6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the processing of Y6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (Y6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (Y6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (Y6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (Y6411), and the process returns to the Y6401 process.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (Y6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (Y6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 139. In the processing of Y6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (Y6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (Y6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (Y6412: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (Y6413), and the process returns to the processing of Y6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (Y6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (Y6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Y6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y6903). Y6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the processing of Y6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (Y6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (Y6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (Y6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (Y6415), and the process returns to the Y6401 process.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (Y6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (Y7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (Y7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (Y7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the processing of Y7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of Y7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, from the back side image discrimination flag 233x set by Y7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of Y7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. In the processing of Y6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (Y6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Y6416), and there is an error command. If (Y6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (Y6417), and the process returns to Y6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (Y6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 143 (b). FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Y7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Y7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of Y7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in Y7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 139. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of Y6416 (Y6416: No), then the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (Y6418), and the process returns to the processing of Y6401.

In the processing of Y6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Y6401: Yes). ), The processing of Y6402 to Y6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of Y6401 to Y6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the Y6401 process that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Y6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 140 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Y6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of Y6502, the processing of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Y6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 144, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Y7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of Y7202 to Y7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Y7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (Y7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (Y7202), Y7203 to Y7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of Y7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Y7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (Y7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (Y7301).

In the task processing (Y6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of Y7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Y7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 144. After the warning image setting process (Y7204) or in the process of Y7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Y7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of Y7205.

In Y7205, the pointer update process is executed (Y7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Y7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Y7401, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (Y7402). As a result, if it is End information (Y7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Y7403), and if it is a demo display data table (Y7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (Y7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Y7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (Y7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (Y7403: No). Y7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Y7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Y7402: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 144 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7206). In the task processing (Y6304), the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed by the processing of Y7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (Y7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Y7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Y7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Y7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (Y7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (Y7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. It is set (Y72110), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Y7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Y7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of Y7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (Y6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by Y7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (Y7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Y7216). If the demo display flag is off (Y7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Y7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Y7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (Y7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the processing of Y7216, if the demo display flag is on (Y7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (Y6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Y6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 147 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Y7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (Y7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 147 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of Y7501 (Y7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Y7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Y7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (b). FIG. 147 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Y7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (Y7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Y7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Y7602). In this Y7602 process, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the processing of Y7602 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Y7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Y7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Y7603. Further, as a result of the processing of Y7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Y7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Y7603.

In the processing of Y7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Y7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Y7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 (Y7604) so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of Y7603 (Y7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (Y7605), and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 138 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see Y6308 in FIG. 138 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see Y6309 in FIG. 138 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 139 to 143) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 144 to 146) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set to draw the image. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 148) (see Y7501: No in FIG. 147 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (Y7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Y6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Y7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Y7205) of the display setting process (Y6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (Y7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (Y7702), and if it is the transfer data information (Y7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Y7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Y7704), and the process proceeds to Y7705.

Further, in the processing of Y7702, if the acquired information is not the transferred data information but the Null data (Y7702: No), the processing of Y7703 and Y7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Y7705. In the processing of Y7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Y7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Y7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Y7706).

In the processing of Y7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the processing of Y7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Y7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Y7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Y7707. Further, as a result of the processing of Y7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (Y7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Y7707.

In the processing of Y7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Y7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (Y7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Y7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Y7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of Y7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Y7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (Y7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (Y7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (Y7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (Y7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (Y7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (Y7712), and the process proceeds to Y7713.

In the process of Y7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Y7713). The discrimination in the processing of Y7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of Y7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Y7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Y7713 (Y7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (Y7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of Y7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Y7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Y6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (Y6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 23) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Y6305) (Y7801). That is, in the processing of Y7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Y6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Y6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Y7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of Y7802 (Y7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 138 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is configured to switch between three gaming states, a normal state, a probabilistic state, and a latent probable state, triggered by a big hit or the like. Then, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol is increased (0% → about 46%), and in the latent state, other games The structure is such that the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, there is a high probability that a small hit will be made and the probability of being a big hit will also increase. You can have more chances to win than other playing states. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the state will shift to the latent state.

Further, in the third embodiment, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is switched (switched between the main variation and the sub variation) according to the game state. Specifically, in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation, and in the latent state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation. Then, in each game state, when the elapsed time from the stop of the main fluctuation becomes a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, a demo display according to the game state is displayed even if the sub-variation is being executed. (Customer waiting demo screen, latent confirmation demo display) is displayed. Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a certain period of time has passed since the state of suspension of fluctuation, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demo display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being played depending on the presence or absence of a demo display, so that a game in which a demo display is performed for a player who is looking for a vacant platform. You can start the game with the machine. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine having specifications in which a plurality of symbols fluctuate at the same time, even if some of the symbols are in a variable stop state, as long as the other symbols are fluctuating. , Could not run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player who searches for a vacant table to determine whether or not the table is vacant from the displayed contents.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to display the customer waiting demo screen only according to the situation of the main fluctuation (regardless of the situation of the sub-variation) in the normal state or the probable change state. .. As a result, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the fluctuation display for 600 seconds is started, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is vacant, so that the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation was stopped in the latent state, the same character 811 as during the fluctuation is continuously displayed as a demo display (special display) in a special mode. It is configured to be set. That is, the display contents of the same system are set between the normal display and the demo display. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be smoothly switched, so that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. ..

Further, in the third embodiment, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. .. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, while one symbol is changing and another symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the stopped and displayed symbols form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and a hit is achieved. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility that the hit state will be reached at that time, and the player's game will be affected. There was a risk of spoiling the interest. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of being off, a new symbol sequence is framed in to provide a special reach effect that develops into a reach effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the combination of being off, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of stop symbols by paying attention to whether or not the combination of stop symbols can be developed into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol sequence L4 is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to expect the development of a special reach effect each time the variable display is stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, when there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probabilistic state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the probabilistic state, the ball is configured to easily enter the second entry port 1640, and in the normal state or the latent state, the ball goes to the first entry port 64 rather than the second entry opening 1640. May be configured to facilitate the entry of the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state and the latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern, and in the probability change state. , The variation pattern with a very short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the defined contents of the probability variation table 2020f3 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment may be exchanged. In addition, when the second special symbol is a jackpot (big hits E to F) in the probability change state and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the time reduction number of times is set to 120 times, and in the normal state or the latent state, The number of time reductions may be set to 0. As a result, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit in the probabilistic state, the gaming state after the big hit can be easily set to the probabilistic state again (it becomes easy to loop the probabilistic state), so that the superiority of the probabilistic state is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state instead of the latent state or the probable change state. Specifically, for example, the provisions of the normal table A2020f1 and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment are exchanged, and the normal state is easily looped in the jackpot in the normal state (the V-passing switch 65e3 is sphered). It is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type (which is difficult to pass through), and in the latent state or the probability change state, the V-passing switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the opening / closing pattern in which the ball easily passes. May be good.

In the third embodiment, among the opening / closing patterns set for the opening / closing plate 65f1, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round as a pattern in which the ball does not easily pass through the V-passing switch 65e3. Although the opening / closing pattern to be set is provided, the opening period may be shortened to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed and the respective symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. The configuration is such that it faces the direction of the row L4, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the main symbol (in the example of FIG. 83 (a), the main symbol with the number "1") that is reached by the appearance (frame-in) of the new symbol string L4 is the new symbol string L4. It may be configured to look up in the direction of. Further, for example, among the main symbols other than the main symbols to which the reach is applied, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested by the number of the main symbols in the mode of looking up at the new symbol row L4. That is, the larger the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big hit in the special reach effect. In this case, when all the main symbols look up at the new symbol sequence L4, the jackpot may be fixed (for example, it may be selected only in the case of hit super reach). With this configuration, when the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of deviations, it is possible to draw more attention to the mode of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

In the third embodiment, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 face the direction of the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4 may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach effect. That is, the larger the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special reach effect by the number of reserved symbols, the configuration may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big hit. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 2230b, the fluctuation pattern of each reserved ball is pre-read, and the fluctuation pattern (out-of-order super reach or winning super reach) that develops into a super reach effect is held in the reserved ball. When it is determined that a sphere is included, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved sphere that develops in the super reach effect executes an effect that faces the direction of the new symbol string L4 at the time of temporary stop in the special reach effect. It may be configured. As a result, at the time of temporary stop in the special super reach effect, the game can be performed while paying attention to the reserved symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the new symbol string L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is scrolled and displayed in parallel with the respective symbol columns L1 to L3, but the new symbol string L4 is , It is not always necessary to scroll and display in parallel with each symbol sequence L1 to L3. For example, the new symbol sequence L4 may be displayed on the right side or the left side of each symbol sequence L1 to L3, and may be scrolled in the vertical direction (vertical to each symbol sequence L1 to L3). As a result, the degree of freedom of the effect when the special reach effect is selected can be further increased. Further, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and a plurality of symbol rows may be newly displayed when a special reach effect is executed. By displaying a plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop, which can develop into a special reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that may develop into a special reach when the stop symbol corresponds to the disengagement, so that the player can be further developed into a special reach effect. You can expect it with high frequency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the third embodiment, a result display (see FIG. 86 (b)) showing the result of the latent state is performed from the end of the latent state to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. It was configured so that it does not exist, but it is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. Then, the display may be continued until the variable display of the first first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the finished latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-handed ball, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In the third embodiment, after the latent state is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is fixed at 12 seconds over two lottery of the special symbol, but the variation time is not limited to 12 seconds and the result. The display may be arbitrarily set (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) within a range that can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

In the third embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In addition, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit until the stop display of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. A compulsory lottery that does not win the prize may be executed so that the lottery result is always out of order. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a big hit or a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a fair game to the player.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 181. In the third embodiment described above, the first ball entry port 64 in which the ball can easily enter by hitting the left side and the second entry port 1640 in which the ball can easily enter the ball by hitting the right side are provided, and the left-handed game is performed. In the normal state and the probabilistic state to be executed, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is mainly executed (special figure 1). In the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is mainly performed. It was configured so that the game to be executed (special figure 2 substantially variable game) was executed. Then, in the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is used for a predetermined period (for example, in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640. , About 1.65 seconds) A small hit that is open is set (the lottery probability is about 1/2), and it is configured so that it can be expected to get a ball out by the small hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured so that both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed by right-handed, and the variation of each special figure in the latent state. By setting the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, the lottery of the special figure 2 is more easily executed than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and time reduction state of the normal symbol) is shorter than the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set (for example, 120 times). It is set to (for example, 100 times), and when the number of lottery of the special figure (the number of fluctuations of the special figure) exceeds 100 times in the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state. ..

Furthermore, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state. It is configured so that the degree of occurrence of small hits in the latent state differs depending on the situation. Specifically, when the second special symbol starts the long fluctuation (180 seconds) and immediately shifts to the latent state, the fluctuation due to the first special symbol until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next. Is executed, the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small hits can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state during the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the fluctuation of the symbol is started, the degree of occurrence of small hits can be increased as a result. In addition, as will be described in detail later, a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first entry port 64b and the second entry port 1640b in the area where the ball is launched by right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting area). Is provided so that the ball cannot enter only one of the entry ports (for example, the second entry port 1640b) (so that it becomes difficult).

With this configuration, as in the third embodiment described above, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and improve the motivation of the player for the game. it can. Further, since the degree of advantage (degree of small hit occurrence) when shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent probable state can be made different depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide the player with more complicated playability, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored early. In addition, the ball alternates between the right first entrance 64b, which executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball, and the second entrance 1640b, which executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Since the right-handed area is provided with a configuration in which the player enters the ball, it is possible to suppress the execution of only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, and the state is excessively advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the granting.

Further, in the third embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the lottery (execute the variation) at the same time, and the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol). Is a hit (big hit or small hit), and when the symbol showing the lottery result of that win is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the win is confirmed), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is removed. It was configured to be forcibly stopped with a symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big hit or small hit), and the lottery result showing the winning result is shown. Is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed. At the timing when the winning game based on the game is completed (the timing when the special symbol can be changed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the change of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is restarted.

As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the lottery (execute the variation) at the same time, the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can play the game. You can avoid feeling dissatisfied with it.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that in the game board 13, the position of the variable winning device 65 is left-hit from the right-handed area. And the point where the right-handed ball moved to the lower center area, which is the area where the ball can enter, the point where the distribution unit 660 was provided instead of the second entry port 1640, and the point where the ball to the second entry port 1640 In place of the electric accessory 1640a that regulates the entry of balls, the electric accessory 660f that regulates the entry of balls into the distribution unit 660 is provided, and the contents of the ROM 2020 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed. The contents of the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the contents of the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 150, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is arranged at the position where the variable winning device 65 is arranged (the right side (right-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80) in the third embodiment. The point where it is provided, the point where the electric accessory 660f is arranged above the distribution unit 660, and the second entry ball arranged on the downstream side of the right-handed region (lower right side of the board surface 13) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the opening 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is arranged below the central region of the board (below the first entry opening 64). Although the details will be described later, the distribution unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage port provided above the distribution unit 660. Inside the distribution unit 660, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the right first entry slot 64b. A second ball entry port 1640b is provided, and a ball that has entered the inside of the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to any of these entry ports. Therefore, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by launching the ball aiming at the distribution unit 660 by right-handed striking.

Further, above the distribution unit 660, an electric accessory 660f that can be changed to a permissible position that allows the ball to flow into the passage port provided above the distribution unit 660 and a regulated position that regulates the ball is arranged. There is. The electric accessory 660f is used for a predetermined period when the result of a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, which is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the third embodiment described above, is successful. (1 second x 2 times) It is controlled so as to be variable to an allowable position. As a result, it is better to aim at the first entrance 64 by the game of executing the left-handed game (hereinafter referred to as the left-handed game) in the normal state, and by the game of executing the right-handed player (hereinafter referred to as the right-handed game). It is configured so that the first special symbol can be changed more efficiently than aiming at the entry port 64b.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b) are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

As shown in FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), a passage port through which the ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660, and the transparency that can detect that the ball has passed through the passage port is provided. A mold entry sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage port, a distribution member 900 for distributing the ball to the right first ball entry port 64b or the second ball entry port 1640b is provided. The right first ball entry port 64b is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution member 900, and the second ball entry port 1640b is arranged in the lower right direction of the front view of the distribution member 900. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b by the distribution member 900.

The distribution member 900 is configured to be capable of receiving a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the entire distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is in a state of being inclined downward in the lower left direction (see FIG. 151 (b)), and the first right ball entering ball arranged in the lower left direction in the front view with respect to the distribution member 900. The ball falls toward the mouth 64b (the ball is guided to the right first entry port 64b).

Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c. ing. On the other hand, in the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 660, the distribution member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surfaces constituting the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c are horizontal. The base side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the back side (on the center line of the passage port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged.

The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip end portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution member 900 side. Like the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c comes directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passage port can enter about one ball). The position is such that the 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It will be maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side that receives the ball entering the distribution unit 660 (the side through which the distribution unit 660 passes). Therefore, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 can be reliably distributed to the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the right first entry port 64b and then shake. It is possible to prevent the component member 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the ball to the right first entry port 64b, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the accommodating portion 900c receives and receives the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660. Due to the weight of, the distribution member 900 is rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees, and the accommodating portion 900c is tilted in the direction of inclining in the lower right direction in the front view, so that the ball falls from the accommodating portion 900c. , The ball enters the second entry port 1640b (the ball is guided to the second entry port 1640b). In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the distribution unit 660 to the right first entry port 64b and the second entry port 1640b, so that the right first entry port 1640b can be guided alternately. Balls can be evenly distributed to 64b and the second entrance 1640b to win a prize. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time.

A guide plate 900z1 for guiding the ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a to the right first entry port 64b is provided between the distribution member 900 and the right first entry port 64b for distribution. A guide plate 900Z2 for guiding the ball housed in the accommodating portion 900a to the second entry port 1640b is provided between the member 900 and the second entry port 1640b. As a result, the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to each entry port.

Further, on the upper end side (distribution member 900 side) of each of the guide plates 900z1 and 900z2, a regulation member (not shown) for regulating the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided, and is regulated with the distribution member 900. The rotation range is regulated by the contact with the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating excessively (rotating further counterclockwise than the state shown in FIG. 151 (b)) due to the weight of the ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a. The balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to each entry port.

<Game description of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 159. In the fourth embodiment, the transition ratio to each gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability state) is changed with respect to the third embodiment described above, and the number of time reductions given in the probability change state is changed. When the point, the point where the fluctuation time of each special symbol in the probabilistic state and the latent state is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at the hit symbol. The measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the displayed timing (timing when the hit is confirmed), and the interrupted fluctuation time after the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is completed The difference is that the configuration for resuming the measurement of is used.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, the flow of the game state transition in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state transition in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment shifts to three gaming states (normal state, probabilistic state, latent state) like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment described above. It is configured.

Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above. Has been done. Therefore, the normal state is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantial special figure 1 variation). Further, in the present embodiment, since the small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the small hit game is not executed.

Next, in the probability variation state (probability variation game state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than that of the third embodiment described above, and the right region of the board surface 13 (the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). ) (Hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game in which a ball is made to flow into the distribution unit 660 and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time is executed. The details of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the probabilistic state is the first special symbol (special figure 1). A short-term fluctuation (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of is set and a long-term fluctuation (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set, and the fluctuation is executed in the probabilistic state according to the selected fluctuation time. The lottery (variation) ratio is set to be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times (100 times) is set to be smaller than the number of times (120 times) in which the probability change state is set as the number of time reductions in the probability change state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times). There is. As a result, for example, even if after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, the player shifts to the probabilistic state instead of the latent probable state, which is most advantageous to the player, without going through the jackpot of the special symbol. Since it is possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, short-term fluctuation (3 seconds) and long-term fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, so that it is special during the probabilistic state. Depending on the change status of the second special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the symbol exceeds 100 times and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times), a small hit is made during the latent state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the time saving state ends when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate for a long time (180 seconds) and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next fluctuation is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the probabilistic state (see FIG. 162 (a)) and 5 seconds in the latent state (see FIG. 162 (b)), the second special symbol is set. The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times by the time 180 seconds elapse until the next fluctuation is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the distribution unit 660 and is configured to alternately enter the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a difference depending on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed in the latent state (20 times).

In the latent state (latent game state), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the third embodiment described above, and the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. The lottery (variation) is configured to be executed together (Special Figure 1 Special Figure 2 Substantial Change). Since the other elements are the same as those in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the player's willingness to play is provided because an opportunity is provided to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning the jackpot of the special symbol. Has the effect of being able to continue to increase. Furthermore, if the player shifts to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the degree of advantage in the latent state can be different depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the latent state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result (lottery) and the fluctuation of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result (lottery) are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessively small hit game occurs.

In addition, in the game state (probability change state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the fluctuation ratio between the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is the fluctuation ratio of each special symbol. It is set to differ depending on the fluctuation time set for fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the variation time of each set special symbol, so that the game is played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is often executed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small hit is won with a winning probability lower than the small hit winning probability of the second special symbol. In addition, the small hit winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is larger than the case where the small hit is won with the first special symbol. , It is also possible to provide a small hit game in which it is easier for a ball to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game if the small hit is won by the second special symbol. In this case, when a plurality of small hit games having different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set and the small hit is won by the second special symbol than when the small hit is won by the first special symbol. It is preferable to make the opening period of the variable winning device 65 longer, or to select an opening pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in a state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time, one of them (special figure 2) is hit (big hit or big hit). The flow of each special figure change and the effect display (effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81) in the case of a small hit) will be described. FIG. 153 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation, and the effect display based on the variation of the special figure 1 (effect display using the third symbol) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the probabilistic state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 wins a small hit is shown.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed (lottery) at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the change of each special figure. Some of the effects are displayed. In the present embodiment, of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), a fluctuation display corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations (main variation) and a variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation (secondary). (Variation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 80).

The main variation and the sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure variation is switched according to the gaming state. For example, the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a real variation in the normal state becomes the main variation. The fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be a sub-variation. In this way, among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation, the special figure variation that is substantially executed in the set gaming state is displayed as the main variation, so that the player can display the third symbol. The result of the game can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner on the device 81.

In the fourth embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched between the main variation and the sub variation according to the gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation may be configured to randomly switch between the main fluctuation and the sub-variation, or a predetermined rule (for example, alternating) may be used. ) May be used. In addition, the configuration may be selectable by the player. Even with such a configuration, the same problem occurs when a winner is won by the special symbol variation on the side that does not correspond to the main variation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 153. First, the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are started at the same time, and the special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of the special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the fluctuation of each special figure is started (after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the small hit is won, and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The measurement of the fluctuation time for is interrupted. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, but during the period during which the measurement of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is suspended (interruption period of FIG. 153), the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. The symbol display device 37 is configured so that the variation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped when the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, since the same process as the variable display setting process (see Y4112 in FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed in the above means corresponds to a predetermined period (variation time of the special figure variation) even if the special figure variation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure variation time is interrupted). It is configured to be executed continuously (for 8 seconds). As a result, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the variation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the interruption of the special figure fluctuation (the variation display of the third symbol ( Alternatively, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect display) is interrupted and the player feels uncomfortable.

Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) as described above, the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In the case of continuous execution, the interrupted special figure variation is restarted, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends, and the variation display (or effect) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. There is a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs between the timing when the display) ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern (variation display of the third symbol) set by the fluctuation display setting process (see Y412 of FIG. 135) From the end of the execution of the effect display) to the reception of the symbol confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed. , It is configured so that a shaking effect that slightly swings each symbol is executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of the special symbol variation) that occurs between the timing at which the above-mentioned special symbol variation ends and the timing at which the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) Minutes of error period, the third symbol display device 81 continues the shaking effect for the third symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is made to think that a problem has occurred, thereby reducing the player's motivation to play. There was a problem of letting them do it.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned problem is solved by configuring the additional effect to be executable by utilizing the above-mentioned error period. That is, as shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a small hit at the timing when the normal effect of 8 seconds is completed as the special figure 1 effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, the third symbol display device 81 swings the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 during the period (1 second) until the small hit gaming state ends. Is executed, after that, when the small hit game state ends and the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special figure variation is restarted, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends, and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. ) Ends and the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 153), the situation in which the third symbol is continuously oscillated and displayed can be suppressed, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation where the error occurs.

Although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the content of the additional effect executed according to the error period is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute a more suitable effect display for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the type of the additional effect to be executed is different depending on the length of the period during which the additional effect is executed. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main variation is continuously executed regardless of the lottery result of the sub-variation. Can be suppressed.

FIG. 154 (a) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the additional effect is not executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). This is intentionally because if the additional effect is executed when the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable. This is to prevent additional effects from being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), until the stop command from the main control device 110 is received (see points D to E in FIG. Stop is displayed.

Next, FIG. 154 (b) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the additional effect A is configured to be executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed attached to each symbol is changed to "?" When the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed. The shaking stop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses.

In the present embodiment, a display mode is used in which only the numbers attached to each symbol are hidden, but for example, a display mode in which the characters (“animals”, etc.) of each symbol are also hidden may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses. Further, since this additional effect A is an effect in which only a part of the display mode (display mode of the symbol) of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation is changed, even if the additional effect A is executed when the remaining period is short. It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect B is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the additional effect B is configured to be executed in a part where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 154 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds is changed for the player. A telop for notifying the presence is displayed in the small area Ds5. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the main fluctuation is changing even if the state in which the main fluctuation is stopped and displayed is continuing.

In the present embodiment, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm is configured to be the same as that of FIG. 154 (a), that is, the effect is not added to the display of the main display area Dm, and the additional effect is added. However, the control load is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be the same as that shown in FIG. 154 (b). .. As a result, it is possible to execute the additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 155 (b) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect C is executed as a type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the additional effect C is configured to be executed in a part where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the front view of the main display area Dm, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 The game description is displayed. In this way, by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation production is completed, the player is given a sense of discomfort. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation without. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, as in FIG. 155 (a), a telop for notifying the player that the variation is being executed in the small area Ds5 is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the movement is changing.

FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but in the present embodiment, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period or more (6 seconds or more). As shown in FIG. 156, in the additional effect D, similarly to the additional effect C shown in FIG. 155 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the front view of the main display area Dm, and the main display is displayed. In the central part of the area Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). In this way, when the period (remaining period) in which the additional effect is executed is longer than a predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the remaining period.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the configuration in which the fluctuations of the special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are executed at the same time, one of the special figures stops at a symbol indicating a hit. When it is displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is restarted after the winning game is completed. As described above, it is possible to execute the game without forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the game.

Further, the variation display (for example, the main variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is preset even when the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is stopped. Since it is continuously executed during the period (the period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure from being interrupted due to the lottery result of one special figure. it can. As a result, for example, when a story-like effect is being executed as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation, a winning game is started by winning the winning with one special figure variation. However, it is possible to execute the production with a story that corresponds to the fluctuation of the other special figure without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the game can be enhanced.

Further, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the change of the other special figure is completed and the change of the other special figure executed by the third symbol display device 81 are added. The period during which the corresponding variation display is completed will be different, but since the additional effect is executed using the different period (remainder period), the variation of the special figure for the player. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness due to the difference between the period and the period of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the additional effect executed when the fluctuation period of the special figure and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special figure fluctuation are different is set to the length of the different period (remaining period). Since it is configured to be changed according to the situation, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, when the remainder period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be executed. , It is configured to execute an additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation has ended is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort even when there is a surplus period in which it is difficult to provide the additional effect to the player. In addition, in the 4th embodiment, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is changed, among the variation displays corresponding to the special figure variation, the special figure It is configured to execute an additional effect in which the display mode showing the lottery result is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the special figure change by the change display corresponding to the special figure change before the end of the change period of the special figure.

In addition, when the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being executed (the variation display of the special figure variation has ended, but the variation of the special figure has not been completed. During the period), the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order because the new special figure change is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the surplus period is a predetermined period, the display for notifying the player that the special figure is changing on the third symbol display device 81 (“changing display)) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the state in which the new special figure change is not executed is a normal state. In the fourth embodiment, the remainder period is a predetermined period. The above-mentioned "changing display" is displayed at the same time as the additional effect to be executed in a certain case is started. For example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the additional effect is executed. It may be configured so that the "changing display" is executed after the lapse. With this configuration, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-term additional effect described above is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the additional effect is set as a game. It is possible to suppress being grasped by a person.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when a remainder period of a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information irrelevant to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content) is provided. The additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of information about the game by effectively utilizing the period in which the new special figure change is not started on the display on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by displaying the information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the extra period. In the fourth embodiment, information for explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, but other information may be displayed. Often, for example, past game history may be displayed, or information (fortune-telling, games, etc.) unrelated to the game itself may be displayed.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, of the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change in which the change is executed at the same time, the special figure change in which the player expects the lottery result more is the main change, and the other changes are the sub-variations. It is set so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily grasp the content of the main variation. There is. As a result, the player can easily grasp the fluctuation content of the main fluctuation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the special figure (the special figure which is the target of the substantial change) that the player expects from the lottery result is switched according to the game state, but the special figure which is the target of the actual change is switched. Is executed as the main variation, so that the game content can be displayed (notified) to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the flow of fluctuation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state in the fourth embodiment shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. To do. FIG. 157 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 2, and FIG. 157 (b). Is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the latent probability state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figures 1 and 2 can be changed at the same time, the advantageous state (latent state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, the latent state). When the setting is limited to 120 times), the number of times the advantageous state is set when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the number of probable changes). ) Is subtracted. In this case, the special figure variation executed in the first rotation (the number of fluctuations “121” in FIG. 157) after the end of the advantageous state becomes the special figure 1 variation (see FIG. 157 (b)), and the special figure 2 variation. (See FIG. 157 (a)).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a short fluctuation time is set as the special figure fluctuation time in the latent state in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state. (See FIG. 162 (b)), the game result (see FIG. 86 (b)) displayed when the latent state ends is displayed during the special figure change executed after the latent state ends. doing. Specifically, the player is made to grasp the game result (FIG. 86 (b)) of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation (main variation in the normal state) that is first executed after the transition from the latent state to the normal state. The time is set to be sufficient (12 seconds in this embodiment).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation that is first executed after the transition from the latent state to the normal state is the special figure of the first rotation after the end of the latent state. Since it changes depending on the game situation during the latent state, whether it becomes a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation of the second rotation is latent by simply setting the special figure fluctuation time of the first rotation to 12 seconds after the latent state ends. There was a problem that the player could not grasp the game result of the state.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the end of the latent state is set to a time sufficient for the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 86 (b) (12 seconds in the present embodiment)). It is set so that when the change of the special figure 1 is executed in any of the special figure changes, the game result is notified using the change time. This ensures that the player is latent. The game result of the state can be notified.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation (number of fluctuations “122”) after the end of the latent state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. In the case shown in FIG. 157 (b), the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation (number of fluctuations “121”) after the end of the latent state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 157 (a), the game result is obtained by using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation which is the main fluctuation in the normal state. It may be configured to notify.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159, screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display A, FIG. 158 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display B, and FIG. 159 (a) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special display A, and FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special display B.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. In the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the third embodiment described above. It differs in that it is.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the fourth embodiment is a first hit type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 91) used in the third embodiment described above. When the value of C2 is changed, the jackpot H is specified instead of the jackpot G which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and the V prize is won in some jackpot types. The difference is that the number of time reductions given is specified as 100 times instead of 120 times. Other than that, it is the same as the third embodiment described above, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type and the first hit. When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is " In the case of "45 to 49", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the fourth embodiment, will be described. This jackpot H is a jackpot in which a jackpot game of two rounds (R) is executed, and the same opening pattern as the small hit game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. .. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game having the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by grasping the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit). It can be difficult to identify the game).

Therefore, for example, when a hit game is executed during the latent probability state, is the hit game a hit game (that is, a jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game (that is, a small hit game) in which the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not changed, the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be played while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability / time saving state) is 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic change state continues (120 times). When the special figure fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probabilistic state, the game state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a big hit in the special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the interest of the game can be set. Can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fourth embodiment, the period in which the normal table A2020f1 is referred to is latently determined with respect to the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) of the third embodiment described above. The point that the latent probability is changed from the third rotation after the end of the state to the ninth rotation or later after the end of the state, the point that the normal table Bb2020fb2 is provided instead of the normal table B2020f2, and the probability change table 2020f3 is replaced with the probability change table 2020f3. The point where the table 2020fb3 is provided, the point where the latent probability table b2020fb4 is provided instead of the latent probability table 2020f4, and the normal table Cb2020fb5 referred to in the period of the third to eighth rotations after the end of the latent probability state are provided. It differs from the point provided.

Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the fourth embodiment (game characteristics different from those of the third embodiment described above) will be described. As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured to be capable of holding and storing up to four lottery drawings of the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when the right-handed game is executed during the latent state and the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state while four lottery of Special Figure 2 is held and stored, the held memory is stored. The lottery of the special figure 2 that has been performed is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state.

Further, also in the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 from being frequently executed in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, , The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 10 minutes) is set, so that there is a problem that the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed in the normal state. ..

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, even if the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent state is executed in the normal state, in order to suppress the execution of the special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time, The predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special figure lottery is executed eight times) is set so that the fluctuation time for the special figure 2 lottery is short. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is performing an appropriate game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when one of the special figures stops at a symbol indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) as described above, until the hit game based on the hit ends (the hit game ends). However, since the configuration is such that the other special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped) until the special figure fluctuation becomes feasible), the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed. If it is done, even if the big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 and the game state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery of special figure 2 will be held until the long-term fluctuation ends. It is not executed, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Even for such problems, the predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is the subsequent period in the normal state. The above-mentioned problem can be solved by configuring so that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected for (the period after the special drawing lottery is executed eight times).

Here, the normal table Bb2020fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. The normal table Bb2020fb2 is different from the normal table B2020f2 of the third embodiment described above in that the fluctuation time specified in some fluctuation patterns is changed, and is otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

To specifically explain the difference from the third embodiment described above, in the normal table Bb2020fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)". The fluctuation time is specified. That is, from the transition of the game state from the latent state to the normal state until the special figure lottery is executed twice, the fluctuation of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" regardless of the symbol type and the winning / failing judgment result. The time will be set.

With this configuration, any one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state can be regarded as the fluctuation shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent state is notified in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, there is an effect that the period for notifying the game result can be surely secured.

In the fourth embodiment, in the normal table Bb2020fb2, which is referred only to a predetermined period (the period until the special figure variation is executed twice) after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. , It is stipulated that the same fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the symbol type and the result of the hit / fail judgment, but it is not necessary to set all the fluctuation times to be the same, and other fluctuation times are set. It may be configured to be set. In this case, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 won by the jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game is started. It can be suppressed, and the effect display executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be easily displayed for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

In the fourth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the effect display (for example, the game in the latent state) is executed in response to the change of the special figure 1. In order to execute the result display (result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (special figure 1) is used in the period of two special figure fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. Alternatively, by configuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 is changed for 12 seconds regardless of the timing when the fluctuation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing the game result in the latent state) is executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, for example. When the special figure 1 continuously fluctuates after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, a predetermined effect display (for example, in the latent state) corresponds to the first change in the special figure 1. It is preferable to execute (result display showing the game result), and to execute the normal effect display suggesting the corresponding lottery result to the player for the second special figure 1 change.

Next, the normal table Cb2020fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb2020fb5. The normal table Cb2020fb5 is a table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the latent probability state ends.

The normal table Cb2020fb5 is set so that the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is shorter than that of the above-mentioned normal table Bb2020fb2. Specifically, the fluctuation time selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the hit / fail determination result. With this configuration, all the lottery of special figure 2 stored on hold in the latent state is digested within a predetermined period (within 8 rotations of special figure fluctuation) after the game state shifts to the normal state. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being motivated by the fluctuation being executed for a long time when the game state shifts even though the proper game is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 which is held and stored during the latent state from being executed with a long fluctuation (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 is obtained. The special variation pattern is selected during the period when the special figure lottery for 8 pieces, which is the sum of (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved memories (4 pieces) of special figure 2, is executed. It suffices if it is possible to prevent the lottery of special figure 2 stored on hold during the latent state from being executed due to long-term fluctuation (about 10 minutes). For example, it corresponds to special figure 1 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2. By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be four times or more longer than the maximum fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb2020fb2, the fluctuation pattern was set with reference to the normal table Bb2020fb2. By the time the change (lottery) of the special figure 1 is completed, all the lottery of the special figure 2 stored on hold may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to digest the lottery of the special figure 2 which is held and stored in a shorter period of time.

In addition, a special production period for displaying the result of the latent state is the period from when the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state until all the lottery stored in the hold of Special Figure 2 is digested (the lottery is executed). Then, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of special figure 2 in which the lottery result is a big hit is stored on hold during the latent state, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big hit is stopped and displayed during the special production period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, the effect display in the normal state is executed by configuring the effect display in the normal state to be executed after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memories of the special figure 2 are exhausted). It is preferable that the lottery of Special Figure 2 is not executed (variation is executed) in the meantime. As a result, the state in which the special figure 2 is variablely displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the state in which the proper game is not executed and the hall clerk. Can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can take appropriate measures for the player.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b2020fb3. The probability change table b2020fb3 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the same fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state regardless of the number of reserved balls and the hit / fail determination result. doing. Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is a hit (big hit), the hit probability variation variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified, and when the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is wrong, , The out-of-probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are set for each hit / fail judgment result. ing. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is a hit (big hit), it hits the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)). Are associated with each other, and a probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of "160 to 198".

When the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the small hit probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. A small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of "160 to 198". Further, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is out of alignment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the out-of-range probabilistic long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) in the range of "0 to 159". Out of the range of "160 to 198", the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated.

Here, the relationship between the game content in the probabilistic state in the fourth embodiment and the fluctuation time set in each of the above-mentioned special figures (special figure 1 or special figure 2) will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 152, in the high probability state (120 times), the probability variation state in which the time reduction is given to the first 100 times is set, and in the high probability state. If the number of special drawing lottery exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot, the latent probability state in which the time reduction is not given is set.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing the right-handed game, the balls are alternately generated in the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b. It is configured to enter the ball (see FIG. 150). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the fluctuation time is set so that the lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be executed together during the probability change state as described above, the third described above. Unlike the embodiment, the right-handed game can be executed during the probability change state.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the right-handed game is executed during the probability change state, and the game in which the ball is alternately inserted into the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b is executed. Since the lottery between 1 and the special figure 2 is executed based on the set fluctuation time, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in which the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. It is possible to execute more lottery (variation) based on the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, and on the other hand, by setting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 minutes as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is set. However, many lottery (variation) based on Special Figure 1 will be executed.

In this way, by making the rate at which the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed different depending on the set fluctuation time, the game that gives the player a sense of tension can be achieved. It becomes possible to execute. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is composed of one type (10 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is composed of two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous for the player. The shortest fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of the special figure 2) is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player, and is advantageous to the player. The maximum fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) may be longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player. A plurality of types of fluctuation times may be set for the figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2).

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 1) on the side that is disadvantageous to the player, the player has a low probability (for example, only in the range of "1" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1). A variation time (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the maximum variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 2) on the advantageous side may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a probabilistic state in which a large number of special figure fluctuations (variations in special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time of each special figure in the probable change state is set regardless of the number of reserved balls, but the fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player may be lengthened as the number of reserved balls decreases. As a result, in order to execute many lottery of the special figure 2, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit.

In addition, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the special figure held and stored is determined, and the notification (look-ahead) suggesting the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the state of being held and stored. It may be configured to execute (variation time notification). In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is small (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1) as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the specific fluctuation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30"). A long fluctuation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected, and a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set when the number of reserved balls is large (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more). The player may be notified by the look-ahead fluctuation time notification that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 30" is held and stored. As a result, the player can more actively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

The contents described above are executed for the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) that is advantageous to the player, but the same technical idea is applied to the special figure variation that is disadvantageous to the player (special figure 1). It may be configured to execute against (variation). Further, the reserved storage number referred to when the fluctuation time is changed according to the reserved storage number may refer to the total value of the reserved storage numbers of the special figures 1 and 2, and the fluctuation is executed. Only the number of reserved storages corresponding to the symbol type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) may be referred to.

In addition, in the probabilistic state, the total number of special drawing lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 and the number of lottery of special figure 2 (number of fluctuations) is 100 without winning the jackpot. By exceeding the number of times, the game state is changed from the probable state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be changed according to the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

Next, the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table b2020fb4. In the latent probability table b2020fb4, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set shorter than that of the latent probability table 2020f4 of the third embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set by the number of reserved balls. There is a difference between the point of change and the point of changing the fluctuation time in Special Figure 2.

Specifically, if the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is a hit (big hit), a hit short variation (variation time 5 seconds) is specified, and if the hit / fail judgment result of Special Figure 1 is wrong, , Off-short fluctuation (variation time 5 seconds) is specified.

Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is a hit (big hit), the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". The short variation A (variation time 1 second) is associated with the short variation A (variation time 1 second), and the short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198" when the number of reserved balls is 0,2,3. .. Further, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1, and the small hit short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second) is in the range of "0 to 198" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ) Is associated, the number of reserved balls is 0, 2, and 3, and the small hit short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198". Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment in Special Figure 2 is incorrect, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198" regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

In this way, in the latent probability table b2020fb4 referred to during the latent probability state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of fluctuation times of the special figure 2 when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit. It is possible to suppress the game of firing a ball aiming at (so-called stop hitting).

Further, when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3), the set fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1). This is because when the number of reserved balls is large, a large number of balls have entered the right first entry port 64b and the second entry opening 1640b, so that the balls enter each entry port. It is in a state where a sufficient prize ball is paid out to the player. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1), the number of balls entering the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b is small, so that the prize balls are sufficient for the player. Is not paid out.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3), the fluctuation time set is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1). It is possible to equalize the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls paid out by entering the ball into the ball and the number of prize balls paid out by the small hit game. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted to be disadvantageous to the player (adjustment that makes it difficult for the ball to enter each entrance), it is possible to easily obtain a prize ball by a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being lowered.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0, the same fluctuation time as when the number of reserved balls is large (the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3) is set. .. This is for the player to shoot the balls at intervals and suppress the game aiming at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a player who executes a malicious game with a game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by a small hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player is executed, the second entrance 1640b and the lottery of the special figure 1 which is disadvantageous are executed. Since the balls are configured to enter the ball alternately into the ball entry port 64b, it is further suppressed that the game intentionally aiming only at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the short fluctuation time is set is executed. can do.

In the fourth embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, two types of fluctuation times can be set according to the number of reserved balls, but there are various types of fluctuation times without limitation. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, different fluctuation times may be set for each number of reserved balls, or the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be divided and changed so that different fluctuation times are set even for the same number of reserved balls. You may set the time. Further, a different variable time may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing lottery executed after the small hit game is completed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until the special drawing lottery is executed three times, the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won may be long. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive prize balls from being paid out when the lottery for winning small hits is biased.

Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game (for example, the period until the lottery of the special figure is executed three times), a short variation when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more). It is preferable that the time (for example, 0.5 second) is set. By configuring in this way, the player can continuously execute the game. Further, the fluctuation time set in this case may be the same as the time of the interval between rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, when the small hits are continuously won, the variable winning device 65 can be changed as if the big hits were won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the frequency at which the small hit game in the latent state is executed can be set based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, so that the latent state can be set. The number of prize balls paid out inside (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) is made uniform, but as another configuration, the general drawing lottery It may be configured to set the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery based on the number of reserved memories. For example, when the number of reserved memories of the regular drawing lottery is large, it is easy for the ball to enter the distribution unit 660 (because it is easy for the ball to enter each entry port), so that the fluctuation time of the regular drawing lottery is lengthened. When the number of reserved memories of the general drawing lottery is small, it is preferable to set it so that the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery is shorter than when the number is large. As a result, the degree of ball entry into the distribution unit 660 can be made uniform, and as a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the entry into each entry port). And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be made uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 163, in the RAM 2030 in the fourth embodiment, the second special symbol execution area 2030b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 2030p are deleted with respect to the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). At the same time, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 2030ba, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 2030bb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 1640b. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added one by one. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030d.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 2030bb has one execution area and four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 2030bb, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry opening 1640b (starting winning) is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to be turned on when stopping the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y1332 in FIG. 173), and the special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 167) (see Y232 in FIG. 167). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during the change is executed (Y233 in FIG. 167). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 2030 bc of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 169) (Y2801: Yes in FIG. 169), it is set to off (Y2803 in FIG. 169). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is processed in the same manner as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit or a big hit. Is executed and set to on.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to on when stopping the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y732 in FIG. 170), and the special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 167) (see Y232 in FIG. 167). Since the contents referred to in this process are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 172) that it is set to on (Y2901: Yes in FIG. 172), it is set to off (Y2903 in FIG. 172).

Next, the details of the ROM 2220 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (a). FIG. 164 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 2220 according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fourth embodiment partially includes the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97 (a)). There is a difference between the changed point and the addition of the additional effect selection table 2220ba.

Here, the screen display selection 2 table 2220b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (b). FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 2220b. The screen display selection 2 table 2220b is configured so that different screen display types are selected depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the probabilistic state, with respect to the screen display selection table 2220b of the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been changed. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 164 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display content (screen display type) for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. The normal display is specified as. In this normal display, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 80 (b)). Display contents. In the normal state, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation. Therefore, by setting the normal display, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed.

In the normal state, the demo display A is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off. When the demo display A is determined, the demo display A screen (see FIG. 158 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the main fluctuation is completed, the demo display A screen (customer waiting demo screen) is switched to regardless of whether the sub fluctuation is being executed or not. By doing so, even if the player quits the game immediately after the player enters the ball into the second entry port 1640b and the long-time fluctuation display is started, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen understand that the pachinko machine 10 is vacant, so that the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. Further, since the special figure 2 is actually displayed in a variable manner on the demo display A screen, in order to make the player easily understand that the table is vacant, the small area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds is set to ". "You can play" is displayed. As a result, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

In the normal state, the demo display B (see FIG. 158 (b)) is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both off. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

Next, in the probabilistic state, for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is off, or a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on. Each is associated with a normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed is executed in the probabilistic state, the special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 2230s) is executed for either special figure. , Special figure 2 standby flag 2230t) is set to off, and the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the special figure is stopped) for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the respective determination results, And by setting the screen display type based on the currently set game state, the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure) in which the player expects the lottery result according to the game state as in the fourth embodiment. 2) The pachinko machine 10 having the game property of changing (the game property of changing the symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) which substantially changes according to the game state) is played in the current game state. It is possible to easily notify whether or not the fluctuation (main fluctuation) of the symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) expected by the person is executed.

In the probabilistic state, the special display A (see FIG. 159 (a)) is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both off. As a result, the current game status can be suggested to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo screen.

In the latent state, the display content is displayed for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is on, or the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t are both on. A special display B (FIG. 159 (b)) is defined as a screen display type). This special display B is displayed in a state in which the special figure 2 which is a substantial fluctuation in the latent probability state has not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to on).

Next, the additional effect selection table 2220ba in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 2220ba. In this additional effect selection table 2220ba, the additional effect period (extracted) that occurs when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030 bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030 bd is set to on and the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped. It is a table referred to when selecting the type of additional effect (additional effect type) to be executed in FIG. 153), and the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be executed and the acquired effect. An additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 2230h.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is "0 to 99", the additional effect is added. “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 154 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 154 (b)).

When the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is 2 to 15 seconds (period B) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is " "Additional effect B" is selected (see FIG. 155 (a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect C" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the remaining fluctuation time (the period during which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C) and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is "additional effect". "C" is selected (see FIG. 155 (b)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect D" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 156).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be executed. Therefore, for example, the remaining effect When the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the effect executed by the additional effect), the additional effect (for example, additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed, and the remaining effect is executed. When the remaining fluctuation time is long so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the production performed during the fluctuation time (when the player can sufficiently grasp the content of the production performed by the additional production). In, an additional effect (for example, additional effect D) having a content different from that of the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the details of the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230 according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 166, the RAM 2230 in the fourth embodiment has a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230 ba and residual fluctuation time information with respect to the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 97 (b)). A storage area 2230bb and an additional effect information storage area 2230bc have been added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2230ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main control device 110, and is the first special described above in the third embodiment. The only difference is that the target for updating the counter is the second special symbol reserved ball counter 2030ba instead of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 2030d for the symbol reserved ball counter 2230c, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb provides information on the remaining period (remaining fluctuation time) of the currently set fluctuation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110. It is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after the fluctuation is resumed.

When the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received in the temporary stop-related processing (see FIG. 178), the residual fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb has a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (Y4901: Yes in FIG. 178). The residual fluctuation period is calculated (Y4903 in FIG. 178), and the residual fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the residual fluctuation period (see Y4907 to Y4908 in FIG. 178). Then, in the fluctuation restart processing (see FIG. 179), when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (Y5001: Yes in FIG. 179) and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (Y5002: No in FIG. 179), it is used to determine an additional effect type (Y5003 in FIG. 179), and then the set residual fluctuation period information is cleared (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

The additional effect information storage area 2230bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and the additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. The additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read out when the determined additional effect type is set (Y5005, Y5006 in FIG. 179) in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 179) and the additional effect command for display is set. (Y5007 in FIG. 179) and then cleared (Y5009 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment described above, in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 101), the special symbol variation process 2 (See FIG. 167), Game state update process 2 (see FIG. 168) instead of game state update process (see FIG. 105), Start winning process 2 (see FIG. 174) instead of start winning process (see FIG. 114), The difference is that the jackpot end process 2 (FIG. 175) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure), in addition to the third embodiment described above, The lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is also configured so that it can be stored on hold, and when both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are performing fluctuations at the same time, either one of them. When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is restarted after the hit game based on the hit of one special figure is completed. There is a big difference in the composition.

It should be noted that the point that the lottery of special figure 2 is configured to be hold-stored and the control process based on the lottery are the same as the configuration and control process of holding and storing the lottery of special figure 1 described in the third embodiment described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Y104) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit, and (Y231). When it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (Y231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to ON (Y232). .. In the processing of Y232, since one special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the fluctuation is interrupted. When it is determined in the processing of Y232 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure. The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (Y233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, and this process is performed. To finish. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y231, when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (Y2311: No), is the value of the special figure 1 variable timer (special figure 1 variable time timer) 2030s larger than 0 (Y231: No)? That is, when it is determined (Y234) whether the special figure 1 is changing) and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is not larger than 0 (0). (Y234: No) executes the same process as the first special symbol variation start process (Y204) of the third embodiment described above, and then shifts to Y238 which executes the variation process related to the special figure 2.

In the processing of Y234, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer (special figure 1 fluctuation time timer) 2030s is larger than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution processing (Y235) is executed. To do. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 169.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235), it is next determined whether the variation time end timing (special figure 1 variation timer 2030s is 0) (Y236), and the variation time ends. If it is determined that the timing is (Y236: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238. On the other hand, in the processing of Y236, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (Y236: No), the processing of Y237 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y238.

In the processing of Y238 to Y242, the same processing as that of Y234 to Y237 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the processing of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (Y238), and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer is executed. When it is determined that the value of 2030t is not larger than 0 (0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is executed, and then this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) is the second special symbol variation start process 2 (see Y217 in FIG. 107) described above, to which a subtraction process of the number of reserved storages is added, and details thereof. Will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t is larger than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation execution processing (Y240) is executed. The second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executes the process during the special diagram 2 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

After finishing the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (Y240), it is next determined whether the fluctuation time end timing (special figure 2 fluctuation timer 2030t is 0) (Y241), and the fluctuation time ends. If it is determined that the timing is reached (Y241: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Y241, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (Y241: No), the processing of Y242 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307) will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (Y307). In the game state update process 2 (Y307), the value of the time reduction counter 2030g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 with respect to the game state update process (see FIG. 105) of the third embodiment described above. The difference is that a configuration has been added to set a status command that indicates the latent status when there is none. This is configured so that the number of time reductions (100 times) set in the probabilistic state is smaller than the number of times the probabilistic state is set (120 times) in the fourth embodiment. This is because when the number of lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times, the game state can be changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state without winning a big hit.

When the game state update process 2 (Y307) is executed, first, the same processes as the above-mentioned game state update processes (see FIG. 105) Y601 to Y608 are executed, and when the Y608 process is completed, the time is shortened. It is determined whether the value of the counter 2030g is 0 (Y631), if it is determined to be 0 (Y631: Yes), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is not 0 (1 or more) (Y632: No), it is a probability variation state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so that it is a latent probability state. The state command indicating is set (Y633), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y631, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 2030g is not 0 (Y631: No), or in the processing of Y632, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is 0 (Y632: Yes). ) Skips the processing of Y633 and ends the main processing as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235). In the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 2030bc of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to be turned on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. is there. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 2030u is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed by the main controller 110 every 2 milliseconds is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030 bc is set to on), the Y231 process is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the Y231 process is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to on. It is configured so that it is the timing to resume the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 169. If it is determined in the processing of Y2801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to on (Y2801: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (Y2802), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. The stop flag 2030bc is set to off (Y2803), and the process shifts to Y2804. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is not set on (set to off) (Y2801: No), the processing of Y2802 and Y2803 is skipped and Y2804 Move to the processing of.

In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 variable time timer (special figure 1 variable timer) 2030s is subtracted by 1 and updated (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y237) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y237). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y237) executes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above. ), When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, the change of the special figure 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted) instead of the configuration of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2. It is different in that it is provided.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a big hit (Y731), and it is not a big hit (it is a miss). ) (Y731: No), the same processing as Y709 and Y710 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y731, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (Y7311: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to on (Y732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is turned on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the setting is made is set (Y733). Then, the same processing as Y706 and Y708 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 106) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 2 (Y239). In the second special symbol change start processing 2 (Y239), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed.

In the second special symbol change start processing 2 (Y239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to ON (Y831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Y831). : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 17) within the same process as the process in which the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to on in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (Y237 in FIG. 170). When Y239) of 171 is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (Y239 of FIG. 171) are skipped, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the special figure 2 from starting at the same time (within the same process) as the timing when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the hit.

If it is determined in the processing of Y831 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is not set to on (set to off) (Y831: No), then the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba (N2) is acquired (Y832), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter is greater than 0 (Y833). In the processing of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is larger than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is set. After subtracting 1 (Y834), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 2030ba after the subtraction is set. (Y835).

The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) as in the third embodiment described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 2030ba from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 2230. Store in 2230ba. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 2230ba according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the second special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 2030ba.

When the processing of Y835 is completed, the data of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 2030bb is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the processing of Y836 is completed, the same processing as Y804 to Y807 of the second special symbol variation start processing (see Y207 of FIG. 107) of the third embodiment described above is then executed to end this processing. Further, in the processing of Y833, even when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 2030ba is 0 (Y833: No), the second special symbol fluctuation start of the third embodiment described above is started. The same process as Y808 to Y810 of the process (see Y207 in FIG. 107) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the content of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see Y104 in FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240). In the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to ON (Y2901). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 2030b of Special Figure 2 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (big hit) while the special figure 2 is changing. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 2030u is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed by the main controller 110 every 2 milliseconds is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 167) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to on), the Y231 process is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game is completed and it is determined in the process of Y231 that the jackpot is not in progress, the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game ends and the variable time is changed when the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation has been suspended.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 172. If it is determined in the processing of Y2901 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db is set to on (Y2901: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is set (Y2902), and the special figure 2 provisional stop flag is set. The stop flag 2030b is set to off (Y2903), and the process shifts to Y2904. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030b is not set to on (set to off) (Y2901: No), the processing of Y2902 and Y2903 is skipped and Y2904 is skipped. Move to the processing of.

In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 2030t is subtracted by 1 and updated (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y242) will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y242). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (Y242) executes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and is the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above. (See), when the lottery result of special figure 2 is a big hit, the change of special figure 1 is interrupted (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted) instead of the configuration of forcibly stopping the change of special figure 1. The difference is that the configuration is provided and the processing executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (Y242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a big hit (Y1331), and it is not a big hit (it is a miss). ) (Y1331: No), and then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (Y1334). When it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in the process of Y1334 (Y1334: No), the same process as Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above is executed. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y1334, if it is determined that the hit is a small hit (Y1334: Yes), then the small hit stop processing is executed (Y1335). In this small hit stop process, the same process as Y1402 to Y1406 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see Y1304 of FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above is executed. When the small hit stop process (Y1335) is completed, the same processes as those of Y1310 and Y1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and this process is completed.

In the processing of Y1331, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (Y1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to on (Y1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to on. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (Y1333). Then, the same process as Y1307 to 1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 112) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105) will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (Y105). This start winning process 2 (Y105) is different from the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above when a ball wins (wins) the second ball opening 1640b. It differs in that. Specifically, since the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which the lottery of Special Figure 2 can be held and stored, when a ball wins (wins) in the second entry opening 1640b, the second special symbol holding ball The process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 2030ba is executed.

Regarding the processing when the ball enters the second entrance 1640b, the ball wins the first entrance (entry) in the start winning process (see FIG. 114) of the third embodiment described above. Since the process is different only in that the target of the process is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112) will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (Y2112). The jackpot end process 2 (Y2112) differs from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment described above only in that the value set in the time reduction counter 2030 g is changed from 120 to 100, and the other aspects. Since the processing of is the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is less than the number of times (120 times) in which the probabilistic state is set. When the lottery (variation) of the special figure exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to the latent state.

With this configuration, the opportunity to shift to the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is when a jackpot whose jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot D is won (that is, latent after the jackpot ends). If you win a jackpot for which a certain state is set), you win a jackpot whose jackpot type is jackpot A (that is, you win a jackpot for which a probability change state is set after the jackpot ends), and a jackpot during the probability change state There are cases where the lottery of special symbols is executed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the prize, and a plurality (two) can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the timing at which the above-mentioned two transition conditions are satisfied is different. That is, the former transition condition described above can be satisfied after the jackpot ends, and the latter transition condition can be satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the gaming state shifts to the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation that a gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

In the present embodiment, one type of configuration is used in which the value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the time reduction counter 2030g that can be set in the jackpot end processing are used, but other configurations may be used, for example. The value of the probability variation counter 2030k and the value of the time reduction counter 2030g may be set differently according to the winning jackpot type. With this configuration, the value set in the probability variation counter 2030k, that is, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends (the number of lottery of the special symbol) and the value set in the time saving counter 2030g. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of times (the number of lottery of special symbols) in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols (state with electric support)) is set after the jackpot ends, the probability change state after the jackpot ends. Is set (the number of lottery of special symbols), the number of times until the transition to the latent state (the number of lottery of special symbols), and the number of times that the latent state is set (the number of lottery of special symbols) are set. be able to.

Therefore, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping how many times the lottery of the special symbol should be executed without winning the jackpot to shift to the latent state. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of transition to the latent state continuously in the state where the probability change state is set.

In addition, as described above, when a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g can be set according to the jackpot type, the high probability state of the special symbol is set during the probability variation state. It is advisable to provide a suggestion notification means that suggests to the player the period of time and the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. With this configuration, by grasping the content of the suggestion notified by the suggestion notification means, the player can predict the timing of transition to the latent state, and the attitude during the transition period to the latent state is enhanced. be able to.

As the suggestion content to be notified by the above-mentioned suggestion notification means, a value indicating the number of lottery of special symbols until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) may be notified, or the latent probability may be notified. A variable mode in which the display mode (for example, color, shape, size) changes according to the number of lottery of the special symbol until the transition to the state (until the transition condition is satisfied) may be notified. In addition, a determination means for determining whether the number of lottery of special symbols until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) is provided, and the number of lottery of special symbols May be configured to perform the above-mentioned suggestion notification when it is determined that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

Furthermore, when the transition condition is satisfied during the probability change state and the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state suggests to the player the period during which the latent state is set (the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the latent state). It is advisable to provide a certain period suggestion notification means. Further, by making this configuration correspond to the jackpot type and using it in a configuration in which a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 2030k and the time reduction counter 2030g can be set, the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player continues. It is possible to make the player predict the set period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of lottery of special symbols until the transition to the latent state (until the transition condition is satisfied) and the period during which the latent state is set (the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the latent state). And may be determined in a complex manner, and the degree of advantage of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot may be notified to the player based on the determination result. With this configuration, when a plurality of gaming states set after the end of the jackpot are provided, the degree of advantage can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 176) is executed, and the same processing is executed otherwise. Specifically, a process to be executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the third embodiment is added has been added.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Y4111). The command determination process 2 (Y4111) is a process executed when a residual probability variation number command or a remaining time reduction number command is received with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above, and a temporary stop. The processing to be executed when a related command is received has been added.

When the command determination process 2 (Y4111) is executed, first, the same process as Y4301 to Y4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above is executed. Then, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has been received in the processing of Y4317 (Y4317: Yes), the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is then executed.

Here, the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (Y4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (Y4318) is executed, the same process as Y4651 and Y4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above is executed, and when the process of Y4652 is completed, The same process as Y4661 and Y4662 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) of the third embodiment described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information of the residual probability variation number area 2230o and the effect probability variation number area 2230p to the information corresponding to the value of the residual probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command output from the main control device 110 is executed. In the fourth embodiment as well, the same remaining number update process (see FIG. 134) as in the third embodiment described above may be executed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 176. When it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has not been received in the processing of Y4317 (Y4317: No), then it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (Y4331). Here, as the temporary stop-related commands, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030db are set to ON. The special figure 2 temporary stop command output to, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to off, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 2030bp are set to off. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation restart command that is output when this is the case.

If it is determined that a temporary stop-related command has been received in the processing of Y4331 (Y4331: Yes), then the temporary stop-related processing is executed (Y4332), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received in the process of Y4331 (Y4331: No), the same process as Y4319 of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (Y4332) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (Y4332). In this temporary stop-related process (Y4332), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or special figure 2 When the fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (Y4332) is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (Y4901), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (Y4901). : No), shift to Y4902 and execute the fluctuation restart process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received in the processing of Y4901 (Y4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (Y4903). ). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation period calculated by the processing of Y4903 is less than 2 seconds (Y4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (Y4904: Yes), the residual variation is in the residual variation time information storage area 2230bb. A period A indicating that the period is short is set (Y4905), and the process proceeds to Y4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (Y4904: No), then it is determined whether the residual fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds (Y4904: No). Y4906), if it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (Y4906: Yes), a period B indicating that it is a normal residual fluctuation period is set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb (Y4907), and the process proceeds to Y4902. Transition.

In the processing of Y4906, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (Y4906: No), the period C indicating that the residual fluctuation period is long is set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb. Set (Y4908) and move to the processing of Y4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (residual fluctuation period) that is executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation period without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (Y4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (Y4902). This fluctuation restart process (Y4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart processing (Y4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command has been received (Y5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (Y5001: No). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command has been received (Y5001), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is currently being executed (Y5002). .. In the processing of Y5002, the fluctuation effect executed for the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) in accordance with the execution of the special figure fluctuation interrupts the special figure fluctuation (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted). , When the special figure change is restarted after the winning game is completed, it is determined whether the state is not completed.

In the process of Y5002, when it is determined that the variation effect is being executed (Y5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (Y5006), and the process proceeds to Y5007. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5002, when it is determined that the variation effect is not being executed (Y5002: No), then the residual variation time information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 2230bb is read out (Y5003). , The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 2220ba (Y5004) based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the effect counter 2230h, and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc. (Y5005).

Then, when the processing of Y5005 or Y5006 is completed, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is read (Y5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set. (Y5008), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 2230bb and the additional effect information storage area 2230bc is cleared (Y5009), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is performed after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed in the period until is restarted, and when the special figure fluctuation is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart is performed. It is configured to be executed, but other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining the normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period determining means determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide an effect display more suitable for the player. Further, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, one special figure variation (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, so that the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special figure 1). The case where the subtraction of the figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation has already been completed at the time when the other special figure fluctuation is restarted has been described (Fig.). 153), for example, a case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure change is not completed at the time when the other special figure change is restarted will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

FIG. 180 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation, and the effect display based on the variation of the special figure 1 (effect display using the third symbol) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the probabilistic state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 wins a small hit is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 180, the case where the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the variation of the special figure 1 is restarted is shown. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 180, the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed, instead of executing the additional effect at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted. It is configured in. In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed to the normal effect end timing instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed without discomfort, and the player's willingness to play. Can be suppressed.

In this case, the remaining period determining means for determining the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, and the interruption period determining means for determining the period during which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted. , Whether or not the normal effect is being executed when it is determined by the restart determination means for determining that the special figure 1 fluctuation has been restarted and the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted. When it is determined that the normal effect is not executed (already finished) by the effect status determination means, the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means is provided. When it is determined that the additional effect execution means for executing the additional effect corresponding to the above and the normal effect are being executed, the execution of the additional effect is made to wait until the effect status determination means determines that the normal effect is completed. It is advisable to provide an additional effect execution standby means. With this configuration, the timing to execute the additional effect based on the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted and the end timing of the normal effect of the special figure 1 variation (when the special figure 1 variation is restarted or the normal effect ends). It is possible to set an appropriate timing as time), and it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, by providing the distribution unit 660 in the right-handed area of the game board 13, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in which the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, and for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 181 may be used. good.

Here, another example of the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a schematic view schematically showing the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the fourth embodiment. In another example of the fourth embodiment, with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 150) of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above, the second entry port 1640 and the second entry ball are replaced with the distribution unit 660. The difference is that the electric accessory 1640a attached to the mouth is provided and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center region of the game board to the lower right-handed region, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 181, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present alternative example, the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is provided so that the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter the ball. There is. With this configuration, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed in the game state (probability change state or latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed. Further, like the distribution unit 660 of the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the special figure 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 is executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing the ball alternately to the entry port (second entry port 1640b), the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 1640. The rate of spheres can be random. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage to the player is different between the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2. Therefore, in this alternative example, the ball launched by the right-handed game is the first. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether to enter the ball at the 1st entry port 64 or the 2nd entry opening 1640, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. In addition, the ratio of balls launched in the right-handed game to flow down (roll) toward the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 1640, for example, a nail planted in the game board 13. Since it can be changed by adjusting, the ratio of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation in the special figure variation executed during the right-handed game can be easily adjusted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of times (100) in which the time saving state is set is smaller than the number of times (120 times) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probabilistic state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Further, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 can be executed in the latent state, it is possible to suppress a state in which the player is excessively advantageous in the latent state.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) becomes a win (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result of the hit is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol is completed (the timing when the winning game is completed). At the timing when the special symbol can be changed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the change of the other special symbol, which has been interrupted, is restarted.

Here, when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special symbol fluctuation time is interrupted), the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously executed. In that case, the interrupted special figure variation is restarted, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends, and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. There is a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs between the timing of the operation.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the restarted special symbol variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. When an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs, an additional effect (specific effect) can be executed using the error period. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 196. The present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is different. Specifically, the point that the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 was changed, and the hit (big hit or small hit) was won during latency. The difference is that the effect display that is executed at the time of the operation is added and the other effect display is changed so as to correspond to the above two points.

In the third embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the same number of times as the internally set probability variation number (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Then, the remaining number of probable changes internally set each time the special figure change is executed (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probable change number) and the remaining number of times for the effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability change number). Hereinafter, the configuration is such that (referred to as the number of residual probability changes) is updated (subtracted). In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping whether the jackpot in which the actual residual probability variation number is set again or the small hit in which the actual residual probability variation number is not set is won in the latent probability state. If a hit (big hit or small hit) is won during the certain state, the effect that returns the number of residual probability changes to the initial value (120 times) and the effect that does not return can be executed, and the actual number of residual probability changes and the residual probability change It was configured so that the number of times was different and the player had a sense of expectation until the end. Then, when the number of production residual probability changes is "0" in a state where the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of production residual probability changes are different (for example, the number of production residual probability changes is "0" and the actual number of production residual probability changes is "10". In the case of "), the revival effect (see FIG. 87) is executed, and the number of times ("10 times") corresponding to the actual number of remaining probability changes is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, even when the number of times display displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0", it is possible to make the player expect the latent state to continue.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 enters the latent probability state (the latent probability state is set), the number of times is less than the internally set probability variation number (120 times). (For example, "100 times") is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number different from the effect residual probability variation number (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). In the state, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect of adding the number of residual probability changes of the effect. In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times It is configured to subtract the number of residual probability changes displayed in the display area D1, but for example, when the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is changed in the latent state. May be configured so that the number of residual probability changes is not subtracted. In this case, the number of effect residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) as in the present embodiment is displayed less than the actual number of residual probability changes. As a result, even if the number of production residual probability changes is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, the number of production residual probability changes may be larger than the actual number of residual probability changes. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game in which the actual residual probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special figure and the actual residual probability variation number as the lottery result of the special figure Is not set to the initial value (120 times). When a small hit is won, an additional effect is executed in which the number of remaining probability changes of the effect is added a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured in. As a result, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) when the hit game (the game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent state (during the latent state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not he / she has won the special figure jackpot).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the timing at which the latent probability state is started (the timing at which the latent probability state is set), the actual number of probability changes that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state, and the number of remaining production probability changes. In order to fill the difference between the above and the case, the additional effect of adding the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, the number of residual probability changes can be added at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the actual number of probability changes has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not the special figure jackpot was won).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of additions (the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1) displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, winning game execution timing). The value of (the number of times to be added to) is changed based on the difference between the actual number of probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the effect (see FIG. 182). As a result, when the number of residual probability changes in the production is greatly added by the additional production, it makes the player think that he / she has won the special figure jackpot in which the actual number of probability changes is the initial (120 times) during the latent state. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the number of residual probability changes in the effect from becoming "0" in a state where the actual number of probability changes in the effect and the number of residual probability changes in the effect are largely different.

Further, in the third embodiment described above, a hit game (for example, a ball out of the big hit game) is played during the latent state so that the player does not know that the player has won the hit (big hit or small hit) during the latent state. Even if a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of hits is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute the effect display indicating the hit game, and the actual probability change number is initially set at any timing in the latent state. It was configured to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot set to the value (120 times) was won.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) executed when a hit is won in the latent state (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of balls among the big hit games). As a winning effect executed during the winning game), the display based on the ball winning the variable winning device 65 is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 185). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the hit game is executed during the latent state. Then, as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when the ball enters the variable winning device 65) is paid out, although the details will be described later. The ratio of the display mode for displaying the number of prize balls) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different between the case where the big hit game is executed and the case where the small hit game is executed. .. As a result, even if a big hit with a large number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one hit game is won as compared with the small hit game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It is possible to make it the same as the hitting production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the hit game will be executed in the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult for the player to know (display) whether the hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectations until the end.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the contents of the ROM 2220 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents of the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 182, the actual residual probability variation number set when the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is in the latent probability state and the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. The transition of the number of probability changes will be explained. FIG. 182 is a timing chart showing the flow in the latent state according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 182, when the jackpot game in which the jackpot B or the jackpot D is won is executed when the game state is the normal state, the actual residual probability variation number is "120 times" at the end timing (during the ending) of the jackpot game. Is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays that the state shifts to the latent probability state, and the remaining number display area D1 displays "100 times" as the effect residual probability change number (see FIG. 183).

Then, when the game in the latent probability state is started, the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are subtracted "once" each time the special figure variation is executed. In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of production residual probability changes are subtracted at the timing when the special figure change is started, so that the first special figure change in the latent state is executed. During the period, "99 times" is displayed as the number of remaining probability changes in the effect in the remaining number display area D1.

After that, when the special figure change (lottery) is executed and the small hit is won in the 14th special figure change (the special figure change in which "86th" is displayed as the number of residual probability changes in the production) in the latent state, the actual remaining The small hit game is started while maintaining the probability variation number of "106 times". If the third symbol display device 81 executes the additional effect A (the effect of adding (adding) the value of the remaining probability variation of the effect "5 times") as the effect display during this small hit game, the remaining number of times. The value of the number of residual probability changes displayed in the display area D1 is additionally displayed from the "86th time" to the "91st time" (see FIG. 183 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small hit game) executed when the winning is won (when the small hit is won) when the actual residual probability variation number is not changed (not reset), the value of the effect residual probability variation number is set. By executing the effect of adding (additional effect), it is possible to make the player expect that the actual number of residual probability changes has been reset by the winning game this time.

Then, when the small hit game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual residual probability variation number "105 times" and the effect residual probability variation number "90") is continuously started. Next, if a jackpot is won with a special figure variation in which the actual number of residual probability changes is "30" (a special figure variation in which the number of production residual probability changes is "15"), the timing at which the jackpot game is started. The actual number of residual probability changes is set to "0 times". The number of remaining production probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to "0 times", and the content indicating "15 times" is continuously displayed. When the state shifts to the latent state again after the jackpot game ends, "120 times" is reset as the actual residual probability variation number at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during the big hit game, the additional effect is executed as the effect display of the third symbol display device 81 as in the small hit game, and the additional effect C (the value of the remaining probability variation of the effect is set to "20". When the "time" addition (addition) effect) is executed, the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "15 times" to "35 times".

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of hit (big hit or small hit), the addition is made based on the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number and the acquired effect counter 2230f value. It is configured to determine the number of additions (number of additions) displayed in the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the hit game this time is a small hit game or a big hit game depending on the content of the additional effect executed during the hit game.

Next, when the jackpot game is completed, the special figure variation (substantial residual probability variation number "119") in the latent probability state is started. The additional effect D is executed during this special figure variation, and the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is additionally displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed even during the special figure fluctuation in the latent probability state. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to predict the actual number of residual probability changes, and to play a game while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the additional effect even during the change of the special figure, the value of the remaining number of changes of the effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the hit game and the change of the special figure during the latent state. Can be added (added). Therefore, since the number of times the additional effect is executed can be increased, the player feels uncomfortable even when the values of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are greatly different (when the difference value is large). It is possible to make it easier to converge the value without giving it. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of additions (number of additions) displayed in the addition effect is determined based on the difference value between the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of effect residual probability changes. Since the configuration is such that the larger the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number, the larger the production residual probability variation number is added (added), the value can be increased without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It can be made easier to converge.

Then, the additional effect D is executed, and the additional effect (additional effect B) is executed again at the next fluctuation when the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes "74 times", which is substantially the same. The number of residual probability changes is "118 times" and the number of production residual probability changes is "83 times". After that, when the fluctuation that the number of remaining probability changes of the production becomes "1" without winning is completed, the number of remaining probability changes of the production "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final production display, and the actual number of remaining probability changes is It is displayed continuously until it reaches "0 times". With this configuration, even if the actual number of residual probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the production do not finally match, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the fifth embodiment, a configuration is used in which "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display, but as in the third embodiment described above, the value of the remaining number of effects changes. When is "0 times", the value of the actual residual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (in the example of FIG. 182, it is displayed as "35 times"). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual residual probability variation number when the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "0 times". With this configuration, it is possible for the player to play the latent state with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 regarding the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment becomes the latent state will be described. The same elements as those in the third embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when it is confirmed that the game state shifts to the latent state after the end of the jackpot (when V wins in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state by winning V during the jackpot game). , The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and "100 times" is displayed as the production residual probability variation number (see point A in FIG. 182). Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH rush" that notifies the transition to the latent state and the character 811 that imitates the rabbit used for the display during the latent state shift to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you on doing so. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the game state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot game is completed.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-mentioned display is executed on the jackpot end screen, but when it is confirmed that the game state shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned display is executed. It may be configured as. Further, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game ends depending on the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, instead of the configuration in which a probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends by winning a V during the jackpot game. A configuration in which a probabilistic state is given later may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), the display screen during the hit game (during the small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen during a hit game. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), even when a small hit game or a big hit game is executed during the latent state, the effect that the character 811 moves from the left side to the right side of the screen continues as in the case of the special figure change. Is executed. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining number of effects display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“5 times” in FIG. 183 (b)), and the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is added by “5 times” to display “95 times” (FIG. 182). See point B). Further, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value (“5 times”) of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the additional effect executed in the latent state is executed by using a part of the effect (the effect of moving the character 811) that is always executed in the latent state. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the number of residual probability changes (“5 times”) can be added (added) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see the point D in FIG. 182) is executed during the change of the special figure in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the effect of moving the character 811 from the left side to the right side of the screen is executed during the special figure change. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining number of effects display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“40 times” in FIG. 184 (a)), and the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect is added by “40 times” to display “74 times” (FIG. 182). See point D). Further, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value (“40 times”) of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

As described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 183 (b) and 184 (a), the value of the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and the special figure change in the latent state is set. An additional effect of adding (adding) is executed. Then, since the additional effect executed during the winning game and the additional effect executed during the special figure fluctuation are executed in the same effect mode, whether the additional effect executed is currently in the winning game or not. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the game is changing.

Further, since the display form of the value is different according to the value of the number of residual probability variations of the effect added (added) by the additional effect (the display form of "+5" in FIG. 183 (b) and FIG. 184 (a). ), The effect of the additional effect can be visually notified to the player. It should be noted that an effect display suggesting the value of the effect residual probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect may be executed. For example, the value of the effect residual probability variation number added (added) by the additional effect is stored. The display form of the "treasure box" may be changed according to the added value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184 (b), the final effect executed in the latent state will be described. FIG. 184 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is executed when the value of the actual residual probability variation number is larger than "0 times" and the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is "0 times". Therefore, it is an effect of displaying "???" as the value of the effect residual probability change number until the remaining actual residual probability change number is exhausted. As a result, even if the values of the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are different, the effect in the latent state can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed as an effect suggesting that the latent probability state ends in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to visually suggest to the player the possibility that the latent state will end, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, "pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character suggesting that the latent state is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the display contents during the game per latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 185, when the hit game is executed in the latent state and the ball wins the variable winning device 65, the winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is displayed. To. The winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see 815c in FIG. 185) to the left side through the upper center (see 815b in FIG. 185) and is enlarged. It is stopped and displayed in this state (see 815a in FIG. 185). In the prize display mode 815, a value (“15” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable prize device 65 is displayed, and the variable prize device 65 is displayed for the player. It is configured so that the player can be notified that the ball has won a prize and the number of prize balls paid out by the winning.

Further, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning display is displayed until the one winning game is completed. Aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning display mode 815 is not displayed corresponding to all the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but the type of the winning game (big hit game or small hit game). ) And the winning number information during the winning game, it is determined whether or not to execute the display of the winning display mode 815, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is to be displayed, the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the ease of winning the ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of winning game (when the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened is different). However, since it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game is played according to the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent a person from grasping the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit game).

In the present embodiment, as a prize display mode, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable prize device 65 (“15” in the present embodiment) is displayed. For example, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 may be divided into a plurality of values (for example, "10" and "5") and displayed. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed with respect to the number of times the ball has won the variable winning device 65. In addition, even if the player has a variable winning device in which the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning is different, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out is divided and displayed so that the player can win the game. It is possible to suppress grasping (big hit game or small hit game). Further, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be different depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the case of a winning type (for example, per 15R) in which many winnings can be expected, the winning display mode 815 is the third symbol rather than the winning type (for example, per 7R) in which the winning is less than that. It is preferable to set so that the period until the display is displayed on the display device 81 is long. As a result, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until the determination can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the first winning game ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 2220 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the ROM 2220 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment in that an additional effect table 2220 ca and a winning effect table 2220 cc are added. To do.

First, with reference to FIG. 187 (a), the details of the additional effect table 2220ca in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment. The additional effect table 2220ca is a table that is referred to when determining the type of additional effect executed in the latent probability state, and is acquired as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability variation and the number of production residual probability changes. The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 2230f. This additional effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the residual probability variation number of the effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent probability state, and is a different value for each type of the additional effect. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

In the case where the value of the effect residual probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual residual probability variation number in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 191) in the latent probability state, the additional effect table 2220ca is determined (FIG. 191). It is referred to when Y5103: Yes) and when the hit ending command is received during the latent state (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193).

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the additional effect table 2220ca in the present embodiment is set so that the additional effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is different. Has been done. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and the value of the effect counter 2230f is "0 to 99", the additional effect is executed. However, when the value of the effect counter 2230f is "100 to 179", the additional effect A (addition number + 5) is set as the additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 2230f is "180 to 198", the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

When the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the effect counter 2230f is "0 to 49", the additional effect is not executed and the effect is produced. When the value of the counter 2230f is "50 to 149", the additional effect A (addition number + 5) is set as the additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 2230f is "150 to 198", the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

Further, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the effect counter 2230f is "0 to 99", the additional effect C (addition) is added as an additional effect. The number of times + 20) is set. When the value of the effect counter 2230f is "100 to 198", the additional effect D (addition number + 40 times) is set as the additional effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional effect suitable for the display status of the remaining probability variation number of the effect in the latent state. In addition, the larger the difference between the value of the actual residual probability variation and the value of the effect residual probability variation, the easier it is to execute the additional effect. Therefore, the value of the actual residual probability variation and the value of the effect residual probability variation are large. When there is a divergence (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that a large value of the actual residual probability variation number remains even though the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "0". it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number, the larger the value to be added (added) in one additional effect is set. As a result, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect display in the latent state because a large value of the actual residual probability variation number remains even though the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "0". be able to.

Next, the winning effect table 2220cc will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table 2220 cc. The winning effect table 2220cc is referred to when deciding whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed in the latent state. In the table to be played, the presence or absence of a winning effect is determined based on the winning / failing determination result (win type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 2230f. This winning effect is an effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 185 on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, if the winning / failing judgment results are jackpots A to E and jackpot G (that is, jackpots that can be expected to come out) and the number of winning balls is 1 or 2, regardless of the value of the production counter 2230f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect "Yes" is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the winning game is being executed.

If the number of winning balls is the third prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0-4", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "5 to 198". In the case of "", the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

If the number of winning balls is the fourth prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0 to 119", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "120 to 198". In the case of "", the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

If the number of winning balls is the fifth prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0 to 189", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "5 to 198". In the case of "", the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is 6 or more, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0 to 194", the winning effect "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "195-". In the case of "198", the winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

Next, when the winning / failing judgment result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected to come out), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and further regardless of the value of the effect counter 2230f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 2230f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. Further, even when the winning / failing judgment result is a small hit, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more) and the value of the effect counter 2230f (acquired effect counter), as in the case of the jackpot F described above. When the value of 2230f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player performs the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. It is possible to notify to. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game has occurred during the latent state.

Further, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hit game executed during the latent probability is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual residual probability variation number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the game is completed, or the value of the actual residual probability variation number. In order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the game is a small hit game in which is not changed, a big hit game (big hits A to E, where the ball is more likely to win the variable winning device 65 than the small hit game). In and G), it is set so that the winning effect becomes more difficult to be executed as the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 increases. As a result, even if a large number of balls are actually won in the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls are won than the number of balls won in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the winning game by the number of times of the winning effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent state (cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each game executed while the latent state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration indicated by 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of prize balls may be cumulatively displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of prize balls is displayed according to the number of times the winning effect is executed. It may be configured to add. In this case, the actual cumulative value and the cumulative value on the display will differ by the number of winning balls for which the winning effect has not been executed. Therefore, a means for storing the difference in the cumulative value is provided, for example, small. When the winning game is executed, the winning effect is executed without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and the provisional winning effect for converging the difference in the cumulative values may be executed. As a result, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of prize balls can be displayed without discomfort. Further, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 equal to or greater than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to further prevent the player from identifying the type of winning game depending on the number of times the winning effect is executed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

Returning to FIG. 186 (b), the contents of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 186 (b), the RAM 2230 in the fifth embodiment has a residual probability variation number display display flag 2230ca, an additional effect flag 2230 cc, and an additional effect type storage area 2230 cc with respect to the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment. Has been added.

The remaining probability change number display flag 2230ca is a flag for indicating the period during which the effect residual probability change number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 183 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. When it is set, the number of residual probability changes is displayed. This residual probability variation number display flag 2230ca determines that the hit ending command has been received in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 193) (Y5207: Yes in FIG. 193), and then the hit game ends this time. When it is determined that the game state is to be changed to the latent state later (Y5209: Yes in FIG. 193), and further, it is determined that the residual probability variation number display flag 2230ca is not set to ON (FIG. 193). Y5210: Yes), set to on (Y5213 in FIG. 193), and similarly, in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 193), when determining whether the hit game this time is a hit game in which an additional effect can be executed. (Y5210 in FIG. 193). Then, in the state command process 3 (see FIG. 192), when a state command indicating the transition from the latent state to the normal state is received (Y4531: Yes in FIG. 192), the game state is set to off (FIG. 192). 192 Y4532).

The addition effect flag 2230cc is a flag for indicating that the addition effect based on the special figure variation is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display setting process is set to on. When 2 (see FIG. 195) is executed, an additional effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737 of FIG. 196) executed in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 195) (FIG. 195). 196 Y4813). This additional effect flag 2230 cc is set to on (Y5108 in FIG. 191) when the additional effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 191) (Y5106 in FIG. 191). 2 It is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 196) (Y4809 in FIG. 196), and when it is determined that it is set to on (Y4809 in FIG. 196: Yes), it is set to off (Y4810 in FIG. 196). , Additional production is set.

The additional effect type storage area 2230 cc is an area for setting the additional type selected with reference to the additional effect table 2220ca, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is the special figure 2 variation start processing (FIG. 196). It is configured to be executed in (see). In the additional effect type storage area 2230cc, the type of the additional effect selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 191) is set (Y5107 in FIG. 191), and the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 196) is set. When it is determined that the additional effect flag 2230 kb is set to ON (Y4809: Yes in FIG. 196), the additional effect based on the set type of additional effect is set (Y4812 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is the first winning process (see FIG. 120) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment described above. The first winning process 2 (see FIG. 188) is performed instead of the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 188), and the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 126) is replaced with the second winning process (see FIG. 126) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 124). 189) is executed, and the same processing is executed otherwise. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first winning process 2 (Y2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (Y2113). The first winning process 2 (Y2113 in FIG. 188) is the same as the first winning process (see FIG. 123) in the third embodiment described above, in which the pachinko machine 10 has a variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening) during the jackpot game. The process based on the ball that won the prize in 65a) is executed.

When the first winning process 2 (Y2113) is executed, the same processing as Y2401 to Y2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 123) of the third embodiment described above is executed. Then, when the processing of Y2404 is completed, the winning command is set (Y2431), and then the same processing as that of Y2405 to Y2411 of the first winning processing (see FIG. 123) described above is executed, and this processing is completed. In the first winning process 2 (Y2113), by setting a winning winning command, a ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the big hit game. Information about can be output.

Information regarding the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is given to this winning winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning winning command, the winning winning command processing described later will be performed. (See FIG. 194) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 185) during the winning game.

Next, the second winning process 2 (Y2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (Y2513). The second winning process 2 (Y2513) is the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10 as in the second winning process (see FIG. 126) in the third embodiment described above. Processing based on the winning ball is executed.

When the second winning process (Y2513) is executed, the same processing as Y2701 to Y2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 126) described above is executed. Then, when the processing of Y2704 is completed, the winning command is set (Y2731), and then the same processing as Y2755 to Y2711 of the second winning processing (see FIG. 126) described above is executed, and this processing is completed. In the second winning process 2 (Y2513), by setting the winning winning command, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) was won from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the small hit game. Information about the sphere can be output.

Information regarding the number of balls won during the small hit game is given to this winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, the winning command processing described later (see FIG. 194). ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 185) during the winning game.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 196. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. (Y4111 in FIG. 190), the variation display setting process 2 (Y4112 in FIG. 195) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135), and the other processes are the same.

First, the command determination process 3 (Y4111) will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Y4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 130) in the third embodiment described above.

The command determination process 3 (Y4111) receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the command determination process (FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above (Y4306: Yes in FIG. 190), and the special figure 2 When the variation setting process (Y4351 in FIG. 191) is executed and the state command is received (Y4313: Yes in FIG. 190), the state command process 3 (see FIG. 132) is replaced with the state command process 3 (FIG. 192). (See) is executed, a process for determining that a hit-related command has been received (Y4352 in FIG. 190), and a hit-related command when a hit-related command is received (Y4352: Yes in FIG. 190). The difference is that the process (see FIG. 193) is executed, and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (Y4111) is executed, first, the processes Y4301 to Y4306 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. Then, in the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (Y4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process is executed (Y4351).

Here, the special figure 2 variation setting process (Y4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation setting process (Y4351). In the special figure 2 variation setting process (Y4351), the process of setting the special figure 2 variation start flag 2230e to on (Y5101) and the reception are performed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. A process of extracting the variation pattern command from the command (Y5102) is executed, and a process of determining whether or not to execute the additional effect (see FIG. 184 (a)) (Y5103 to Y5108) is executed.

First, when the special figure 2 variation setting process (Y4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 2230e is set to on (Y5101), and then the variation pattern command is extracted from the received commands (Y5102). The process of Y5101 described above is the same as the process of Y4307 of the command determination process of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130), and the process of Y5102 is the command determination process of the third embodiment described above (FIG. FIG. Since it is the same as the processing of Y4308 (see 130), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the number of residual probability changes set in the residual probability variation number area 2230o (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability variation number) and the residual probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the production residual probability variation number) are It is compared and discriminated (Y5103). In the processing of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual residual probability variation number, that is, the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is less than the actually set number of residual probability changes (the number of residual probability changes updated in the game state update process (see FIG. 105) of the main control device 110), and the additional effect can be executed. If this is done (Y5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 2230h is acquired (Y5104), and then the additional effect table 2220ca is referred to, and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the effect counter 2230h acquired in the process of Y5104 (Y5105).

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is not less than (same or more) than the value of the actual residual probability variation number, that is, the value of the effect residual probability variation number is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that this cannot be done (Y5103: No), this process is set as it is.

When the processing of Y5105 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the additional effect is selected (Y5106). When no additional effect is selected in the processing of Y5106, that is, in the processing of Y5105, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and is acquired. When the value of the effect counter 2230h is "0 to 99", and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "41-80", the acquired effect counter 2230h value. When is "0 to 49" (Y5106: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5106, when it is determined that the additional effect is selected (Y5106: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is set in the additional effect type storage area 2230 cc (Y5107), and the additional effect flag 2230 cc is set. Set it on (Y5108) and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of Y4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Y4306), then it is the same as Y4309 to Y4318 of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) of the third embodiment described above. Executes the processing of. Then, in the processing of Y4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time reduction number command has not been received (Y4317: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (Y4352).

In the processing of Y4352, when it was determined that the hit-related command was not received (Y4352: No), the other commands were responded to in the same manner as in the command determination processing of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 130). Various processes are executed (Y4319), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (Y4352: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (Y4353). This hit-related command process (Y4353) is a process executed when each command related to the hit output from the main controller 110 is output. Specifically, the hit game (big hit game or small hit). The opening command output when the game) is started, the round start command output when a new round game is started in the big hit game, and the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) are executed. Winning command output based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, the ending command output when the ending period starts in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and other commands related to winning. It is executed when it is determined that (V winning command, etc.) is output (received) from the main control device 110.

Here, the hit-related command processing (Y4353) will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (Y4353).

When the hit-related command processing (Y4353) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (Y5201), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (Y5201: Yes), then Set the display opening command (Y5202). On the other hand, in the process of Y5201 when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Y5201: No), it is determined whether the round start command has been received next (Y5203).

If it is determined that the round start command has been received in the process of Y5203 (Y5203), the display round command is set (Y5204), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5203, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (Y5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (Y5205). This winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see Y2113 in FIG. 188) and the second winning process 2 (see Y2513 in FIG. 189) executed in the main control device 110, and is a big hit. This command is output based on the ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the game or the small hit game. The winning command includes information on the number of winning balls and information that can be identified as the type of winning game being executed (big hit type or small hit type).

Here, the winning command processing (Y5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (Y5206).

When the winning command processing (Y5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (Y5301), and then whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state. Is determined (Y5302). When it is determined that the state is not latent (Y5302: No), the winning effect is selected (Y5305), and the process proceeds to Y5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y5302 that it is in the latent state (Y5302: Yes), when selecting the winning effect to be executed in the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state. The value of the effect counter 2230h to be used is acquired (Y5303), and the winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 2230h and the winning effect table 2220cc (Y5304).

After the processing of Y5304 or the processing of Y5305 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning effect is selected (Y5306), and if it is determined that the winning effect is selected (Y5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A winning effect command for display is set (Y5307), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5306 that the winning effect is not selected (Y5306: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the variation display setting process 2 (Y4112) will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112). In the variation display setting process 2 (Y4112), with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above, the process of updating the display content of the number of residual probability variations of the effect and the additional effect flag 2230 cc are turned on. When it is set to, a process for executing an additional effect has been added. The other same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the variable display setting process 2 (Y4112), the same processes as those of Y4701 to Y4704 of the variable display setting process (FIG. 135) of the third embodiment are executed, and when the process of Y4704 is completed, the state setting area 2230i is set. Based on the information being done. It is determined whether the present is in a latent state (Y4731).

In the process of Y4731, if it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (Y4731: No), the process of updating the number of residual probability changes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state (Y4732 to Y4732 to). Y4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to Y4705. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (Y4731: Yes), then the number of remaining production probability changes set in the production probability variation number area 2230p is subtracted by 1 (Y4732) and subtracted. It is determined whether the value of the number of times the effect residual probability changes is greater than 0 (Y4733). In the process of Y4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is larger than 0, that is, "1 time" or more in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 183 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. When the effect residual probability variation number is displayed (Y4733: Yes), the display residual probability variation number command is set based on the value of the effect residual probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y4734).

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4733, if it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (Y4733: No), then the actual residual probability variation number area 2230o is set. It is determined whether the value of the number of residual probability changes is larger than 0 (Y4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect residual probability variation number is 0, but the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not 0 (1 or more).

In the processing of Y4735, when it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (0) (Y4735: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned Y4734 processing, and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is set. Based on this, a display residual probability variation number command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (Y4734). Then, the process proceeds to Y4705.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4735, when it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is larger than 0 (Y4735: Yes), a display residual probability variation number command indicating the effect residual probability variation number "???" is set (Y4735: Yes). Y4736), the process proceeds to Y4705. By doing so, in a situation where the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not 0, when the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes "0 times", Instead of displaying "0 times", "???" can be displayed (see FIG. 184 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent probability state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of residual probability changes in the effect. Further, by setting the number of residual probability changes of the effect to "???", the player can be made to play the game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the processing of Y4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set on (set to off) (Y4701: No), it is determined that the processing of Y4731 is not in the latent state. After the case (Y4731: No) and the processing of Y4734 or Y4736 are completed, the same processing as Y4705 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above is then executed.

If it is determined in the processing of Y4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to ON (Y4705: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is executed (Y4737). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (Y4737) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is not set to on (set to off) (Y4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (Y4737) is skipped. The process proceeds to the process of Y4709, the same processes as those of Y4709 to Y4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 135) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the number of times is less than the internally set probability variation number (120 times) (120 times). For example, "100 times") is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number different from the effect residual probability variation number (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). In the state, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect of adding the number of residual probability changes of the effect. In the fifth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), It is configured to subtract the number of residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1, but for example, the change of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed. In that case, it may be configured so that the number of residual probability changes of the effect is not subtracted. In this case, the number of effect residual probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) as in the present embodiment is displayed less than the actual number of residual probability changes. As a result, even if the number of production residual probability changes is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, the number of production residual probability changes may be larger than the actual number of residual probability changes. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game in which the actual residual probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special figure and the actual residual probability variation number as the lottery result of the special figure Is not set to the initial value (120 times). When a small hit is won, an additional effect is executed in which the number of remaining probability changes of the effect is added a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured in. As a result, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) when the hit game (the game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent state (during the latent state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not he / she has won the special figure jackpot).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the timing at which the latent probability state is started (the timing at which the latent probability state is set), the actual number of probability changes that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state, and the number of remaining production probability changes. In order to fill the difference between the above and the case, the additional effect of adding the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, the number of residual probability changes can be added at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the actual number of probability changes has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state). It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping (whether or not the special figure jackpot was won).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of additions (the number of remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1) displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, winning game execution timing). The value of (the number of times to be added to) is changed based on the difference between the actual number of probability changes and the number of residual probability changes in the effect (see FIG. 182). As a result, when the number of residual probability changes in the production is greatly added by the additional production, it makes the player think that he / she has won the special figure jackpot in which the actual number of probability changes is the initial (120 times) during the latent state. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the number of residual probability changes in the effect from becoming "0" in a state where the actual number of probability changes in the effect and the number of residual probability changes in the effect are largely different.

In the fifth embodiment, during a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) executed when a hit is won in a latent state (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of balls among the big hit games). As a winning effect to be executed, the display based on the ball winning the variable winning device 65 is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 185). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the hit game is executed during the latent state. Then, as a winning effect executed during the winning game, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The display mode) is configured to be different between the case where the big hit game is executed and the case where the small hit game is executed. As a result, even if a big hit with a large number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one hit game is won as compared with the small hit game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It is possible to make it the same as the hitting production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the hit game will be executed in the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner, it is difficult for the player to know (display) whether the hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectations until the end.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 217. In the third embodiment described above, when a big hit occurs during the latent probability state and 120 new latent probability states are set (the value of the probability variation counter 2030k is overwritten by 120), the latent probability on the display is displayed. The remaining number of states was configured to continue to display the number of times before the jackpot. Then, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times in the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times in the actual latent state, and the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is calculated. It was configured to execute a revival effect that was added and displayed. That is, the timing at which the remaining number of times on the display is additionally displayed is limited to the timing at which the remaining number of times becomes 0.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times in the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a plurality of opportunities for displaying in addition to the remaining number of times on the display are provided. And said. More specifically, in a state where there is a difference, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect at the start of the fluctuation, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times on the display may be added. It is configured to execute an additional effect that suggests that there is. In this addition effect, the number of times the addition is displayed is changed according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the additional production is improved. Hereinafter, the additional effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 will be referred to as a pressing additional effect.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the remaining number of times on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more), the guideline of the remaining number of times is not displayed (hidden). ) It is configured to set the non-display mode. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so that it is possible to provide a tense playability in the latent state. Further, when the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is within a predetermined number of times (5 times), the second special symbol becomes a big hit ( That is, when the remaining number of times of the latent state is updated to 120 just before the end of the latent state), a special additional effect (special additional effect) different from the normal additional effect is executed. It is supposed to be. As a result, the player who has confirmed the special addition effect can win the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give greater joy to.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the additional effect, an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 is provided. Specifically, there is provided a hold notice effect that changes the mode of the hold symbol according to the operation content of the frame button 22 in the normal state or the probability change state. In this hold notice effect, the range of the hold symbol for executing the notice effect is determined based on the operation of the player's frame button 22 (selection of the player), and based on the pre-reading result for the hold ball in the range selected by the player. Therefore, the notice effect using the reserved symbol is executed. As a result, when a highly expected effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased. In addition, even if a low-expected effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, if a reserved ball different from the selected range is selected, a high-expectation notice effect may have been executed. You can make the player think that you don't know. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol outside the selected range.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in that the configurations of the RAM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. The third is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 197 to 202, display modes of various characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. 197 and 198 are views showing a display mode when the hold notice effect is executed in the sixth embodiment, and FIGS. 199 and 200 show the press-added effect in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of execution, and FIG. 201 and FIG. 202 are the figure which showed the display mode at the time of setting the non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden in a latent state. ..

FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the hold notice effect in the present embodiment is started. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the hold notice effect is started, the display area Ds1a in which the characters "Determine who to feed with PUSH" is displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. With this character, the player can be urged to press the frame button 22. Further, on the lower side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4, trays Ds1b on which a number of bone-in meats smaller than the number of reserved symbols are placed are displayed. In the example of FIG. 197 (a), the case where the number of reserved balls is four and the number of bone-in meat is three is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a mode of reciprocating in the left-right direction.

Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 according to the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing of pressing the frame button 22. FIG. 197 (b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the mode of the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped trays Ds1b is changed to a mode in which the tray Ds1b is happy with a smile. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose mode has been changed are subject to the current pending notice.

If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time (for example, 2 seconds) of the display area Ds1a elapses. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the effect of eating the bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed by the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped downward). After each reserved symbol has eaten the bone-in meat, a production in which a part or all of the reserved symbols that ate the bone-in meat lay eggs is executed. FIG. 197 (c) illustrates an embodiment in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. The reserved symbol that laid the egg is displayed to suggest to the player that it is a reserved symbol based on the reserved ball with high expectation. More specifically, when the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol in the selection range includes the reserved ball in which reach occurs, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball has completely eaten the bone-in meat. The production of laying eggs will be performed later. If the selected range does not include the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in which the reach occurs, the egg laying effect is not executed. As a result, the player can be made aware that the reach effect will occur before the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball is executed, so that the player can enjoy the reach effect. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the hold notice effect is configured so that the execution is more easily determined when there is a hold ball on which the reach effect occurs. Therefore, if the effect of laying eggs is not executed after the effect of eating bone-in meat, a reach effect is generated for the reserved symbols outside the range of the reserved symbols selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. It is more likely that the reserved symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed by the reserved symbol within the range selected by the player, a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, and the egg is laid. When the production effect is not executed, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

After executing the effect of the reserved symbol laying an egg, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), an image prompting the repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a. From this image, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is developed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can continuously press the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the hold notice production.

When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the specified number of repeated hits set when the effect is generated, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. The effect of moving the egg is executed. Eggs are moved in order from the oldest reserved symbol. FIG. 198 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed at the upper part of the reserved symbol Dh2 moves to the inside of the house Ds1c. The move to the house Ds1c suggests that it may develop into a super reach in the variable display based on the reserved ball. Super reach is easy to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and it is difficult to be selected when the lottery result is a big hit, so the expectation that it will be a big hit is high. Therefore, the player can be made to hit the frame button 22 more seriously. It is uncertain whether or not super reach will occur just by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. 198 (c), the egg Dh2a is cracked and the word "super reach confirmed" is displayed from the inside. When it occurs, the super reach is confirmed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the range of the hold symbols that generate the notice is determined by the player's selection. As a result, depending on the content of the hold notice effect, the hold ball within the range selected by the player can be expected, or the hold ball outside the player's selection range can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel hold notice effect.

In the sixth embodiment, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect of determining the super reach if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it may be configured to notify all the egg symbols at once whether or not it develops into super reach with one repeated hit by the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production easier to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the pressing addition effect executed during the latent state will be described. This pressing addition effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility that the remaining number of latent states on the display may be added by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. The pressing addition effect is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times the player is added is relatively small (or 0 times) when the player operates the frame button 22, and a special mode in which the number of times the player is added is relatively large. Has been done. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. It is an aspect that is easy to be selected in some cases. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode in which it is easy to select when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is less than 30.

First, a normal aspect will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200 (a). FIG. 199 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the pressing addition effect in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the pressing addition effect is started, the button D2 with the characters "push" is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and the "addition chance" is displayed above the button D2. Is displayed. Further, below the button D2, a horizontally long rectangular display area D3 is displayed, and below the display area D3, a display area D4 in which the characters "Press the button at the right timing !!" are displayed. Is displayed. The display area D3 has small areas D3b and D3f with the characters "?", Small areas D3c and D3e with the characters "chance!", And the characters "super hot !!!". It is composed of a small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a that scrolls on each small area from the left side to the right side in the front view. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the number of probability changes on the display may increase by operating the frame button 22 at the right time. The number of additions is the largest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button is added at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. It becomes the least when 22 is pressed.

FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d with the characters "super hot !!!" The additional number display area D5 on which the character "+5" is displayed is displayed, and the character "GET" is displayed above the additional number display area D5. Further, 5 times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. Further, the characters "Add 5 times GET !!" are displayed on the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand the remaining number of times on the display added in the present pressing addition effect. The correspondence between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the remaining number of times on the display to be added is defined in ROM 2220 of the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 200A shows the display content when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3f with the character “?” With a low expectation to be added. It is a figure which showed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 200A, the button D2 is split in two and the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters "addition failure ..." are displayed on the display area D4. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Therefore, when the additional pressing effect is executed next time, it is possible to make the player think that the frame button 22 is to be pressed at a better timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200 (b), a special mode of pressing addition effect will be described. When the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen of the main display area Dm, and a "super addition chance" is displayed above the button D2. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal aspect has been started.

Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) additionally displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. At the same time, the characters "Determine the number of additions by your own power !!" are displayed on the display area D4. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which he / she operates the frame button 22 affects the number of additions (so-called not a finished race). Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be pressed more positively by the player, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Next, the non-display mode in the latent state will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of latent states on the display reaches 0, and the player makes it unclear when the latent state ends. It is a production to give a feeling of tension to.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes 0, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground as in the third embodiment. Is set to. Further, in the present embodiment, the characters "End ...?" Are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. That is, the display content is set so that it is not yet known whether or not the latent state is terminated.

Then, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is not 0, the mode shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 201 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), the effect of the rock 813 approaching from behind the character 811 imitating a rabbit is executed, and at the same time, "pinch! A display area appears in which multiple characters "!" Are displayed. Further, inside the remaining number display area D1, the characters "???" are displayed instead of the guideline of the number of remaining latent states. From these displays, it is possible to recognize that the latent state has not ended yet, but it is not known when it will end. Therefore, from the anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near, it is possible to face the game with a sense of tension.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing the display contents when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 in the non-display mode and the latent state ends. As shown in FIG. 202A, when the latent probability state ends in the state where the non-display mode is set (when the value of the probability variation counter 2030k becomes 0), the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813. Will be. The characters "End !!" are displayed in the display area 812 above the crushed character 811. These displays allow the player to clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

Further, FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch de-appearance) when the display mode is set and a jackpot is obtained when the remaining number of latent states is 5 times or less. .. When the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached just before the end of the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically set 120 times after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. In this case, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), the effect that the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind is executed. In addition, the characters "Pinch escape !!" are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to "100 times remaining". This pinch escape appearance is performed only when a big hit is made just before the end of the latent probability state (within 5 remaining latent states), so the player who confirms this pinch escape appearance is latently confirmed. It becomes a big hit just before the end of the state, and it is possible to recognize that a new latent state has been given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player happy that the big hit has been made at the right time, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. First, FIG. 203A is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 2220 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment, the ROM 2220 in the sixth embodiment includes an additional effect selection table 2220 da, a pressing period table 2220 db, and a hold notice determination table 2220 dc. And are provided.

The additional effect selection table 2220da is a data table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the pressed additional effect in the latent state, and the mode (either normal mode or special mode) of the pressed additional effect to be executed. is there. Details of the additional effect selection table 2220da will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205.

FIG. 204A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 2220da. As shown in FIG. 204 (a), in the additional effect selection table 2220da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the degree of participation of the player in the pressed additional effect is normal (the game is played with the additional effect within the past 5 times). Participation degree normal table 2220da1 referred to when a person is operating the frame button 22 and a lottery result of a special symbol are small hits, and the degree of participation in the player's pressing addition effect is low (past 5). The low-participation table 2220da2, which is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the additional production more than once, and the jackpot table 2220da3, which is referred to when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. And are provided.

First, the details of the participation degree normal table 2220da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 204 (b). FIG. 204 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the participation degree normal table 2220da1. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the participation degree normal table 2220da1, the value of the effect counter 2230h is set for each difference between the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. The range and the type (mode) of the pressing addition effect are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 204 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times in the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h. Is defined in association with "no additional effect" for the range of "0 to 95". On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is "96 to 99", the "normal mode" is defined in association with it. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. In addition, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). In addition, it is the remaining number of times on the display and the actual number that the special mode is not selected when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times. This is to prevent the additional display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times of.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is "additional effect" to the range of "0 to 90". "None" is specified in association with each other. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is "91-97", the "normal mode" is defined in association with each other, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is "98,99", the "special mode" is defined. It is specified in association with each other. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. Further, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

In this way, if the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the additional pressing effect increases, so it is possible to prevent the difference from becoming too large. can do.

Next, the details of the low participation table 2220da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (a). FIG. 205A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the low participation table 2220da2. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of times in the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h. Is defined in association with "no additional effect" for the range of "0 to 90". On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 2230h is "91 to 99", the "normal mode" is defined in association with it. For this reason, when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the additional effect is pressed. Is not executed. In addition, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation of the player in the pressing addition effect is low, the frequency of the pressing addition effect is increased (4% → 9%). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is "additional effect" with respect to the range of "0 to 80". "None" is specified in association with each other. On the other hand, a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 2230h is "81 to 94", and a "special mode" is defined in the range in which the value of the effect counter 2230h is "95 to 99". It is specified in association with each other. For this reason, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100). Is not executed. Further, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the frequency of the pressing addition effect is increased (9% → 19%). .. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

Next, the jackpot table 2220da3 will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). As described above, the jackpot table 2220da3 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times in the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 2230h. Is defined in association with the "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 99". That is, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is always executed.

Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 2230h is "normal mode" with respect to the range of "0 to 49". , And the value of the effect counter 2230h is defined in the range of “50 to 99” in association with the “special mode”. That is, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. In this way, in the latent state, when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and a big hit is made, the pressing addition effect is always executed. With this configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit when a push-up effect occurs. In particular, in the addition effect of the special aspect, the selection rate is significantly increased as compared with the participation degree normal table 2220da1 and the participation degree low participation table 2220da2. Therefore, it is possible to expect a stronger jackpot when a special mode of pressing addition effect occurs. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the mode of the pressing addition effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained, the pressing addition effect is always set. There was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the ratio of the pressing addition effect being set may be lowered, and the pressing addition effect may be set at a rate of 80%. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily cause a difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times, so that the pressing addition effect can be executed more effectively.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description will be continued. The pressing period table 2220db is a data table that defines the number of additional display times according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution of the pressing additional effect. The details of the pressing period table 2220db will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 (c) and 206.

First, FIG. 205 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 2220db. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), the pressing period table 2220db is referred to when the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is set and the normal table 2220db1 which is referred to when the pressing addition effect of the special mode is set. A special table 2220db2 to be used is included. When the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined, the table corresponding to the determined pressing addition effect is read out and stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da of the RAM 2230, which will be described later. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the table stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da is referred to, and the number of additions is determined.

First, the details of the normal table 2220db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 2220db1. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the normal table 2220db1 defines the number of times (additional value) to be added to the remaining number of times display area D1 in association with the elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. ing. The elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing period timer 2230db of the RAM 2230.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), "0" is associated as an additional value in the range of the elapsed time of 0 to 699 milliseconds. During this period (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b with the character "?" In the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. It becomes an aspect. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds, "3" is associated as an additional value. During this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c with the characters "chance!" This is the mode to be used. Further, in the range of the elapsed time in the range of 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds, "5" is associated as an additional value. During this period (range from 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the pressing addition effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a is a small area D3d with the characters "super hot !!!". It is a mode to move on.

Similarly, the elapsed time in the range of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with "2" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. (A period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) is associated with "0" as an additional value.

As described above, the normal table 2220db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the added value according to the effect mode (timekeeping change of the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the pressing additional effect of the normal mode. As a result, the number of times corresponding to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) at the time when the player presses the frame button 22 can be additionally displayed.

Next, the details of the special table 2220db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (b). FIG. 206B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special table 2220db2.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the elapsed time in the range of 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b) is associated with "5" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is 800. The range of ~ 999 ms (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with "10" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1000-1099 ms (the scroll bar D3a is the small area D3d). "20" is associated with the additional value (the period overlapping with), and "10" is associated with the additional value in the range of the elapsed time of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). In the range of 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), "5" is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 2000 to 2049 milliseconds. (The period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) is associated with "30" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 205 to 2500 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h). , "5" is associated as an additional value.

With this special table 2220db2, the number of additions displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing can be accurately added and displayed on the remaining number display area D1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 203 (a). The hold notice determination table 2220dc is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect. As described above, the hold notice effect may be executed when the number of hold balls of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the probability change state of the game state, and the lottery result with high expectation among the hold balls Is a rendition performed to suggest that is present. The details of the hold notice determination table 2220dc will be described with reference to FIG. 207.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold notice determination table 2220dc. As shown in FIG. 207, the hold notice determination table 2220dc includes a table for when there is a reach that is referred to when there is a hold ball in which a reach effect is generated in the hold ball, and a reach effect is generated in the hold ball. It consists of a non-reach table that is referred to when there is no reserved ball to play. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 2230h, which determines the execution of the hold advance notice effect, for each number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 207, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not specified in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 in the reach table. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the reserved advance notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0 to 9" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 2230h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is set. "0 to 15" are associated with each other. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to execute the reserved advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to positively fire the ball to the player in an attempt to accumulate more reserved balls, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 207, the value of the effect counter 2230h is not specified in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 even in the non-reach table. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0" is associated with the value of the teeth and the effect counter 2230h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 2230h is "0,1". "Is associated with it. That is, the table for when there is no reach has a smaller random number value (counter value) for determining the execution of the hold notice effect than the table for when there is reach. Therefore, if there is a hold ball in which the hold notice effect is performed, the hold notice effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, when the hold notice effect is started, the reach effect is developed for the player. You can strongly expect that.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2230. The RAM 2230 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 2230 in the third embodiment in that a pressing period storage area 2230da, a pressing period timer 2230db, and a continuous hit counter 2230dc are added.

The pressing period storage area 2230da is a storage area for storing the pressing period corresponding to the determined type of pressing addition effect when the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined. That is, when the start of the pressing addition effect is determined, the table (normal table 2220db1 or special table 2220db2) read from the pressing period table 2220db is stored (see Y4392 in FIG. 213). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the addition value is determined based on the table stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da and the timer value of the pressing period timer 2230db described later. , The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is updated.

The pressing period timer 2230db is a timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 2230db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da, the additional value in the pressing addition effect is determined.

The continuous hit counter 2230dc sets a predetermined upper limit value for each effect when an effect (see FIG. 198 (a)) for urging the frame button 22 to be repeatedly pressed occurs in the hold notice effect, and the player is set during the effect. Is a counter in which the value is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see Y5703 in FIG. 210). When the value of the continuous hit counter 2230dc becomes 0 during the execution of the effect of prompting the repeated hits of the frame button 22, the effect develops to the next stage (the egg pattern moves to the inside of the house Ds1c).

The pressed flag 2230dd is a flag indicating whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the pressing addition effect of 1. If the pressed flag 2230dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the pressing addition effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is performed. It means that it has not been detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect, the pressed flag 2230dd is referred to, and the pressing period stored in the pressing period storage area 2230da only when the state is off. The additional value corresponding to is read out and displayed as an additional value with respect to the remaining number display area D1 (see Y5605 in FIG. 209). That is, even if the player performs the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 a plurality of times in the addition effect of 1, only the addition for the first operation (pressing) is executed. Further, when the pressing addition effect is completed with the pressed flag 2230dd turned off, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 2230df described later. That is, the number of times that the player does not participate in the pressing addition effect (pressing the frame button 22) is counted by the participation degree counter 2230df. In the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the pressing addition effect is changed according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df.

The hold notice effect flag 2230de is a flag indicating whether or not the hold notice effect (see FIGS. 197 and 198) is being executed. If it is on, the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is off, the hold notice effect is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. The hold notice flag 2230de is set to on when the execution of the hold notice effect is determined (see Y5808 in FIG. 214), and is set to off at the end of the hold notice effect (see Y5835 in FIG. 217). While the hold notice flag 2230de is on, it is avoided that a new hold notice effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by the duplicate execution of the hold notice.

The participation degree counter 2230df is a counter indicating the degree of participation of the player in the pressing addition effect. When the pressing addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22, the participation degree counter 2230df is incremented by 1 (see Y5509 in FIG. 208), and the frame button 22 is pressed during the pressing addition effect. When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see Y5609 in FIG. 209). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 2230df counts the number of consecutive times in which the player did not press the frame button 22 (does not participate) in the pressing addition effect. In the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the pressing addition effect is changed according to the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 2230df is larger than 5 (unless the player participates in the pressing addition effect 6 times or more in a row), the determination ratio of the pressing addition effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to further operate (press) the frame button 22, and thus it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the additional pressing effect.

The non-display setting flag 2230 deg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set as the display mode in the latent state. When the non-display setting flag 2230 deg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 2230 deg is set to on when the non-display mode is set (see Y5896 in FIG. 216), and when an additional effect (pressing additional effect, special additional effect) is set (see FIG. 213). Y4395 (see Y5860 in FIG. 215) is set to off when the latent state ends during the non-display mode (see Y5858 in FIG. 215).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 217. First, with reference to FIG. 208, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Y4107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Y4107).

When this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 208) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. (Y5501: Yes), and then determines whether or not the pressing addition effect is being executed (Y5502).

If it is determined in the processing of Y5502 that the pressing addition effect is being executed (Y5502: Yes), the addition value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 is added to the remaining number display area D1 in the pressing addition effect. The pressing process is executed during the addition effect (Y5503) to cause the addition, and this process is terminated. The details of the pressing process (Y5503) during the additional effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 209.

On the other hand, in the process of Y5502, when it is determined that the pressing addition effect is not being executed (Y5502: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed (Y5504). If it is determined in the process of Y5504 that the hold notice effect is in progress (Y5504: Yes), the hold advance notice pressing process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect is executed (Y5504: Yes). Y5505), this process is terminated. The details of the holding advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. 210. If it is determined in the processing of Y5504 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (Y5504: No), other processing according to the pressing timing is executed (Y5506), and this processing is terminated. The other pressing timing is, for example, a timing at which the rear image can be changed. In the sixth embodiment, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the variable stop state. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of Y5501 (Y5501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the pressing addition effect (Y5507), and the pressing is performed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the additional effect (Y5507: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508). Then, when it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5508: No), the pressing addition effect is completed without the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the pressing addition effect (player). Since it means that he / she has not participated in the pressing addition effect this time, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 2230df to update (Y5509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5507, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressing addition effect (Y5507: No), or in the processing of Y5508, when it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5508: Yes), Y5509. This process ends as it is without executing the process of.

By executing these processes Y5507 to Y5509, the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect can be accumulated over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the pressing addition effect according to the degree of participation of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the details of the pressing process (Y5503) during the addition effect will be described. As described above, the pressing process (Y5503) during the additional effect is a process for displaying the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 on the remaining number display area D1.

When the pressing process (Y5503) during the addition effect is started, it is first determined whether or not the pressed flag 2230dd is on (Y5601), and if it is determined to be on (Y5601: Yes), it has already been determined. Since the additional value has already been displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the pressing addition effect and it is not necessary to execute a new addition, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5601, when it is determined that the pressed flag 2230dd is off (Y5601: Yes), then the pressing period set in the pressing period storage area is read (Y5602), and the read pressing is performed. Of the periods, the additional value corresponding to the value of the press period timer 2230db is read out (Y5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read additional value is 0 (Y5604), and if it is not 0 (Y5604: No), an effect of adding and displaying the read additional value on the remaining number of times display area D1 is set (Y5605).

After the processing of Y5605, the additional value read in the processing of Y5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p and updated (Y5606), and the processing shifts to Y5608. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5604, when it is determined that the read additional value is 0 (Y5604: Yes), an additional failure effect (see FIG. 200 (a)) for notifying that the addition has failed is set (Y5607). ), The process shifts to Y5608.

In the processing of Y5608 executed after the processing of Y5606 or Y5607 is completed, the pressed flag 2230dd is set to on (Y5608), the value of the participation counter 2230df is reset to 0 (Y5609), and this processing is performed. To finish. By executing this pressing process during the additional effect (see FIG. 209), when the additional effect of pressing occurs, the additional value of the number of times corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. It can be displayed in addition to the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide a natural effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the details of the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) will be described. As described above, the hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505) is a process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect. In this hold advance notice pressing process (Y5505), first, it is determined whether or not it is the press period (see FIG. 197 (a)) in the hold notice effect (Y5701), and if it is not the press period (Y5701: No), then It is determined whether or not the continuous striking period (see FIG. 198 (a)) is reached (Y5702).

If it is determined in the processing of Y5702 that it is not the continuous hitting period (Y5702: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5702, if it is determined that the continuous hitting period is in progress (Y5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting counter 2230dc is decremented by 1 to update (Y5703), and whether the updated counter value is 0. Is determined (Y5704). Then, when it is determined that the updated counter value becomes 0 (Y5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) in which the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c is set (Y5705), and the book is set. End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5704, if it is determined that the value of the updated continuous hit counter 2230dc is 1 or more (Y5704: No), the processing of Y5705 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of Y5701 that the current period is the pressing period (Y5701), first, the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is specified in the third symbol display device 81 (tray Ds1b is displayed directly below). The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes the winning information that causes the reach effect (Y5707). The reach effect refers to any one of the out-of-order normal reach, the out-of-order super reach A and B, the hit normal reach, and the hit super reach A to C.

In the processing of Y5707, if it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the specified range (Y5707: Yes), then, for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that causes the reach. The effect of displaying the egg symbol (the reserved symbol lays an egg) is set (Y5708). Then, a continuous striking period for executing the continuous striking effect for prompting the continuous striking of the frame button 22 is set (Y5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous striking counter 2230dc is set (Y5710), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Y5707 that the winning information that causes the reach effect is not included in the specified range (Y5707: No), the hold notice flag 2230de is set to indicate the end of the hold notice effect. Set it to off (Y5711) to end this process.

By executing this hold advance notice pressing process (see FIG. 210), when the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the hold notice effect, an appropriate effect mode can be set according to the press timing. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be selectable by the operation of the player. As a result, if no notice (display of the egg symbol) is given to the reserved symbol within the selected range, it is determined that there is a reserved symbol with high expectation among the reserved symbols outside the player's selected range. You can expect it. Therefore, even if the hold notice effect does not occur, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the hold ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the command determination process 4 executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 130) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the command determination processes 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, the Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y4311, Y4313 to Y4315, and Y4319 processes are the command determination processes in the third embodiment (see FIG. 130). ), The same processes as those of Y4301 to Y4306, Y4309 to Y4311 to Y4315, and Y4319 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received in the process of Y4306 (Y4303: Yes), the variation of the second special symbol starts. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 for setting the above is executed (Y4361), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (Y4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212. Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning command has been received in the processing of Y4311 (Y4311: Yes), it is based on the winning information notified by the winning command. The hold notice setting process for determining the execution of the hold notice is executed (Y4362), and this process is terminated. Details of this hold notice setting process (Y4362) will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

Further, in the processing of Y4315, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (Y4315: No), it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (Y4363). ), If the residual probability variation number command is received (Y4363), the residual probability variation number command process for executing the process according to the number of times notified by the residual probability variation number command is executed (Y4364), and this process is executed. finish. The details of this residual probability variation number command processing (Y4364) will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

Further, in the processing of Y4363, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (Y4363: No), then whether or not at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command and the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received. If at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (Y4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command is received. The confirmation command process for setting is executed (Y4364), and this process is terminated. The details of this confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (Y4361) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4. When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 2230e is set to on (Y4371), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received is notified. The fluctuation pattern is extracted (Y4372).

When the processing of Y4372 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state (Y4373), and if it is in the latent state (Y4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not to set the pressing addition effect. The additional effect setting process (Y4374) for performing the above is executed (Y4374), and the process shifts to Y4376. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y4373 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (Y4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the process of Y4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. , The process shifts to Y4376. In the process of Y4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern selected variation pattern is set (Y4376), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the details of the additional effect setting process (Y4374) will be described. As described above, this pressing addition effect setting process (Y4374) is a process for determining the execution of the pressing addition effect in the latent state.

When the additional effect setting process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol this time is the lottery result of the small hit stop type (Y4381), and it is not the small hit stop type. (Y4381: No), then, the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received is during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)), and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less. (Y4382). In the process of Y4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the remaining number of probability changes is 6 or more (Y4382: No), the process shifts to Y4391.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4382, when the non-display mode is set and it is determined that the remaining number of probability variations is 5 or less (Y4382: Yes), then the lottery of the second special symbol this time is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether the lottery result is the stop type of G (Y4383), and if it is determined that it is neither of the jackpots E to G (Y4383: No), the process shifts to Y4391. On the other hand, in the processing of Y4383, when it is determined that it is any of the jackpots E to G (Y4383: Yes), the jackpot is used from the additional effect selection table 2220da as a table for determining the setting of the pressing additional effect. Read table 2220da3 (Y4384). Next, the difference between the latent probability number 120 given after the big hit and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is calculated (Y4385), and the process shifts to Y4391.

Further, in the processing of Y4381 when it is determined that the stop type this time is a small hit (Y4381: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the participation degree counter 2230df is larger than 5 (Y4386). If the value of the participation degree counter 2230df is larger than 5 (Y4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 2220da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 2220da as a table for determining the setting of the pressing addition effect (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed in Y4391. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation degree counter 2230df is less than 5 (Y4386: No), the participation degree low table 2220da2 is read from the additional effect selection table 2220da (Y4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is calculated, and the process is performed in Y4391. Move to.

In the processing of Y4391 executed after any of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 is completed, the difference calculated by any of the processings of Y4385, Y4388, and Y4391 and the processing of Y4384, Y4387, and Y4388 are used. Based on the read table, the mode of the pressing additional effect (any of no additional effect, normal mode, and special mode) is specified (Y4391), and the process shifts to Y4392.

In the processing of Y4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing addition effect is decided (Y4392), and if the execution of the pressing addition effect is decided (Y4392: Yes), the mode of the pressing addition effect determined this time is set. The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 2220db (see FIGS. 206A and 206) and set in the pressing period storage area 2230da (Y4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when the player's operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the pressing addition effect determined to be executed this time, and the addition corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing is performed. The value is additionally displayed with respect to the remaining number display area D1. As a result, the player can positively operate (press) the frame button 22 in the hope that the number of remaining latent states on the display will be added. You can improve your willingness to participate. After the processing of Y4393, the non-display setting flag 2230dg is set to off (Y4394), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y4392 that the execution of the pressing addition effect is not determined (Y4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 2220a. (Y4395), this process is terminated. By executing this additional effect setting process, it is possible to select an appropriate form of the additional effect of pressing according to the player's participation status in the past pressing additional effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

In the present embodiment, in the latent state, the pressing addition effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit EG, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it may be configured so that the pressing addition effect can be set. As a result, the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

Next, the details of the hold notice setting process (Y4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 214. As described above, the hold notice setting process (Y4362) is a process for determining the execution of the hold notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When this hold notice setting process (Y4362) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the latent state (Y5801), and if it is determined that the game state is in the latent state (Y5801), it is held. Each process of Y5802 to Y5809 for setting the advance notice effect is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is. It should be noted that the reason why the hold notice effect is not executed in the latent state is that the main fluctuation in the latent state is the variation display of the two special symbols that cannot be stored in hold. Therefore, in the latent state, the holding ball of the first special symbol is almost always 0, and it is not necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to execute the holding notice. Therefore, by skipping the execution determination itself of the hold notice, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the latent state.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5801, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (normal state or probable change state) (Y5801: No), then whether the pending notice flag 2230de is on. If it is determined whether or not (whether or not the hold notice effect is already being executed) (Y5802), and if it is determined that the hold notice flag 2230de is on (the hold notice effect is already being executed) (Y5802). : Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending notice flag 2230de is off in the processing of Y5802 (Y5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 2230b (Y5803). It is determined whether or not the read prize information includes the prize information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs (Y5804).

When it is determined in the processing of Y5804 that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is included (Y5804: Yes), it is used as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect when there is reach. The table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220 dc (see FIG. 207), the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process shifts to Y5807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5804 that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (Y5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect. The time table is read from the hold notice determination table 2220 dc, the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process shifts to Y5807.

In the process of Y5807 executed after the process of Y5805 or Y5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold notice effect is decided in the process of Y5805 or Y5806 (Y5807), and it is determined that the execution of the hold notice effect is decided. If this is the case (Y5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 2230de is set to on (Y5808). Next, an effect for prompting the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 197 (a)) is set (Y5809), and this process ends.

By executing this hold notice setting process, it is possible to set the hold notice effect at an appropriate ratio according to the number of hold balls and the content of each hold ball.

Next, the details of the residual probability variation number command processing (Y4364) will be described with reference to FIG. 215. As described above, this residual probability variation number command process (Y4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the residual probability variation number command. When this residual probability variation number command processing (Y4364) is started, first, the residual probability variation number notified by the residual probability variation number command is stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o (Y5851), and then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a state (Y5852).

If it is determined in the processing of Y5852 that the gaming state is not the latent state (Y5852: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5852, when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 2230 deg is on (whether or not the non-display mode is set). (Y5853), and if the non-display setting flag 2230 deg is off (Y5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (Y5861). ), End this process. Details of this non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5853, when it is determined that the non-display setting flag 2230 deg is on (Y5854), it means that the non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set. It is determined whether or not the number of residual probability changes stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o in the process is 5 or less (Y5854). If it is determined in the process of Y5854 that the number of residual probability changes is 6 or more (Y5854: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes is 5 or less (Y5854: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is any of the jackpots E to G (Y5855), and the jackpot E to If it is determined that neither of G is present (Y5855: No), then whether or not the number of residual probability changes is 0 (whether or not the number of times stored in the residual probability variation area 2230o is 0) is determined. Determine (Y5856).

If it is determined in the process of Y5856 that the number of residual probability changes is not 0 (Y5856: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5856, when it is determined that the number of residual probability changes is 0 (Y5856: Yes), it means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended. (See FIG. 202 (a)) is set, the non-display setting flag 2230 deg is set to off (Y5858), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Y5855, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is any of the jackpots EG (Y5855: Yes), the latent state of 120 times is set after the jackpot, so first , Set the execution of the special additional effect (see FIG. 202 (b)) (Y5859), then overwrite 100 times for the effect probability variation frequency area 2230p, and set the non-display setting flag 2230dg to off ( Y5860), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the non-display mode is set, the second is in a state where the remaining number of times of the actual latent state (value of the probability variation counter 2030k) is within a predetermined number of times (5 times). When it becomes a big hit of a special symbol (that is, when the remaining number of times of the latent state is updated to 120 just before the end of the latent state), a special addition of a mode different from the normal pressing addition effect is added. It is configured to execute the production (special additional production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special addition effect can win the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give greater joy to.

Next, the details of the non-display setting process (Y5861) will be described with reference to FIG. 216. As described above, this non-display setting process (Y5861) is a process for executing determination of whether or not to set the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 216, when the non-display setting process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is 0 (Y5891), and if it is 1 or more. When it is determined (Y5891: No), the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is subtracted by 1 (Y5892), and displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p after the subtraction. The number of impressions to be displayed is updated (Y5893), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5891 when it is determined that the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p is 0 (Y5891: Yes), the actual remaining number of times stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o is It is determined whether or not it is 0 times (Y5894), if the actual remaining number of times is not 0 times (Y58994: No), a non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set (Y5895), and the display is hidden. The setting flag 2230 deg is set to on (Y5896), and this process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it a state in which it is not possible to know when the latent state will end, so that the player can be given a sense of tension in the remaining latent state games.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5894, when it is determined that the remaining number of times of the actual latent state stored in the residual probability variation number area 2230o is 0 (Y5894: Yes), the display is displayed at the end timing of the latent state. Since it means that the remaining number of times has also been updated to 0, a normal end effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) is set (Y5897), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the non-display setting process in the sixth embodiment, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension while the non-display mode is set.

Next, the details of the confirmation command processing (Y4366) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. As described above, this confirmation command process (Y4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol. When this confirmation command processing (see FIG. 217) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received special figure 1 confirmation command is received (Y5831), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command is received. (Y5831: Yes), the final display of the first special symbol is set (Y5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag 2230de is on (Y5833), and if it is determined that it is on (Y5833: Yes), the hold notice effect is displayed during the variable display in which the confirmation display is set this time. It is determined whether or not it is finished (Y5834). If it is determined in the process of Y5834 that the hold notice effect has ended (Y5834: Yes), the hold notice flag 2230de is set to off (Y5835), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5833, when it is determined that the holding notice flag 2230de is off (Y5833: No), or in the processing of Y5834, when it is determined that the holding notice effect is continuing (Y5834: No). ), This process ends as it is. If it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command in the processing of Y5831 (Y5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (Y5836), and this processing is terminated. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to execute the hold notice effect as a hobby effect in the normal state or the probabilistic state. In this hold notice effect, the hold symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by operating the frame button 22 of the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of executing a hold notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of a hold fluctuation display is known. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, it is suggested that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is expected to be a big hit, so that the variable display is started before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the expectations of the players.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect occurs, it may be difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not subject to the hold notice. This is because it was usual to set a hold notice effect for a hold symbol corresponding to a hold ball with a high expectation in the hold.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect can be specified. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the hold notice effect is higher when the hold ball with a high expectation of being a big hit is included. As a result, when the hold notice effect is not set for the hold symbols in the specified range, or when the hold notice effect in a mode with low expectation is executed, the hold symbols outside the range specified by the player are supported. You can expect a big hit for the reserved ball. Therefore, when a hold notice effect with a high degree of expectation occurs in the selected range, the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol in which the hold notice has occurred is expected to be a big hit, and the hold notice does not occur. When a hold notice with a low degree of expectation occurs, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a feeling of expectation can be given to a hold ball outside the selection range.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as a kind of pressing addition effect executed in the latent probability state, the remaining latent state displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. There is an effect to add the number of times.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an operating means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player, and can execute an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means as a kind of hobby effect. is there. In this conventional gaming machine, by operating the operation buttons in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated, a hit is notified, and the like, the player's interest is improved.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect (the hit is). It had nothing to do with (whether or not it was notified). For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation and production.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, there is a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state and the remaining number of times on the display. Then, when the pressing addition effect is executed, a different addition value is added and displayed according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 within the range in which the remaining number of times on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number of times. It is said. As a result, the remaining number of additions on the display is changed according to the operation timing of the player, so that the player can be more actively participated in the addition effect (the frame button 22 is pressed at the right timing). .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, in the latent state, the number of remaining latent states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is hidden, and the actual remaining number of latent states is set. Is a big hit of the second special symbol within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (a latent probability state is newly set 120 times), and a special additional effect different from the normal additional effect can be executed. It is configured.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that sets an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state over a predetermined number of lottery times based on a predetermined opportunity such as a hit. In such a conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous state shifts to the advantageous state, it is expected that the advantageous state will continue for a longer period of time by performing an effect in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue. There are some that are trying to improve the interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous state is reset (overwritten) due to a predetermined trigger such as a hit in the advantageous state, it is unknown at what stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state is reset. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, a special additional effect is provided that is executed only when the remaining latent number of times is within 5 times and a big hit is made. Therefore, the player who has confirmed the special additional effect is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent state has been added just before the end of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to give greater joy to the player who recognizes that the jackpot has been won at the right time. In addition, since the number of remaining latent states at the time of a big hit is clarified, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the sixth embodiment, the special addition effect is executed only in the state where the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1, if the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (value stored in the remaining probability variation number area 2230o) is 5 times or less, a special case different from the normal one. It may be configured to execute an additional effect. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, there may be a difference between the remaining number of times the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times the actual latent state. That is, even if the remaining number of times on the display is within 5 times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times. Therefore, it becomes a big hit when the remaining number of times on the display is 5 times or less, and even if the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is also within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). It is unclear whether the actual remaining number of times is sufficient, and there is a risk of causing discomfort to the player. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the special addition effect is executed regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set, so that the latent state is about to end. When the jackpot is won, the player can be surely recognized to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from being uncomfortable. It should be noted that the production mode of the special addition effect may be different depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, the running character 811 may become enormous, and an effect may be executed in which 100 times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. .. By executing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to execute a more natural flow effect in each display mode. In addition, the production mode can be diversified.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect of urging the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit in the hold notice effect is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect of determining the super reach if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it may be configured to notify all the egg symbols at once whether or not it develops into super reach with one repeated hit by the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the production easier to understand.

In the sixth embodiment, when the hold notice effect occurs and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the hold symbols for which the hold notice is given is automatically determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect itself may be terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the hold notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). That is, if the expectation of a big hit is suggested by the hold notice effect, there is a risk that the variable display corresponding to the hold ball with a low expectation cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, not only the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved advance notice effect, but also whether or not to perform the hold notice effect itself can be selected by the player, so that the variable display corresponding to each reserved symbol can be expected. You can feel it. Therefore, it is possible to meet a wide range of needs of each player.

In the sixth embodiment, the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested by whether or not the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether or not the egg breaks, but the mode of the reserved notice production is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. The reserved symbol may be variable in a different manner according to the expected degree of the corresponding reserved ball. For example, the color of the reserved symbol in the range selected by the player may be changed according to the expected degree. Good. More specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a hold symbol for which the hold notice effect is to be performed, the hold symbol in the selected range is changed to white. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the color of each reserved symbol may change. In this case, the extent to which the color changes according to the number of repeated hits for each reserved symbol may be determined in advance at the start of the pending notice or when the player selects the reserved symbol. Specifically, for example, when a reserved symbol corresponding to a reserved ball, which is a fluctuation pattern of short deviation, detached normal reach, and hit super reach A, is selected, the reserved symbol corresponding to short deviation is changed from white to another color. Set so that it does not change, and the hold symbol corresponding to the off normal reach is set to change up to yellow (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow) according to the number of repeated hits, and the hold corresponding to the hit super reach A The design may be set to change up to rainbow color according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player positively perform repeated hits while looking forward to what color each reserved symbol changes to. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<First modification of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 223. In the third embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the same (0.5 seconds) fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was composed. As a result, the efficiency of the game in the latent state is improved.

On the other hand, in the first modification, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed according to the remaining number of times in the latent state. Then, in the first half of the latent state, a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be set, and in the latter half, a relatively long fluctuation time is easily set. As a result, the interval between small hits or big hits becomes shorter in the first half of the latent state, and the prize balls can be increased in a relatively short time, while in the latter half of the latent state, small hits or big hits occur. By lengthening the interval, the amount of increase in the prize balls can be made relatively slow. Therefore, it is possible to add a wave to how the number of prize balls increases, and it is possible to give a sharp impression to the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent state.

The first modification of the third embodiment differs from the third embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the RAM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 has been changed. The third is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the first modification of the third embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220. FIG. 218 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 2020 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218 (a), the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea is added to the ROM 2020 of the main control device 110 in the first modification with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 89). It is different in that it is. Further, in this modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f are partially changed.

First, the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 218 (b). FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), the variation pattern selection table 2020f in the first modification replaces the latency table 2020f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 2020f (see FIG. 92) in the third embodiment. Therefore, a table for latent accuracy (first half) 2020f4a and a table for latent accuracy (second half) 2020f4b are provided.

The latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern in the first half of the latent probability state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lottery is executed), and is a latent probability (first half) table. The second half) table 2020f4b is a table referred to in the second half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lottery is executed). The details of the latent probability (second half) table 2020f4b will be described with reference to FIG. 219 (a). The content of the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a is the same as that of the latent probability table 2020f4 (see FIG. 94 (b)) in the third embodiment, and is 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of .5 seconds is selected. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 219 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability (second half) table 2020f4b. Of these, the provisions for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a (and the latent probability table 2020f4 in the third embodiment), so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. Further, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. If a small hit is obtained in, a small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second special symbol is drawn out. Is a short variation (2 seconds) selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

In this way, when the latent probability (second half) table 2020f4b is referred to, the fluctuation time is longer (0.5 seconds → 2 seconds) than when the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a is referred to. By doing so, in the latter half of the latent state (51 to 120 times), the interval between small hits or big hits can be lengthened. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the number of balls held tends to increase, and in the second half, the number of balls held slows down. Can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea will be described with reference to FIG. 219 (b). The fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020ea is a table in which the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big hit and the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea.

As shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern does not depend on the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit in which the normal state is set ends. A normal table A2020f1 is associated with the selection table. Therefore, when the normal state is set after the big hit, the normal table A2020f1 is always referred to to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the probability change state is set as the game state after the big hit, the probability change table is set for the range of the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 120. 2020f3 is associated and defined, and when the number of lottery of special symbols is 121 or later, the normal table A2020f1 is associated and defined. Therefore, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is 120 times or less, the probability variation table 2020f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variable pattern selection table, and when the number of lottery is 121 or more, the normal table A2020f1 is referred to. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219 (b), when the latent state is set as the game state after the big hit, the number of lottery after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 50, and the latent probability (first half). The table 2020f4a is defined in association with each other, and the number of lottery of special symbols is defined in association with the range of 51 to 120, and the table 2020f4b for latency (second half) is specified in association with the range of 121 and 122. The table B2020f2 is associated and defined, and the normal table A2020f1 is associated with 123 and later.

As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent probability (first half) table 2020f4a in which a short fluctuation time is easily determined, so that the interval between small hits or big hits can be shortened. it can. Therefore, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent probability state, since the fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent probability (second half) table 2020f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long fluctuation time, the interval between small hits or big hits becomes long. Therefore, in the latter half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize balls can be slowed down, so that the degree of increase of the prize balls can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent state.

Further, after the latent state is completed, the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the normal table B2020f2 in the two special symbol lottery, so that the result of the latent state is the same as in the third embodiment. It is possible to secure a sufficient production time for displaying. Further, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 123 times, the normal table A2020f1 is referred to.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030. As shown in FIG. 220, the RAM 2030 in the first modification has a scenario storage area 2030ea and a lottery count counter 2030eb added to the configuration of the RAM 2030 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 96). Is different.

The scenario storage area 2030ea is a storage area for storing the scenario corresponding to the game state after the big hit among the scenarios defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020ea. In this scenario storage area 2030ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is stored at the end of the big hit (see Y2351 in FIG. 223). At the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ea.

The lottery count counter 2030eb is a counter for counting the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished. When the variable pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 2030ea, the number of lottery of the special symbol is determined by the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb, and the variable pattern selection table is selected.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first modification of the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. First, referring to FIG. 221, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 4) executed in the first modification instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment. 221) will be described.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 221) in the first modification, in each of the processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the third embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 of (see FIG. 104) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 221) in the present modification, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb is then generated from the scenario storage area 2030ea. Is read (Y551), and the process shifts to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505. Although the illustration is omitted, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read out, the same process as this Y551 is executed to determine the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed in the first modification instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the game state update processes 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modification of the third embodiment, in each of the processes Y601 to Y608, Y601 to the game state update process (see FIG. 105) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of Y608 is executed.

Further, in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 222) in the first modification, after the process of Y608, it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb (Y651), and this process is terminated. By updating the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb each time in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 222), the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb can always be matched with the number of lottery of the special symbol executed after the big hit. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 223) executed in the first modification instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment will be described. Of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 223), in each of the processes Y2301 to Y2308, the same processing as each processing of Y2301 to Y2308 in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 122) of the third embodiment is executed. ..

Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 223) in the first modification, when the process of Y2308 is completed, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of Y2302 to Y2306 is then displayed in the variation pattern scenario table 2020ea. Read from and set in the scenario storage area 2030ea (Y2351). Next, the value of the lottery count counter 2030eb is reset to 0 (Y2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 223), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the game state after the jackpot end.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment, the first half of the latent state (the number of lottery after the big hit is 1 to 50) or the latter half (the number of lottery after the big hit is 51 to 120). The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern selection table referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern is switched according to the number of times). Then, the latter half of the latent state is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is more easily selected than the first half of the latent state. As a result, it is possible to make the interval between the first half and the second half of the latent state different from each other in the small hit or the big hit, and to increase the possibility that the first half will be the small hit or the big hit at a shorter interval. That is, in the first half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize balls can be increased, and in the latter half, the rate of increase of the prize balls can be relatively slowed down. Therefore, since the rate of increase of the prize balls can be changed, it is possible to wave the way the prize balls increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent state. In addition, since the prize ball increases faster in the first half of the latent state, the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player win the jackpot in the first half of the latent state (before entering the second half) and want to play the game in the first half of the latent state again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In this first modification, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the first half of the latent state, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the latter half of the latent state, the second special symbol is set. When the lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is always set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%). Similarly, even in a trial in a latent state, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether it is the first half or the second half of the latent state, so even if the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played with the expectation that it is the first half. be able to. It should be noted that the above-mentioned <second modification of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. In the third embodiment described above, the third symbol is displayed based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) with reference to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98). It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, the fluctuation status of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation (setting status of the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t), is set. Regardless, by executing the demo display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s, which indicates that a predetermined period has passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, has stopped, is set to ON. The configuration was such that the main fluctuation was displayed reliably.

Here, in the third embodiment described above, in the normal state, that is, in the state where the left-handed strike is executed, the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1. Met. This is because the second entrance ball opening 1640 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right-handed area.

As described above, if the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 with the lottery stopped, the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. At that time, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may feel uncomfortable when the pattern displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation is not started is seen.

On the other hand, in this second modification, the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t, which indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, has stopped during the normal state, is set to ON. In this case, the sub-variation demo display (special figure 2 demo display) is configured to be executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous fluctuation is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) on the sub-variation side continues to be displayed while being stopped. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the game.

The second modification of the third embodiment differs from the third embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 2220 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the third execution is performed. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed by the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a diagram showing an example of a sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state (or probability variation state).

As shown in FIG. 224, in the normal state (or probabilistic state), the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state, and the second special symbol is not fluctuating for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modified example). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 80) showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, "during the game" indicating that the first special symbol is changing as a demonstration display for sub-variation. Character is displayed. In this way, by executing a display other than the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the demo display for the sub-variation, the game is executed even though the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed). The player is given a sense of discomfort due to the continuous display of the symbol (second special symbol) in which the fluctuation is not executed (despite the fact that the ball is inserted into the first entry port 64). Can be suppressed.

Further, the content of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) can be set based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s). As shown in 224, when the first special symbol is changing (when the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off), it means that the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is changing. Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

<About the electrical configuration in the second modification of the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 225, the screen display selection 3 table 2220b in the second modification is in a normal state or a probable change state with respect to the screen display selection table 2220b (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the screen display type specified corresponding to the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on is changed. There is. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 225, the screen is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state, the special figure 1 standby flag 2230s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 2230t is set to on. "Special figure 2 demo display" is specified as a display type. This "special figure 2 demo display" is a screen display type in which the display of "in game" (see FIG. 224) is executed with the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the demo display area of the second special symbol. ..

As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuations of the two types of special symbols are executed at the same time, one of the two types of special symbols is advantageous for the player. The special symbol) is variablely displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81'. Area in which the variation display of the sub-variation is executed (sub-variation display area) when the configuration in which the variation is displayed as the sub-variation using (the area smaller than the display area in which the variation display of the main variation is executed) is used. Since the demo display corresponding to the sub-variation can be executed, it is possible to prevent the symbol showing the lottery result of the sub-variation from being stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed. In addition, the player can be made to pay attention to the fluctuation display (effect display) corresponding to the main fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Furthermore, by setting the content of the demo display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol), the sub-variation (second special symbol) is displayed. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) by using the region (sub-variation display region). Therefore, in the state where the demo display is executed in the sub-variation area, it is possible to execute the display related to the main variation by using all (almost) of the third symbol display device 81, which provides the player with an easy-to-understand effect. be able to.

In this second modification, the demo display for the second special symbol is executed instead of the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and displayed, and the demo display for the second special symbol may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variation display area, or the sub-variation display area may be executed. A configuration may be used in which the demo display for the second special symbol is executed in a different area from the above.

Further, in this second modification, the configuration of the demo display (sub-variation demo display) for the second special symbol in the normal state or the probabilistic state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub-variation has been described. However, for example, it is preferable to use the same configuration even in a latent state in which the second special symbol is the main variation and the first special symbol is the sub-variation. In this case, the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 is set as the variation display area of the first special symbol, and the small area Dm1 is set as the sub-variation display area regardless of the gaming state. It is possible to standardize the display data and the display control, and there is an effect that the processing load of the display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the first modification in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 242. In the sixth embodiment described above, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times in the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed. A non-display mode (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set when the additional pressing effect executed together and the remaining number of times on the display are 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more). , When the non-display mode is set, the configuration has a special addition effect that is executed when a big hit is made when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within a predetermined number of times (5 times). The effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display was executed at various timings in the latent state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main control device 110. There is a device in which a difference is provided between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81, making it difficult for the player to understand how long the specific gaming state will continue. In such a gaming machine, by executing an effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display and converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the player can feel a specific gaming state without discomfort. It is configured to be played.

In this case, as the effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display, as described in the sixth embodiment described above, the additional effect (pressing additional effect) executed based on the fluctuation of the special symbol and the remaining number of times on the display are added. It is considered that the additional effect (special additional effect) is executed based on the fact that is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various additional effects in this way, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times that the specific game state (latent state) is executed, and to give the player a sense of tension. It is possible to continue playing the game, and further, it is possible to give a sense of security when a large number of times are added by the additional effect.

However, the effect for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display (additional effect) is different depending on the player, and by executing various patterns of additional effect, the player There was a risk that the motivation would drop. Specifically, for players who prefer the effect of continuing to know the actual remaining number of times until the remaining number of times on the display is low and adding the actual remaining number of times when the remaining number of times on the display is low. On the other hand, if the additional effect is performed before the remaining number of times on the display is reduced, the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number is reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times the remaining number of times is added in the effect of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a possibility that the motivation of the player for the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the first modification, as the additional effect executed in the latent state, the effect mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for each variable additional effect and the remaining number of times on the display are a predetermined number or less. Since the player can select the effect mode (post-notification mode) in which the additional effect is executed when the situation occurs, the mode of the additional effect desired by the player can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for the production is lowered.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected as described above, for example, the first effect mode in which the additional effect can be executed is set every time the change of the special symbol is executed, and the remaining on the display. If 3 times are displayed as the number of times and the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations) is selected, the additional effect is displayed. There was a problem that the timing of execution was missed and the effect of the production was reduced.

On the other hand, in this modification, during the jackpot game in which 120 times are reset as the actual remaining number of times, the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected, and the remaining number of times on the display is a predetermined number of times as the effect mode. Based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when (for example, 5 rotations), the remaining number of times on the display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect.

Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the additional effect, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

The first modification of the sixth embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the ROM 2220 and the RAM 2230 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the effect display executed by the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. In this first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display that moves in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach loss), some of the symbols are in the vertical direction. A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 226 and 227). Further, when the jackpot G is won during the latent state, a plurality of effect modes in which different additional effect modes are executed during the jackpot game can be selected (see FIGS. 228 and 229).

First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the lateral direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the scroll change effect, and FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic diagram. , FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which a part of the symbols is displayed in a suggestion mode suggesting that some symbols move in the vertical direction after the first reach mode is disengaged and stopped (temporary stop). FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a reach in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction (second reach mode) is executed, and FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second reach mode is hit and stopped at the symbol. .. Since the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the lateral direction has the same contents as the above-described sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2 so that they can be controlled. During the symbol variation display (horizontal symbol variation display), the display control of the left display area Dz1 and the right display area Dz2 is collectively executed to change the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and a special symbol variation display (vertical symbol variation display) different from the normal one is executed, the area subject to the vertical symbol variation (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2) is executed. ) Is configured to execute control to update only the display data. As a result, an appropriate symbol display effect can be executed only by updating the display data of the area suitable for the symbol variation display, so that the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

In FIG. 226 (a), the symbol string L1 and the symbol string L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode), and as a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed. The symbol sequence L2 is stopped and displayed in a mode of being shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (combination of symbols in which symbols showing the same number are stopped and displayed in a straight line).

After that, among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a "lion", the symbol row L2 is a sub symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a "snake"). A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a movement direction suggestion mode indicating an action suggesting a change in the vertical direction (downward), and a vertical (downward) symbol sequence is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, the sub symbol is displayed on the upper side of the symbol string L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1, and the sub symbol is displayed on the lower side of the symbol string L3 displayed in the left display area Dz1, so that the sub symbol is displayed on the left. A vertical symbol sequence (from the top, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a "lion", a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a "snake", and a sub symbol displayed in this order) is displayed in the area Dz1. (See FIG. 226 (b)).

As a result, it can be suggested that each symbol displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuates in the vertical direction, and it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display mode of each symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 is changed, and the display is newly added in the left display area Dz1. This is because the configuration suggests that a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbols change in the vertical direction will be executed in the future simply by executing the process of adding various symbols and additionally displaying the vertical symbol rows). , The processing load of control related to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

It should be noted that the configuration suggesting that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) in the right side display area Dz2 without using the configuration of the first modification. May be used. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the second reach mode (reach in which the symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction) is executed, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), the symbol sequence L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward direction). As the second reach mode, the main symbol with the number "1" attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 (the main symbol imitating an elephant) is stopped and displayed to indicate a jackpot. A special double reach aspect is performed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the unidirectional symbol sequence (L1 to L3) can be obtained. It is also possible to easily execute a complicated symbol variation display. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), it is possible to set a plurality of stop positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number "1") indicates a jackpot, which raises the expectation of a jackpot. You can perform the production.

Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit, the main symbol (simulating an elephant) in which the number "1" is added to any of the effective lines V5 and V6. The main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a row (see FIG. 227 (b)). After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state in which the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 226 (a)) to the state in which the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped). An example is shown in which the display data in areas other than the above is not changed, but the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 is prevented from being updated, and other than that. The update of the display data (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be executed. As a result, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 226 (a) is executed, the display of "reach" is changed to the display of "multi-reach" indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach mode. It can be updated, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, a display area showing the current symbol change status (area in which "reach" is displayed in FIG. 226 (a)) is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the content to be displayed is appropriately changed according to the symbol change status. It may be configured to do so. As a result, the second reach mode is executed and the symbol variation status is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (left display area Dz1) in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display according to the above can be executed, the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing can be reduced, and the effect of increasing the expectation of the big hit can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229, the contents of the additional mode selection effect for selecting the additional effect executed during the latent state in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. This addition mode selection effect converges the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent probability state (value of the residual probability variation number area 2230o) and the remaining number of times on the display (value stored in the effect probability variation number area 2230p). Therefore, it is an effect for selecting the effect mode (addition mode) of the additional effect that adds (adds) the remaining number of times on the display, and whether or not to execute the additional effect every time the change of the special symbol is started. (Additional chance mode), and the effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number (post-notification mode). It is a production that can select (addition mode).

As a result, the player can select an effect mode in which the additional effect suitable for his / her taste is executed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended additional effect from being executed and the motivation to be lowered. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 228 (a), the display contents of the additional mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the additional mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), in the first modification, the addition mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

When the addition mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times on the display (the number of remaining probability changes of the effect) when the jackpot G is won continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. As a result, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the jackpot game. Although the main control device 110 clears the value of the probability change counter 2030k (set to 0) when the jackpot game is executed, the remaining number of times on the display in the effect probability change number area 2230p of the voice lamp control device 113. By storing (setting) the (number of remaining probability changes in the effect), the remaining number of times on the display can be continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

Then, in the central area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a having the characters "push" for prompting the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is displayed, and "addition chance mode" is displayed on both sides of the button D6a. The described first selected display D6b and the second selected display D6c described as "post-notification mode" are displayed, and the first selected position for selecting the first selected display D6b and the second selected display D6b are displayed. The selection display D6d that moves between the display D6c and the second selection position at a predetermined interval is displayed. In the display area D4, a display explaining the content of the additional mode selection effect is displayed as a telop, and in FIG. 228 (a), the description "Select a favorite mode with a button" is displayed. Further, on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, the additional effect mode (addition mode) that was selected in the state of winning the jackpot is displayed, and it is easy to indicate which additional effect mode the player has selected. I am trying to grasp it.

During this addition mode selection effect, the specified addition mode is set by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the selection display D6d specifies the desired addition mode.

Then, in FIG. 228 (a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), "RUSH continuation" for notifying that the latent state continues. Is displayed, and the character 811 in a display mode for congratulating the continuation of the latent state is displayed. Further, in this case, since the additional effect mode is not changed in the additional mode selection effect (because it is the "addition chance mode" at the time of winning the jackpot → the "addition chance mode" after the additional mode selection effect), the remaining number display area D1 The same "3 remaining times" as when the jackpot was won is continuously displayed. As a result, the latent state can be restarted in the same situation (remaining number of times on the display) as when the jackpot was won, so that the player is in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort. You can play the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. As a result, by looking at the display contents of the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the additional mode at the time of a big hit and the additional mode after the additional mode selection effect.

On the other hand, in FIG. 228 (a), when the post-notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, “+97” is added so that the remaining number display area D1 indicates 100 times, as shown in FIG. 229. The display is executed. Other than that, the same contents as those described in FIG. 228 (b) are displayed. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this way, when the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is different from the additional mode at the time of winning the jackpot, the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100 times, so that the additional mode is newly executed. It is possible to smoothly add the effect without any discomfort, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates "3 times", and an additional mode selection effect during the jackpot game is executed. When the addition mode is changed from the addition chance mode to the post-notification mode, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as "3 times", the addition effect is executed in the post-notification mode. There is a risk of losing the opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "5 times"), and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 100 times, so that the addition effect is executed in the post-notification mode. It is possible to reliably secure an opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "5 times").

In this first modification, it is configured so that it is determined whether or not the latent state is given after the jackpot game is completed in the seventh round of the jackpot game (the ball passes through V in the seventh round). (Because it is configured so that the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 77) is passed), the above-mentioned additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the eighth round during the jackpot game. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the addition mode in a state where it is confirmed that the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times. Therefore, the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the jackpot If the latent state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. First, FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A2020ff1 provided in the ROM 2020 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230, in the second normal table A2020ff1, a part of the specified fluctuation pattern is changed with respect to the normal table 2020f1 (see FIG. 93) used in the sixth embodiment described above. It is different in that it is. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the fluctuation patterns defined in the second normal table A2020ff1, the fluctuation patterns changed from the normal table A2020f1 will be described. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) is executed as a variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, in the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "101 to 150" and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with "151". Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "~ 198".

Furthermore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out and the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "71 to 150" and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is set. It is associated, and the range of "171 to 198" is out of range, and Super Reach C (30 seconds) is associated. In addition, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and corresponds to normal reach B (20 seconds). It is attached, and the range of "186 to 198" is out of range, and Super Reach C (30 seconds) is associated with it.

When the hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the lateral direction is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 81 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a deviation (a mode in which the symbol sequence L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 226 (a)). After that, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period has passed, the third symbol moves in the vertical direction (second reach mode). ) Is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 227 (a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit (see FIG. 227 (b)).

When the hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 81 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a deviation (a mode in which the symbol sequence L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 226 (a)). After that, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period, the third symbol moves laterally (the third reach mode). ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit.

When the out-of-order normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 81 (b)). A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a deviation (a mode in which the symbol sequence L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 226 (a)). After that, after the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation.

When the out-of-order super reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see FIG. 81 (b)). , A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a deviation (a mode in which the symbol sequence L2 is shifted by one frame) is displayed as a stop (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 226 (a)). After that, the suggestion effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 226 (b)), and after the suggestion effect period, the third symbol moves laterally (the third reach mode). ) Is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination indicating the disconnection.

As described above, in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as the scroll change effect, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestion effect (17 seconds) and the suggestion effect (17 seconds) in the first 20 seconds of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds ( 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the end of the suggestion effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed as it is in a combination of deviations, and the fluctuation time is 20 seconds (off normal reach B), and the remaining 10 seconds is different from the second reach mode (third reach mode). By combining with the fluctuation (10 seconds) to be executed (hit super reach E, missed super reach C), it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player expectation for hit at various timings during the symbol fluctuation.

Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted. Further, in the first modification, since the hit expectation is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol restarts, the game is played while also expecting in which direction the third symbol restarts. be able to. In addition, during the execution of this suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), it is suggested whether or not the third symbol is restarted by the third symbol display device 81, or the direction in which the third symbol is restarted. Since the effect (suggestion effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggestion effect to determine whether or not the third symbol is restarted, or the direction in which the third symbol is restarted. You can play the game while predicting.

In addition, in FIG. 226 (b), the suggestion effect of changing the display form of the third symbol to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) suggesting the movement direction (downward direction) is executed, but other suggestions are made. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the third symbol restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display form of the third symbol is changed to a display form in which the character faces the left side (traveling direction) (second movement). Direction suggestion display form), a suggestion effect in which the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a display form suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, and display on the third symbol display device 81. Using other display forms, there is a suggestion effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol.

Further, the suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts may be executed instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, a suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) suggesting that the third symbol is restarted is first executed, and then a suggestion suggesting the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is preferable to configure the effect (restart direction suggestion effect) to be executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation of a hit step by step, and it is possible to make the player continuously pay attention to the production.

Further, in the first modification, when the third symbol is restarted, the variation in the vertical direction (downward direction) or the variation in the horizontal direction (left direction) is executed. The three symbols may be restarted in a direction other than that, and for example, a variation pattern for restarting in the upward direction other than the above-mentioned downward direction may be provided as a restart in the vertical direction. In this case, the hit expectation of the fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol restarts in the vertical direction (upward, downward) is set to be different, and it is suggested that the third symbol restarts in the vertical direction as a suggestion effect. By providing a suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts upward, and a suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts downward, the player is provided with a suggestion effect. The hit expectation can be notified step by step.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 2220 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 231 (a), the ROM 2220 in the first modification is provided with an additional mode selection table 2220fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 2220 in the third embodiment.

The additional mode selection table 2220fa stores the contents of each additional effect executed in the additional mode (addition chance mode, post-notification mode) that the player can select during the latent state, and selects the additional mode effect. The effect corresponding to the additional mode effect selected in the process is read and executed.

FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, the pressed a flag 2230fa, the pressed b flag 2230fb, the scroll change flag 2230fc, the mode change flag 2230fd, the mode addition flag 2230fd, and the addition mode setting area 2230fe are added to the sixth embodiment described above. doing.

In the pressed a flag 2230fa, the frame button 22 is operated during the period set during reach (pressed period during reach) among the period (operation valid period) in which the operation (pressed) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined. It is a flag for indicating that, and is set to be on based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the pressing period during reach. The pressed a flag 2230fa is set to on when the push button processing (see Y5332 in FIG. 233) of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed (see Y8002 in FIG. 233). It is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8201 in FIG. 235), and then set to off (Y8204 in FIG. 235).

The pressed b flag 2230fb is operated by the frame button 22 during the period set during the jackpot game (the jackpot middle pressing period) out of the period (operation valid period) in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined. It is a flag for indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and is set to be on based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the jackpot pressing period. The pressed b flag 2230fb is set to on when the jackpot middle pressing process (see Y5334 in FIG. 234) of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) is executed (see Y8102 in FIG. 234). It is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8207 in FIG. 235), and then set to off (Y8212 in FIG. 235).

The scroll change flag 2230fc is a flag set to be turned on when the condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) in which the change direction of the third symbol is switched in the middle. This scroll change flag 2230fc is when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period (suggestion effect period) of the fluctuation pattern (hit super reach D) in which the fluctuation direction of the third symbol can be switched in the middle. In addition, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect, and the setting is turned on (see Y8005 in FIG. 233). Then, it is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8202 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined to be on (see Y8202: Yes in FIG. 235), it is set to off (see Y8203 in FIG. 235). ). In this pressing end processing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 according to the setting status of the scroll change flag 2230fc. doing.

The mode change flag 2230fd is a flag indicating that the additional mode currently set in the additional mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game has been changed, and is turned on when the additional mode is changed by the additional mode selection effect. It is set to. This mode change flag 2230fd is set to on (Y8105 in FIG. 234) when it is determined that the mode has been changed (Y8104: Yes in FIG. 234) in the jackpot middle pressing process (see Y5534 in FIG. 234). It is referred to in the end processing (see Y5537 in FIG. 235) (Y8208 in FIG. 235), and when it is determined that it is set to on (Y8208 in FIG. 235: Yes), it is set to off (Y8209 in FIG. 235). ). In this pressing end processing (Y5537 in FIG. 235), the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p is changed according to the setting status of the mode change flag 2230fd, and the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON. If so, the value of the effect probability variation frequency area 2230p is set to 100 (Y8210 in FIG. 235). As a result, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p is set to 100, that is, it is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state where the remaining number of times on the display (the number of remaining probability changes of the effect) is set to 100, and it is possible to preferably provide the additional effect executed in the added mode after the change. it can.

The additional mode setting area 2230fe is at least an area for setting (remembering) the currently set additional mode and the previously set additional mode, and is selected in the pressing end processing (Y5537 processing in FIG. 235). The additional mode is set (Y8211 in FIG. 235). Information indicating that the addition chance effect mode is set in the initial setting (Y4001 in FIG. 127) of the start-up process (see FIG. 127) executed when the power is turned on is set in the addition mode setting area 2230fe. In the state where the player has not selected the addition mode, the addition chance mode in the latent state is executed. The information (currently set additional mode) set (stored) in the additional mode setting area 2230fe is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (see Y4361 in FIG. 236) (see Y4391 in FIG. 236). Further, it is referred to in the remaining number of times command process 6 (see Y4364 in FIG. 237) (see Y5871 in FIG. 237), and the addition effect corresponding to the currently set addition mode is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 237. First, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Y4107).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) is started, it is first determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (Y5501), and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. In the case (Y5501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the button is being pressed during reach (Y5531).

In the process of Y5531, when it is determined that the pressing period during reach is in progress (Y5531: Yes), the pressing process during reach for changing the fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol during reach is executed (Y5531: Yes). Y5532), this process is terminated. The details of the pressing process during reach (Y5532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y5531, when it is determined that the pressing period is not during the reach (Y5531: No), then it is determined whether the pressing period is during the jackpot (Y5533). In the processing of Y5533, when it is determined that the jackpot pressing period is in progress (Y5553: Yes), the jackpot middle pressing processing for selecting one additional mode from a plurality of additional modes having different types of additional effects to be executed is performed. Execute (Y5534) to end this process. The details of this jackpot middle pressing process (Y5534) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

Further, in the processing of Y5533, if it is determined that the pressing period is not during the jackpot (Y5533: No), other processing according to the pressing timing is executed (Y5535), and this processing is terminated. The other pressing timings are the additional effects executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Y4107 in FIG. 208) of the sixth embodiment described above in addition to the processing of Y5507 of the sixth embodiment described above. The middle push button process (Y5503 in FIG. 208) and the hold advance notice push button process (Y5505 in FIG. 208) are executed.

When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of Y5501, it is determined (Y5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (Y5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing period. If this is the case (Y5536: Yes), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is executed (Y5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y5501, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 235) is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the content of the push button processing (Y5532) during the reach executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing process during reach (Y5532). This during-reach pressing process (Y5532) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach-during pressing period. Specifically, the process of determining whether or not the condition for changing the changing direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 335) is executed.

When the pressing process during reach (Y5532) is executed, it is first determined whether the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8001: No). , The pressed a flag 2230fa is set to on (Y8002), and then the pressing command during the reach for display is set (Y8003). By setting this display during reach pressing command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the reach during pressing period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that this pressed display mode is continuously displayed during the pressing period (suggestion effect period) during reach, and although not shown, whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a mode that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction of restarting.

After finishing the processing of Y8003, it is next determined whether the executed fluctuation pattern is the hit super reach D (see FIG. 230) (that is, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (Y8004). .. In the processing of Y8004, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a hit super reach D (Y8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to ON (Y8005), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the hit Super Reach D (Y8004: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON in the processing of Y8001 (Y8001: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the pressing period during reach (the second and subsequent times). Since the frame button operation has been executed), all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the reach middle press process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the reach middle press period. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the reach middle pressing process (Y5532) is executed, or the lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), and the lottery result is obtained. It may be configured so that the pressing process during reach (Y5532) is executed when a hit occurs. With such a configuration, the content of the effect to be executed can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the contents of the jackpot middle-pressing process (Y5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (Y5534). This jackpot middle pressing process (Y5534) executes a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot middle pressing period (addition mode selection effect period). Specifically, based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the addition mode selection effect (see FIG. 228), a process for setting the addition mode in the latent state executed after the end of the jackpot is performed. Will be executed.

When the jackpot middle press process (Y5534) is executed, it is first determined whether the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (Y8101: No). , The pressed b flag 2230fb is set to on (Y8102), and then the display jackpot middle press command is set (Y8103). By setting this display jackpot middle press command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot middle press period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. Although not shown, this pressed display mode is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. 228 (a) is pressed, and the selection display D6d is stopped and displayed at a position where the selected addition mode is specified, and is designated. It is displayed in an manner indicating that the selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side has been selected.

After finishing the processing of Y8103, it is next determined whether or not the addition mode has been changed (Y8104). Here, the additional mode that was set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the additional mode setting area 2230fe and compared with the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect this time, so that the additional mode can be changed. It is determined whether it was done. If it is determined that the addition mode has been changed in the processing of Y8104 (Y8104: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8105), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition mode has not been changed (Y8104: No), this process ends as it is.

Further, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON in the processing of Y8101 (Y8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the period of pressing during the jackpot (the second and subsequent times). Since the frame button operation has been executed), all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the jackpot middle pressing process (Y5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the jackpot middle pressing period, and the addition mode is determined. However, for example, the addition mode may be configured to be set again within the period of pressing during the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the contents of the pushtone end processing (Y5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 232) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing end processing (Y5537). This pressing end processing (Y5537) is a processing executed at the timing when the pressing period (pressing period during reach, pressing period during jackpot) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 ends, and is during each pressing period. Based on the status of the flag set in, the process for setting the effect content to be executed after the end of the pressing period is executed.

When the pressing end processing (Y5537) is executed, it is first determined whether the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8201). Here, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 2230fa is not set to on (set to off) (Y8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the pressed period during reach. Since this is not the case, the processing (Y8202 to Y8205) based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during the reach is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of Y8207.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y8201 when it is determined that the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to ON (Y8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to ON (Y8202). If it is determined that it is set to on (Y8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 2230fc is set to off (Y8203), the display scroll change command is set (Y8204), and the process proceeds to Y8206.

If it is determined in the processing of Y8202 that the scroll change flag 2230fc is not set on (set to off), the display scroll non-changing command is set (Y8205), and the process proceeds to Y8206. In the process of Y8206, the pressed a flag 2230fa is set to off (Y8206).

After finishing the processing of Y8206, it is next determined whether the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207). Here, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 2230fb is not set to on (set to off) (Y8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the jackpot middle pressing period. Since this is the case, the process (Y8208 to Y8212) based on the frame button operation within the jackpot middle press period is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the jackpot pressing period (during the additional mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p and the setting content of the additional mode setting area 2230fe are not changed. The latent state after the end of the big hit game is executed in a manner in which the state at the time of winning the big hit (addition mode and the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, in the case where the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the addition mode selection effect because he / she does not want to change the addition mode in the latent state, the addition mode and the addition mode after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 from being changed.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y8207, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to ON (Y8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 2230fd is set to ON (Y8208). If it is determined that it is set to on (Y8208: Yes), the mode change flag 2230fd is set to off (Y8209), the value of the effect probability variation frequency area is set to 100 (Y8210), and the selected addition mode is set. Is set in the additional mode setting area 2230fe (Y8211). Then, the pressed b flag 2230fb is set to off, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y8208, if it is determined that the mode change flag 2230fd is not set on (set to off) (Y8208: No), the processing of Y8209 and Y82110 is skipped and the processing of Y8211 is performed. Transition. In this way, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, by setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p to 100, the added mode after the change is set in the latent state executed after the jackpot game is completed. The additional effect used can be suitably executed. Further, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see Y8208), the process of setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 2230p (Y8210) is skipped, so that the probability is latent. When the player intentionally selects the same addition mode as the currently set addition mode during the addition mode selection effect because he / she does not want to change the addition mode during the state, the addition mode and the remaining after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area D1 from being changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (Y4361) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6. The special figure 2 variation start process 6 (Y4361) is added to the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above based on the type of the addition mode currently set. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process has been added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed, first, the same processes as those of Y4371 to Y4373 and Y4375 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the sixth embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Y4373 that the gaming state is the latent state (Y4373: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391). In this Y4391 process, the information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 2230fe is read out, and the determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

In the process of Y4391, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (Y4391: Yes), Y4374 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 212) of the above-described sixth embodiment. , Y4376 executes the same process and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (post-notification mode) (Y4391: No), the processing of Y4374 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (Y4361) is executed (when the change of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In the case of, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional effect. If the currently set additional mode is the post-notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed and is actually By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-announcement (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. Can be made larger. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

Next, the details of the residual probability variation number command process 6 (Y4364) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the residual probability variation number command process 6 (Y4364). The residual probability variation number command process 6 (Y4364) is related to the addition effect based on the type of the addition mode currently set with respect to the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process has been added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the residual probability variation number command process 6 (Y4364) is executed, first, the same process as Y5851 and Y5852 of the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is executed, and in the process of Y5851. If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (Y5852: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post-notification mode (Y5871). In this Y5871 process, the information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 2230fe is read out, and the determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

When it is determined that the post-notification mode is set in the process of Y5871 (Y5871: Yes), the same process as Y5853 to Y5861 of the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 215) of the sixth embodiment described above is performed. Execute and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y5871 that the post-notification mode is not set (additional chance mode is set) (Y5871: No), the processing of Y5853 to Y5861 is skipped and the main processing is terminated. ..

With this configuration, when the residual probability variation number command process 6 (Y4364) is executed (when the change of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode becomes the addition chance mode. In that case, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional effect. If the currently set additional mode is the post-notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed and the actual additional effect is set. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-notification (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. can do. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect desired by the player.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device in the first modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In this modification, the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 238) differs from the above-described sixth embodiment in that the press-related command process is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 238. In the command determination process 6, the processes Y6401 to Y6417 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 139) in the third embodiment described above.

Then, in the processing of Y6416, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (Y6416: No), then it is determined whether or not the display press-related command has been received (Y6431).

If it is determined that the display press-related command has been received in the Y6431 process (Y6431: Yes), the press-related command process is executed (Y6432), and the process returns to the Y6401 process. The details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y6431, when it is determined that the press-related command has not been received (Y6431: No), then other command processing is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment (Y6418), and Y6401 Return to processing.

Next, the details of the press-related command processing (Y6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. The press-related command process (Y6432) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (execution) the press-related effect.

In the press-related command processing (Y6432), first, it is determined whether or not the press command during the display reach is received (Y8301). If it is determined in the processing of Y8301 that the pressing command during reach for display has been received (Y8301: Yes), the pressing command processing during reach is executed (Y8302), and the process proceeds to Y8303.

Here, the details of the press command process during reach (Y8302) will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the press command processing during reach. This in-reach press command process executes a process corresponding to the display reach in-press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the reach pressing command processing, first, the reach pressing display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display reaching pressing command is determined, and the determined pressing display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y8402).

Then, based on the reach-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Y8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y8405), the press command processing during reach is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8301 when it is determined that the display reach pressing command has not been received (Y8301: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll change command has been received (Y8303).

If it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received in the process of Y8303 (Y8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (Y8304), and the process proceeds to the process of Y8305.

Here, the details of the scroll change command processing (Y8304) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command process executes the process corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the scroll change command processing, first, a symbol array for vertical scrolling is set based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the pass / fail related information, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8501). Next, a vertically scrolling effect display data table corresponding to the display content of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scrolling effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8502). ). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y8503).

Then, based on the vertically scrolling effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8502, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Y8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8507). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y8508), the scroll change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8303, if it is determined that the display scroll change command has not been received (Y8303: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll non-change command has been received (Y8305).

If it is determined that the display scroll non-change command has been received in the process of Y8305 (Y8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (Y8306), and the process proceeds to the process of Y8307.

Here, the details of the scroll non-change command processing (Y8306) will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (a). FIG. 242 (a) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing. This scroll non-change command process executes the process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the scroll non-change command processing, first, the scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y8602).

Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y8605), the scroll non-change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (Y8305: No), then it is determined whether or not the display jackpot middle press command has been received (Y8307).

In the process of Y8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command has been received (Y8307: Yes), the jackpot middle press command process is executed (Y8308), and this process ends.

Here, the details of the jackpot middle-press command processing (Y8308) will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (b). FIG. 242 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. This jackpot middle press command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot middle press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot middle press command processing, first, the jackpot middle press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display jackpot middle press command is determined, and the determined jackpot middle press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Y8701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Y8702).

Then, based on the jackpot middle-pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Y8701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (Y8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (Y8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (Y8705), the jackpot middle press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. In the process of Y8307, if it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command has not been received (Y8307: No), this process ends.

<Another example in the first modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, another example in the first modification of the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 246. In this alternative example, in addition to the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 226 and 227) executed in the first modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the special reach effect executed in the third embodiment described above (FIG. 82, FIG. (See FIG. 83) is combined to enable a composite reach effect. As a result, it is possible to execute a complicated reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this alternative example, the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed for each of the above-described embodiments, and the content is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The difference is that the partial processing has been changed. The other configurations are the same as the configurations and various control processes used in the above-described embodiments. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 used in the present alternative example will be described. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), in this alternative example, for each of the above-described embodiments, a symbol string L4 that is scrolled and displayed in a variable manner in the left-right direction is added to the upper side of the symbol string L1 and is displayed in the left-right direction. The difference is that the symbol string L8, which is scrolled and displayed in a variable manner, is added to the lower side of the symbol string L3.

Further, in this alternative example, in the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm in which the symbols are variablely displayed is scrolled in the left-right direction and the five (five columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4) are variablely displayed. , And L8), the number of symbol columns that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three columns), and the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is switched in the vertical direction. Of the five (five columns) symbol strings (L1 to L4, and L8) that are scrolled in the left-right direction and displayed in a variable manner, the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

Then, the fluctuation control of five (five columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4, and L8) is executed for the fluctuation region Dz3 in which the main display region Dm is a region wider than the displayable display region, among which the fluctuation control is executed. , The display control is executed for the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when changing the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dmm, the changed symbol sequence can be displayed only by executing the display control based on the fluctuation control content executed in advance. , It is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol sequence for the player without delay.

In addition, the present alternative example is different in that the symbol sequences L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, the combination pattern of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is used. The symbol sequence corresponding to the second reach mode is set so that the second reach mode is executed.

Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, the display is controlled so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) by one frame off as the first reach mode, and the stop of the first reach mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol displayed as stopped (temporary stop) when one frame is off (temporary stop) is not displayed. The second reach mode of variable display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is executed. In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame off stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed. It is possible to pattern the symbol array.

Then, in this alternative example, as the symbol array corresponding to the second reach mode, the symbol array corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode is stored in advance for each of the symbol arrays L5 to L7. Therefore, the second reach mode is configured to be feasible corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. As a result, when the second reach mode is executed using a part of the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode, the effect can be executed without delay.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 243 (b) to 244 (b), the content of the composite reach effect in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a state in which the symbol variation in the left-right direction is executed in the composite reach effect, and FIG. 244 (a) is a main display area Dm in the composite reach effect. FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the area displayed in is changed, and FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the symbol change in the vertical direction is executed in the composite reach effect. is there. In this composite reach effect, the symbol variation in the left-right direction (normal symbol variation) using the symbol sequences L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 243 (b)), and then the display area is displayed in the main display area Dm. A reach effect (first reach mode) in which the symbol sequence is changed upward or downward is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 244 (a)), and the fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) of the symbols is changed from the left-right direction to the up-down direction. The reach effect (second reach mode) changed to the above is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 244 (b)), and the effect is composed of a total of 30 seconds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) by the combination indicating the deviation in the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm. )Is displayed. At this point, fluctuation control (update the fluctuation data according to the progress (elapsed time) of the fluctuation time) of the symbol sequence (L4, L8) that is not displayed in the main display area Dm is executed. That is, when the compound reach effect is executed, first, the execution of the fluctuation control is started for all the symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to the symbol variation in the left-right direction, and the main display is among them. Fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed for the symbol strings (L1 to L3) displayed in the area Dm, and for the symbol strings (L4, L8) set outside the main display area Dm. , 20 seconds (the period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 244 (a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, even for the symbol string that is not displayed in the main display area Dm, by executing the fluctuation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect, the symbol string displayed in the main display area Dm is changed, and a new symbol string is created. When displaying the symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence L4 or L8), the display can be performed without delay.

In the example shown in FIG. 243 (b), the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is located at the center position of the symbol row L1 and at the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary stop is temporarily displayed in the stopped (temporary stop) disengagement display mode (first temporary stop mode). When the deviation variation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the deviation display mode shown in FIG. 243 (b), and the symbol variation ends.

Then, a suggestion effect suggesting that the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed while the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode (for example, FIG. 82 (b)). As shown in the above, an effect suggesting that the display form of the character attached to the third symbol is changed to change the display area, and a display suggesting that the display area is changed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area), and the first temporary stop mode (1st temporary stop mode). (See FIG. 243 (b)), the symbol sequence L3 displayed in the main display area Dm has moved out of the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop mode, which was a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating disengagement, the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is a symbol sequence. It will be displayed in the reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right position of the symbol string L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol sequence) displayed by the main display area Dm, the player can be hit from the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that is once thought to be out of alignment. Since it is possible to change to the reach display mode (first reach mode) in which the player can expect the hit, it is possible to continue to have the expectation for the hit even after the third symbol indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed. It is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

In this alternative example, the third symbol of the first temporary stop mode (each third symbol displayed in FIG. 243 (b)) reaches by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. Since the effect (first reach mode) is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a feasible combination, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward, but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is changed. When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination in which the reach effect (first reach mode) can be executed by moving it downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. The process is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upper or lower), a combination of the third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. Can be increased.

That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable in only one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is performed in order to execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same third symbol in a row in the symbol row displayed on the upper side and the center of the main display area Dm, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower). When the configuration is used, it is the same as either the symbol row displayed above and in the center of the main display area Dm before movement or the symbol row displayed below and in the center of the main display area Dm before movement. By displaying the third symbol in a row, the reach effect (first reach mode) can be executed in the display area after the movement, so that the third symbol that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode can be displayed. It is possible to increase the number of combinations of the above, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting whether or not the symbol variation develops into the first reach mode, that is, the symbol variation effect to be executed in the future. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 244 (a), the third symbol (the number 1 is added) to the right position of the symbol string L4, which is the target of the reach effect, is attached (“elephant”). 3rd symbol with a character imitating "") is displayed as a stop (temporary stop), that is, among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol The third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in FIG. 244 (b)) that is the same as the right position of the row (symbol row L2) and the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) is stopped (temporarily stopped). When stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed in the second temporary stop display mode), as shown in FIG. 244 (b), the symbol displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) at the left position of the symbol rows L1, L2, L4 is a symbol. It is displayed in a variable manner in the vertical direction as column L5.

As a result, the same reach effect as in the second reach mode described in the first modification of the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 227 (a) is executed. The contents of the second reach mode are described above. Since it is the same as the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a composite reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area was changed so that the array was displayed, the first reach mode was made feasible, the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol variation was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be feasible. As a result, it is possible to execute a reach effect having a high effect on the player.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the compound reach effect, when the deviation variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the provisional stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect as when the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped (at least a part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. At the same time, even when the deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the compound reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. The present alternative example is different in that the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed with respect to the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments. The other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 245 (a), the contents of the character storage area 2340a2 in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 2340a2. As shown in FIG. 245 (a), in the character storage area 2340a2, a command for designating a display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113). ), And the display area storage area 2340a2a, which stores the display area corresponding to), and the symbol array used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The arrangement storage area 2340a2b and the other storage area 2340a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

Here, the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 2340a2a. In the display area storage area 2340a2a, as display area types, the display area 1 (reference area) in which the symbol arrays L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm and the symbol arrays L1, L2, and L4 are in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on the command for designating the display area of (display area change information included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113).

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. , The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display variation pattern command. .. Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 149), a drawing list is created for the symbol string corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. doing. As a result, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol string to be displayed. In this case, among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 2340a2a, a flag (storage area) for determining the currently set display area type is provided, and the determination is executed with reference to the flag. Good.

Next, the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (c). FIG. 245 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b. In the symbol array storage area 2340a2b, a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a symbol array for vertical scrolling used when the second reach mode is executed are stored. Has been done. The symbol array for vertical scrolling includes a symbol array (for vertical scrolling 1) corresponding to the symbol array L5 (see FIG. 243 (a)) and a symbol array corresponding to the symbol array L6 (see FIG. 243 (a)). When the vertical scrolling 2) and the symbol array (vertical scrolling 3) corresponding to the symbol string L7 (see FIG. 243 (a)) are stored and the second reach mode is executed for each. The symbol array corresponding to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in is stored.

Specifically, as a symbol array of 1 for vertical scrolling (symbol string L5), when the second reach mode is executed, the third symbol with the number 1 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the reach-out display mode. When the "symbol array 1" to the second reach mode set in the case of (see FIG. 226) are executed, the third symbol with the number 9 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the reach-out display mode. Nine types up to the "symbol array 9" that is set when the above is set are set. In this alternative example, the display mode (first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) when the second reach mode is executed is set to be the predetermined stop mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of vertically scrolling symbol arrangement types stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 2340a2b.

Similar to the symbol arrangements 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertically scrolling 1 (symbol sequence L5), the vertical scrolling 2 (symbol sequence L6) and the vertical scrolling 3 (symbol sequence L7) are also used, respectively. Nine kinds of symbol arrangements are set. When the third symbol, which is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (vertically scrolled display), the first temporary stop mode is 2 This is a case where the third symbol of the type is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment in a state where the third symbol of the type is in the reach state (so-called double reach state).

In this way, by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (the reach mode executed after changing the fluctuation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol), the second reach mode is delayed. Can be executed without. Further, by predetermining the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode, it is possible to reduce the types of symbol arrangements used when executing the second reach mode. ..

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pointer update process 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 246. The pointer update process 2 differs from the pointer update process (Y7205 in FIG. 146) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pointer update process 2 (Y7205). When the pointer update process 2 (Y7205) is executed, first, the same process as Y7401 of the pointer update process (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and then it is determined whether it is the timing when the display area is changed. (Y7341). When it is determined in the processing of Y7341 that it is the timing to change the display area (Y73431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 2340a2a (Y73432). , The determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (Y7433). Then, it shifts to Y7402.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y7341 that it is not the timing when the display area is changed, the processing of Y7432 and Y7433 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y7402. In Y7402 to Y7406, the same processing as in Y7402 to Y7406 of the pointer update processing (see FIG. 146) described above is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in another example of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, as a composite reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol arrangement is used. The display area is changed so that is displayed, the first reach mode can be executed, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol variation is changed. The two reach modes are configured to be feasible. As a result, it is possible to execute a reach effect having a high effect on the player. In this alternative example, two types of fluctuation directions of the symbol row are set, that is, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but the symbol row may be configured to be changed in other directions.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the compound reach effect, when the deviation variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the provisional stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect as when the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped (at least a part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. At the same time, even when the deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the compound reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the symbol string data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol string data used when executing the second reach mode are stored and set differently, they are stored for each symbol string. By combining the data, various effects can be executed. In addition, the first combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the combination of symbols set in the symbol sequence used in the second reach mode match. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player when switching the effect mode from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

It should be noted that the display control of each symbol string (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode is executed while the display control of each symbol string (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is executed. May be executed in advance. In this case, a layer on which the display of the first reach mode is executed and a layer on which the display of the second reach mode is executed are separately provided, and the display of the second reach mode is displayed in the state where the first reach mode is executed. It may be controlled so that the person cannot see it, and the display control of each layer may be switched at the timing when the second reach mode is executed so that the player can see the second reach mode.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed at the same time is used has been described. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display the fluctuations of the special symbol (special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) and the ordinary symbol, and the technique described in each of the above-described embodiments may be applied. In this case, it is possible to achieve more effect by making the privilege executed when the special symbol is won as a result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol to the same privilege as the privilege executed when the special symbol is won. it can.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. Since the seventh embodiment uses the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as the fourth embodiment described above, each element of the game board 13 has the same reference numerals as the fourth embodiment described above. Is added, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fourth embodiment described above, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpots B and D (see FIG. 152)) is won as a condition for transitioning to the latent state that is most advantageous for the player (first transition condition). ) And a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)), and after the jackpot, the number of lottery of special symbols exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without winning the jackpot. If (second transition condition) is provided, there are multiple opportunities to transition to the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player. Further, the above-mentioned plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (the timing at which the jackpot is won and the game state is set, and the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the game state is set). , It was configured so that the player could continue to have the expectation of shifting to the latent state.

However, in the fourth embodiment described above, even if either the first transition condition or the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the same latent state is performed, so that the operation can be performed during the latent state. There was a problem that it was not possible to make a difference between advantages and disadvantages other than the number of lottery of special symbols.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the special symbol changes depending on the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied and the latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied. The game state (latent state) that is configured so that the pattern (variation time) is different and is advantageous for the player is the first latent state (latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and the game state (latent state). , The second latent state (the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied), which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state, can be set.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

First, with reference to FIG. 247, the flow of the game state transition in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state transition in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 247, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shifts to three gaming states (normal state, probabilistic state, and latent state) like the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured.

In the seventh embodiment, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different from that of the fourth embodiment described above (first difference), and when the jackpot D is won and the state shifts to the latent state ( When the first transition condition is satisfied) and when the number of lottery of special symbols exceeds the specified number (100 times) in the probabilistic state and the state shifts to the latent state (when the second transition condition is satisfied). The difference is that different latent states are set in (second difference), and the flow of game state transition is the same as that of the fourth embodiment described above, so detailed explanation is omitted. To do.

A detailed explanation of the first difference described above will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 (a), but in the seventh embodiment, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player after a big hit with respect to the fourth embodiment described above. The rate at which the normal state is set and the rate at which the probability change state is set again after the jackpot in the probability change state are set to be high, and the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot, is set. The ratio is set to be low.

A detailed description of the above-mentioned second difference will be described later with reference to FIGS. 249 (b) and 250, but in the seventh embodiment, the latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied (the latent state (). As the first latent state), a latent state (second latent state) set when the first transition condition is satisfied is provided, and if the fluctuation pattern (variable time) set in each latent state is different. By doing so, the second latent state is configured to win more small hits during the latent state than the first latent state.

Further, in the second latent state, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (big hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is set in the first latent state. By configuring it to be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, it is configured to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot C is won during the second latent state.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, as an opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, an opportunity to shift to the jackpot of the special symbol without winning is provided. It has the effect of continuously increasing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, if the player shifts to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the degree of advantage in the latent state can be different depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is different depending on the opportunity to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has transitioned to the latent state but also the game result. It is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the latent state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result (lottery) and the fluctuation of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result (lottery) are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessively small hit game occurs.

In addition, in the game state (probability change state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the fluctuation ratio between the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is the fluctuation ratio of each special symbol. It is set to differ depending on the fluctuation time set for fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the variation time of each set special symbol, so that the game is played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is often executed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small hit is won with a winning probability lower than the small hit winning probability of the second special symbol. In addition, the small hit winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is larger than the case where the small hit is won with the first special symbol. , It is also possible to provide a small hit game in which it is easier for a ball to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game if the small hit is won by the second special symbol. In this case, when a plurality of small hit games having different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set and the small hit is won by the second special symbol than when the small hit is won by the first special symbol. It is preferable to make the opening period of the variable winning device 65 longer, or to select an opening pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter.

As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit, the small hit will be won even in the game in the normal state. In this case, right-handed notification is executed to indicate to the player that the small hit game is being executed (executed), and until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game elapses. Is preferably configured so that the abnormality notification is not performed even when the right-handed game in the normal state is detected. Specifically, a game state determination means for determining the currently set game state, a lottery result determination means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and a predetermined condition (right-handed in the normal state). An abnormality notification means is provided to notify an abnormality when the game is detected), and it is determined by the game state determination means that a normal state (a game state in which a left-handed game is performed) is set, and the lottery result determination means is used. If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, even if a right-handed game is detected during the normal state, the abnormality notification is not performed by the abnormality notification means, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small. A measuring means for measuring a period during which the identification information (first symbol) indicating a hit is fluctuating or a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game is provided, and the predetermined period is measured by the measuring means. It is advisable to configure so that the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means is not performed even while the abnormality is being measured. As a result, during the game state (normal state) in which the left-handed game is performed, the right-handed game performed by winning the small-hit game in which the right-handed game is performed for a short period of time is performed before the small-hit game is started. Even if it is performed after the small hit game is completed, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In addition, as the right-handed notification mode for guiding the right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability change state, and the latent probability state, and the small hit winning in the normal state A second right-handed notification mode is provided based on the second right-handed notification mode, and the first right-handed notification mode is configured to be a notification mode (emphasized notification mode) that is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Then it is good. As a result, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and the player can easily understand the game.

In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized on the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is preferable to use a display mode in which a display mode is added. As a result, the player can easily grasp the degree of emphasis in the plurality of notification modes. It should be noted that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the jackpot state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state. Further, any notification mode may be used to guide the right-handed game to the player, and in addition to the display mode, a light emitting mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the voice output device 226 may be used. A synthetic notification mode in which they are combined may be used.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 2020 and the RAM 2030 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 251. First, the contents of the ROM 2020 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 2020 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), in the ROM 2020 of the seventh embodiment, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 2020 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the variation pattern. The difference is that the contents of the selection table 2020f have been partially changed and the variation pattern scenario table 2020h has been added.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 2020d.

The jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the seventh embodiment is the first jackpot type selection table 2020d (see FIG. 160 (a)) in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 2020d used in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value of the hit type counter C2 is changed and the content of the number of time reductions given in the jackpot B, which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 1, is changed. Other than that, it is the same as the fourth embodiment described above, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type and the first hit. When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 69", the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 89", the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the conditions for granting the number of time reductions when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type are the same as when the jackpot A is selected. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the jackpot type in which the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is completed is the jackpot D (selection ratio 10). %) Only, and the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that of the fourth embodiment described above. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege (prize ball) due to the second latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is " In the case of "45 to 49", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 2020d of the seventh embodiment, will be described. This jackpot H is a jackpot in which a jackpot game of two rounds (R) is executed, and the same opening pattern as the small hit game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. .. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game having the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by grasping the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit). It can be difficult to identify the game).

Therefore, for example, when a hit game is executed during the latent probability state, is the hit game a hit game (that is, a jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game (that is, a small hit game) in which the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not changed, the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be played while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability / time saving state) is set to 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic change state continues (120 times). When the special figure fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probabilistic state, the game state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a big hit in the special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the interest of the game can be set. Can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability / time saving state) is 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic change state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpots X, Y, and Z are provided as jackpot types, and different time reduction times (for example, 1 time, 20 times, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of the transition to the latent state when the transition to the probabilistic state occurs, so that the player can continue to expect the transition to the latent state. Can be held.

Further, in this case, the game shifts to a more latent state by providing a jackpot type in which the jackpot game contents (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot are the same and the number of time reductions is different. The timing can be obscured by the player. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the remaining number suggestion notification for suggesting the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery count) until the transition to the latent probable state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the transition to the latent state, so that the expectation for the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery number) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified numerically may be used, or a series of stories are continuously displayed. , You may use the period suggestion mode that suggests the period until the story shifts to the latent state by using the period until the story is completed.

In addition, a mini game (for example, a game in which the result is variable by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed during the game, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed or the remaining number suggestion is performed. It may be configured to change the notification mode of the notification. Further, if the configuration does not perform the remaining number of times suggestion notification, for example, when a big hit is won during the probability change state, the remaining number of times until the transition to the latent probability state may be notified.

Further, even if it is configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change (lottery) executed at the end of the probability change state and the special symbol change (lottery) executed at the beginning of the latent state. good. In this case, as the variable display mode, the display mode used to suggest the winning expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2020f of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (b). FIG. 248 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 2020f. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the seventh embodiment, the latent accuracy table 2020f (see FIG. 160 (b)) of the fourth embodiment described above is replaced with the latent accuracy table b2020fb4. The difference is that the table Ca2020fc2 and the latent confirmation table Cb2020fc3 are provided.

Here, each variation pattern table provided in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, and FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic view of the contents specified in the latent confirmation table Cb2020fc3. It is a schematic diagram shown in.

The latent probability table Ca2020fc2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to during the period in which the first latent probability state is set, and as shown in FIG. 250 (a), the symbol type, the pass / fail judgment result, and the hold. A fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) to 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds) is defined according to the number of balls. The contents specified in the latent confirmation table Ca2020fc2 are the same as the contents specified in the latent confirmation table b2020fc2 of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 162 (b)), and a detailed description thereof will be given. Is omitted.

The latency table Cb2020fc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to during the period in which the second latency state is set, and as shown in FIG. 250 (b), the symbol type, the hit / fail judgment result, and the hold. A fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) to 7 seconds (7000 milliseconds) is defined according to the number of balls. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is 1 hit (big hit type is jackpot C), the hit fluctuation (variation time 7 seconds) is defined. If the hit / fail judgment result is 2 hits (big hit types are jackpots A, B, D), the hit short variation (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified, and the hit / fail judgment result in Special Figure 1 is In the case of deviation, the deviation short fluctuation (variation time 7 seconds) is specified.

Further, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the number of reserved balls is 0, 1, the hit regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1. Short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second) is associated, and when the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the short fluctuation B (variation time 0.7 seconds) is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is. Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit and the number of reserved balls is 0, 1, the hit short variation A (variation time 1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of reserved balls is associated. When is 2 or 3, the short variation B (variation time 0.7 seconds) is specified regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is out of order, the out-of-order short variation A (variation time 1 second) is associated with the number of reserved balls and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the seventh embodiment (game characteristics different from those of the fourth embodiment described above) will be described. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the first latent state and the second latent state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state, can be set as the latent state. .. Specifically, as described above, the variation time of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 defined in the latency table Cb2020fc3 is shorter than that of the latency table Ca2020fc2.

With this configuration, the number of lottery of Special Figure 2 (Special Figure 2 that executes a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than Special Figure 1) that can win a small hit in the second latent probability state is set to the first latent probability. Since it can be increased more than the state, it is possible to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player.

Further, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 referred to during the second latent probability state, if the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), A fluctuation pattern (hit fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is selected. This 7-second fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation time (0.7 seconds to 1 second) specified for each fluctuation pattern set based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). When the jackpot C is won in the lottery of 1 special symbol (special figure 1), it is possible to change the special figure 2 a plurality of times during the change of the special figure 1.

Then, in the seventh embodiment, 1/80 is a big hit (see FIG. 90 (a)) and 221/480 is a small hit (see FIG. 90 (a)) in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the latent state as in the third embodiment described above. Since it is stipulated to be (see FIG. 90 (b)), it is set to win a big hit or a small hit every time the lottery of Special Figure 2 is executed 2-3 times. Further, in the seventh embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment described above, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changing, one of them changes depending on the stop symbol of the big hit or the small hit. When stopped, the other variable display is configured to be stopped and displayed with the out-of-order stop symbol regardless of the remaining variable time or the lottery result. Further, when a big hit is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 during the latent state, the latent state is set again after the big hit, as in the third embodiment described above (FIG. 160). See (a)).

According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is a jackpot). Even if C) is won, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is a big hit or a small hit is stopped and displayed before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, when the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to a disadvantageous state based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the second latent state can be further changed. It is possible to make the game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special hit (big hit type is jackpot C) that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol is won. Since there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being continuously drawn multiple times while the symbol is fluctuating, a right-handed game is played against the player. Can be positively encouraged, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a is pre-read and it is determined that the pre-reading result includes the winning information in which the jackpot C is won, a game to that effect is played. It may be configured to notify the person. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know whether or not it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. You can get the reserved balls of 1 special symbol and 2 special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is not executed after the end of the small hit.

The variation pattern scenario table 2020h is a data table that is referred to when setting the variation pattern, and a plurality of variation pattern scenarios (scenarios 1 to 3) are defined in association with the gaming state set after the big hit. There is. In the fluctuation pattern scenario, a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in association with the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of a special symbol is defined, and it is set when actually selecting a fluctuation pattern. Among the fluctuation pattern scenarios, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the lottery (number of fluctuations) of this special symbol is used for selection.

By providing the variation pattern scenario in this way, it is possible to grasp in advance the period for continuously referencing one variation pattern table and the timing for switching the reference variation pattern table. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM of the main control device 110, the set variation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga, and the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is used. , The fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020h is provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the setting information (scenario command) of the fluctuation pattern scenario is mainly provided. It is configured to transmit from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to grasp the period for continuously referencing one fluctuation pattern table on the voice lamp control device 113 side and the timing for switching the reference fluctuation pattern table. It may be configured as.

With this configuration, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be executed in the future. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern is executed during the execution of the effect (for example, continuous effect) to be executed across a plurality of fluctuations. It is possible to suppress a problem that the scenario is switched and a difference occurs between the production mode of the continuous production and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) actually set. In this case, specifically, the remaining period (special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations)) of the period (for example, the probability variation state period) in which the same fluctuation pattern scenario is continuously referred to is a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol lottery). When it is determined that (the number of fluctuations) is the remaining 3 times), the continuous effect executed over 3 times or more of the special symbol fluctuations may be configured so as not to be newly set.

Further, the fluctuation pattern currently set and the fluctuation pattern set next may be discriminated, and the continuous effect corresponding to the discriminant result may be made executable. Specifically, it fluctuates with reference to the currently set fluctuation pattern table (for example, a fluctuation pattern table that selects a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified whenever the lottery result of a special symbol is out of order). The remaining number of times to select a pattern is 2, and then the fluctuation pattern table to be set next (for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified is always selected. , When the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation pattern for which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified is always selected. When selecting the fluctuation pattern, the special symbol based on the look-ahead information is selected. Based on the hit / fail determination result and the setting information of the fluctuation pattern scenario, it is possible to set the continuous effect for 9 seconds.

Next, the variation pattern scenario table 2020h will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (b). FIG. 249 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020h. In the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern table actually referred to from the plurality of variation pattern tables of the variation pattern selection table 2020f is defined by the scenario according to the game state and the number of lottery (variation number) of special symbols after the end of the jackpot. ing.

Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 1) that is set when the game state changes after the jackpot, the number of lottery (variation) of special symbols after the jackpot ends is "1 to 100". The period of "101-120", that is, the period in which the probabilistic state is set as the game state is defined by the probability variation table 2020fb3, that is, the period in which the latent state is set as the game state. , The latent probability table Ca2020fc2 is specified, the normal table Bb2020fb2 is specified for the period of "121-122", the normal table Cb2020fb5 is specified for the period of "123-128", and the period of "129-" is specified. Is defined as a normal table A2020f1. Of the fluctuation pattern tables defined here, the contents of the probability variation table 2020fb3, the normal table Bb2020fb2, the normal table Cb2020fb5, and the normal table A2020f1 are the same as those in the third embodiment described above. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 set when the gaming state shifts to the latent probability state while the scenario 1 is set as the fluctuation pattern scenario is as described above with reference to FIG. 250 (a). Of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables that can be referred to during the probability state, this is a fluctuation pattern table that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when the scenario 1 is set, the first latent state is set as the latent state.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 2) that is set when the game state becomes the latent state after the big hit, the number of lottery (variation) of the special symbol after the big hit is "1-120". In the period of, that is, the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the latent probability table Cb2020fc3 is defined, and in the period of "121 to 122", the normal table Bb2020fb2 is defined, and "123 to 128". The normal table Cb2020fb5 is specified for the period of, and the normal table A2020f1 is specified for the period of "129 to".

The latent probability table Cb2020fc3, which is set when the gaming state shifts to the latent state while scenario 2 is set as the variation pattern scenario, is in the latent state as described above with reference to FIG. 250 (b). Among the plurality of variation pattern tables that can be referred to therein, this is a variation pattern table that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the scenario 2 is set, the second latent state is set as the latent state.

In this way, even when the same gaming state (latent state) is set, the fluctuation pattern table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. By making it different depending on the gaming state, that is, depending on the transition trigger until the transition to the latent state, the gaming state (second latent state) that is advantageous to the same gaming state (latent state) and the disadvantageous state are more disadvantageous than that. A game state (first latent state) can be provided.

In this embodiment, in the same gaming state, in order to change the degree of advantage based on the transition trigger until the transition to the gaming state, a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is different is used. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the lottery probability of the special symbol may be changed based on the transition opportunity of the game state, or the lottery result of the special symbol may be a specific lottery result (a privilege is given to the player). In the award game executed when the lottery result (for example, small hit, big hit) can be given), the closing period or opening of the winning device (for example, the variable winning device 65) in which the ball can be won during the award game. The period may be changed, or a plurality of winning devices capable of winning a ball during the privilege game may be provided, and the winning devices to be opened during the privilege game may be different.

In the fluctuation pattern scenario (scenario type is scenario 3) that is set when the game state becomes the normal state after the big hit, the period when the number of lottery (variation) of special symbols after the big hit is "1" is normal. The table A2020f1 is specified.

Next, the details of the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 251 the RAM 2030 of the seventh embodiment is different in that the scenario storage area 2030ga is added to the RAM 2030 of the third embodiment described above, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The scenario storage area 2030ga is an area for temporarily storing the fluctuation pattern scenario selected by using the fluctuation pattern scenario table 2020h. In this scenario storage area 2030ga, the variation pattern scenario selected in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 255) is stored (Y2353 in FIG. 255), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252), or the first 2 In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIGS. 253 and 254), the stored variation pattern scenario is read out (Y551 in FIG. 252, Y1151 in FIG. 253, Y1251 and Y1253 in FIG. 254), and the read variation pattern scenario is used. A variation pattern table is selected based on (Y552 in FIG. 252, Y1152 in FIG. 253, Y1252, Y1254 in FIG. 254).

Although detailed description is omitted, the variable pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is cleared when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. Further, when the RAM erase switch is operated to initialize (reset) the contents of the RAM 2030 of the main control device 110, the initial setting of the RAM (Y1912 in FIG. 118) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118) is performed. ), Scenario 3 is set as the scenario type.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 252 to 255. The control process of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment described above in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 252) and the second. The difference is that the contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253), the special figure 2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 254), and the jackpot end process (see FIG. Processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the seventh embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern scenario. Then, different fluctuation pattern scenarios are selected according to the game state set after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, different fluctuation pattern scenarios can be set in the state where the latent state is set. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in which the latent probability state is set after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot change state is set after the jackpot ends, the number of lottery (variation) of special symbols is performed without winning the jackpot during the jackpot change state. The number of times) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the variation referred to during the latent state is configured to select a different variation pattern scenario depending on the case where the gaming state shifts to the latent state. The pattern table can be different.

Then, since the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern table (latent table Ca2020fc2, latent probability table Cb2020fc3) referred to during the latent probability state is configured to be different, the latent probability It is possible to make the execution condition of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that performs the lottery that is advantageous to the player during the state different. Further, in the latent probability table Cb2020fc3, the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot (big hit C), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other jackpots, is won among the jackpots of the special symbol. Since it is made longer than the other fluctuation patterns, it is possible to execute other games a plurality of times before the game based on the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y307) is executed, in each of the processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 104) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment, when the process of Y503 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y551), and the read variation is read. The variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y552), and the process proceeds to Y505. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y505.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment. When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y805) is executed, in each of the processes Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105-Y1109, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of Y1101 to Y1104 and Y1105 to Y1109 are executed. Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment, when the process of Y1104 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1151), and the read variation is read. The variation pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1152), and the process proceeds to Y1105. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1105.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (Y1107 in FIG. 253) executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 253) in the seventh embodiment. is there. When the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process is executed, in each of the processes Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209, the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process according to the third embodiment (see FIG. 111). The same processes as those of Y1201 to Y1203, Y1205 to Y1206, and Y1208 to Y1209 are executed. Further, in the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment, when the process of Y1203 is completed, the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1251), and the read variation is read. A variable pattern table corresponding to the pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1252), and the process proceeds to Y1205. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1205.

Further, in the processing of Y1201, when it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a small hit (Y1201: No), the stored variation pattern scenario is read from the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y1253) and read. The variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario and the game state is selected (Y1254), and the process proceeds to Y1208. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, the variation pattern is selected by the processing of Y1208.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga is read and read out. The fluctuation pattern table is selected based on the fluctuation pattern scenario and the current game state (or the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of special symbols), and the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern table. ing.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (Y2112) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end processing in the seventh embodiment is different from the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 122) in the third embodiment described above in that the jackpot type for which the value is set in the time saving counter 2030 g is different, and the fluctuation pattern scenario. The difference is that the process of selecting is added, and the same process is executed except for that. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process (Y2112) is executed, first, the processes of Y2301 to Y2304 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and when it is determined that the process of Y2304 is not in the latent state (Y2304: No). , It is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot this time is jackpot D (Y2350). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot is not D (Y2350: No), then 100 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 2030 g (Y2351), and the process proceeds to Y2307.

On the other hand, in the processing of Y2350, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (Y2350: Yes), the processing of Y2351 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Y2307. Then, the processes Y2307 to Y2308 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above, and then the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state specified in the process of Y2301 is selected from the variation pattern scenario table 2020h (Y2352) and selected. The changed fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 2030ga (Y2353), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot D (see FIG. 247)) is won as a condition for shifting to the latent state that is most advantageous for the player. (First transition condition) and a predetermined jackpot other than a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 152)) are won, and after the jackpot, the number of lottery of special symbols is a predetermined number (for example) without winning the jackpot. When the number exceeds 100 times (100 times) (when the number of lottery of special symbols exceeds the specified number of times (100 times) in the probability change state) (second transition condition), the game state (submarine) which is most advantageous for the player is provided. It was configured so that there would be multiple opportunities to move to a certain state). Further, the above-mentioned plurality of transition conditions are satisfied at different timings (the timing at which the jackpot is won and the game state is set, and the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the game state is set). , It is configured so that the player can continue to have the expectation to shift to the latent state, and further, the latent state set when the first transition condition is satisfied and the second transition The first submarine is configured so that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the latent state set when the condition is satisfied, and the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is selected. A certain state (a latent state set when the second transition condition is satisfied) and a second latent state (when the first transition condition is satisfied) which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent state. It is possible to set the latent state to be set).

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the gaming state shifts to the latent state, but also to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since an opportunity is provided to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, without winning a big hit of a special symbol, the player's motivation to play is continuously increased. It has the effect of being able to. Furthermore, if the player shifts to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the degree of advantage in the latent state can be different depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In addition, since the degree of advantage in the latent state is different depending on the opportunity to shift to the latent state, not only the game result of whether or not the player has transitioned to the latent state but also the game result. It is possible to pay attention to the opportunity to shift to the latent state, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the latent state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result (lottery) and the fluctuation of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result (lottery) are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessively small hit game occurs.

In addition, in the game state (probability change state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the fluctuation ratio between the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) is the fluctuation ratio of each special symbol. It is set to differ depending on the fluctuation time set for fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the variation time of each set special symbol, so that the game is played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is often executed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small hit is won with a winning probability lower than the small hit winning probability of the second special symbol. In addition, the small hit winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is larger than the case where the small hit is won with the first special symbol. , It is also possible to provide a small hit game in which it is easier for a ball to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game if the small hit is won by the second special symbol. In this case, when a plurality of small hit games having different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set and the small hit is won by the second special symbol than when the small hit is won by the first special symbol. It is preferable to make the opening period of the variable winning device 65 longer, or to select an opening pattern that makes it easier for the ball to enter.

As described above, if the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit, the small hit will be won even in the game in the normal state. In this case, right-handed notification is executed to indicate to the player that the small hit game is being executed (executed), and until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the end of the small hit game elapses. Is preferably configured so that the abnormality notification is not performed even when the right-handed game in the normal state is detected.

In addition, as the right-handed notification mode for guiding the right-handed game to the player, the first right-handed notification mode set during the big hit, the probability change state, and the latent probability state, and the small hit winning in the normal state A second right-handed notification mode is provided based on the second right-handed notification mode, and the first right-handed notification mode is configured to be a notification mode (emphasized notification mode) that is more easily noticed by the player than the second right-handed notification mode. Then it is good. As a result, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player by performing the right-handed game can be associated with the right-handed notification mode, and the player can easily understand the game.

In this case, specifically, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the first right-handed notification mode is emphasized on the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the second right-handed notification mode. It is preferable to use a display mode in which a display mode is added. As a result, the player can easily grasp the degree of emphasis in the plurality of notification modes. It should be noted that the notification mode for guiding the right-handed game may be different between the jackpot state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state. Further, any notification mode may be used to guide the right-handed game to the player, and in addition to the display mode, a light emitting mode by the lamp display device 227 or a voice output mode by the voice output device 226 may be used. A synthetic notification mode in which they are combined may be used.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the conditions for granting the number of time reductions when the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type are the same as when the jackpot A is selected. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the jackpot type in which the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is completed is the jackpot D (selection ratio 10). %) Only, and the ratio of transition from the normal state to the latent state (second latent state) is lower than that of the fourth embodiment described above. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege (prize ball) due to the second latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability / time saving state) is 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic state continues (120 times). When the special figure fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot, the game state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a big hit in the special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the interest of the game can be set. Can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions set when the state shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability / time saving state) is 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probabilistic change state continues (120 times). Other configurations may be used. For example, jackpots X, Y, and Z are provided as jackpot types, and different time reduction times (for example, 1 time, 20 times, 40 times) are specified for each jackpot type. Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of the transition to the latent state when the transition to the probabilistic state occurs, so that the player can continue to expect the transition to the latent state. Can be held.

Further, in this case, the game shifts to a more latent state by providing a jackpot type in which the jackpot game contents (for example, the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot are the same and the number of time reductions is different. The timing can be obscured by the player. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the remaining number suggestion notification for suggesting the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery count) until the transition to the latent probable state may be executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the period until the transition to the latent state, so that the expectation for the latent state can be increased. As the remaining number suggestion notification, a remaining number notification mode in which the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery number) until the transition to the latent state is directly notified numerically may be used, or a series of stories are continuously displayed. , You may use the period suggestion mode that suggests the period until the story shifts to the latent state by using the period until the story is completed.

In addition, a mini game (for example, a game in which the result is variable by causing the player to operate the frame button 22) is executed during the game, and based on the result, the remaining number suggestion notification is executed or the remaining number suggestion is performed. It may be configured to change the notification mode of the notification. Further, if the configuration does not perform the remaining number of times suggestion notification, for example, when a big hit is won during the probability change state, the remaining number of times until the transition to the latent probability state may be notified.

Further, even if it is configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change (lottery) executed at the end of the probability change state and the special symbol change (lottery) executed at the beginning of the latent state. good. In this case, as the variable display mode, the display mode used to suggest the winning expectation of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) may be used, or a dedicated display mode may be used.

According to the seventh embodiment configured as described above, when the second latent state is set, a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot type is a jackpot). Even if C) is won, the special symbol (second special symbol) whose lottery result is a big hit or a small hit is stopped and displayed before the special symbol (first special symbol) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. be able to. Therefore, when the second latent state is set, it is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to a disadvantageous state based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the second latent state can be further changed. It is possible to make the game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the right-handed game is not continued in the state where the second latent state is set, the special hit (big hit type is jackpot C) that is disadvantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol is won. Since there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be stopped and displayed without the second special symbol being continuously drawn multiple times while the symbol is fluctuating, a right-handed game is played against the player. Can be positively encouraged, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the winning information stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 2030a is pre-read and it is determined that the pre-reading result includes the winning information in which the jackpot C is won, a game to that effect is played. It may be configured to notify the person. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know whether or not it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the same game board 13 (see FIG. 150) as in the fourth embodiment described above is used, and the right-handed game is performed even during the small hit game. You can get the reserved balls of 1 special symbol and 2 special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is not executed after the end of the small hit.

In the seventh embodiment, both the latent probability table Ca2020fc2 (see FIG. 250 (a)) and the latent confirmation table Cb2020fc3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) are one corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not. Although the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is defined is used, a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times may be specified according to the range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 for the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct. With this configuration, in addition to the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set according to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can be made different. In this case, specifically, in the latent probability table Ca2020fc2, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the winning / failing judgment result is wrong, that is, in the special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player who does not perform the small hit lottery, the winning / failing As the fluctuation patterns selected when the judgment result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than other fluctuation patterns) and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (others). (Fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of), and should be configured to be selected. As a result, the player can be interested in the fluctuation of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the balls are alternately distributed to the ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the ball entry that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. The distribution unit 660 is provided, and the winning information can be reserved only for the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, in order to continuously execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is also executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. However, by performing a right-handed game, there are two entrances, one that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the other that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Any configuration may be used as long as the ball can be inserted. Further, as in the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration may be provided in which the winning information can be reserved for the second special symbol.

In the seventh embodiment, a minimum variation time of 0.5 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, but the ball enters the second entry port regulated by the distribution unit 660 described above. It is preferable to set the fluctuation time longer than the ball interval (0.7 seconds). As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is continuously performing a right-handed game from having a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted.

In the third to seventh embodiments described above, the latent probability state is set to be a gaming state advantageous to the player by configuring the small hit game to occur frequently during the latent probability state, but other methods. May be used to configure a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, an electric accessory 640a that is opened when a lottery result of a normal symbol is won is an attached ball entrance (second entrance). 640) is provided, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the latent state is set longer than when other gaming states are set, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released during one special symbol fluctuation is set. It may be configured to give a privilege to the player by increasing the number.

In addition, when the variable winning device 65 is closed during the small hit game (opening period, ending period, etc.), if the small hit is won during the latent state, it is more than when the variable winning device 65 is won during another game state. It may be set short.

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, the second latent state set when the big hit (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the end of the big hit is won is special without winning the big hit during the probability change state. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first latent state that is set when the lottery of symbols reaches the specified number of times (100 times), but it is advantageous in the game state that is advantageous to the player. It suffices to be configured to subdivide the game state so as to have different degrees. For example, the second latent state set when a big hit (big hit C) that shifts to the latent state after the end of the big hit is won. Rather, the first latent state, which is set when the lottery of special symbols reaches the specified number of times (100 times) without winning a big hit during the probability change state, is configured to be more advantageous to the player. Is also good.

In the seventh embodiment described above, as a condition for setting the first latent probability state, a case where the lottery of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning a big hit during the probability change state is shown. In addition to that, for example, in response to a special symbol lottery executed in a state where a probability variation state is set, a high probability state of a normal symbol (with electric support) to a low probability state of a normal symbol (without electric support) A transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to shift to the state) may be provided, and the first latent probability state may be set when the transition lottery means is won.

In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration in which a period during which the latent probability state can be set (up to 120 times) is set in advance is used, but in addition to this, for example, a high probability state of a special symbol is set. In response to the special symbol lottery executed in the present state, a fall lottery means for executing a fall lottery for shifting (falling) from a high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state of the special symbol is provided, and the fall lottery means is provided. It may be configured to continue the period in which the probability state can be set until the player is elected. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the game state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

In addition, during the period in which the gaming state (second latent state) that is advantageous to the player during the latent state is set, the number of lottery of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, without winning the above-mentioned fall lottery). It may be configured to be set when it exceeds 150 times). As a result, by continuing the state of not winning the fall lottery, it is possible to receive many lottery with a high probability state of the special symbol, and to the game state (second latent state) which is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to raise the degree of transition expectation, and it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery is always a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, but the probability of winning a small hit may be different depending on the gaming state.

In the third to seventh embodiments described above, a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be drawn (variable) in parallel is used, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the second In order to make it difficult for the special symbol to be drawn (variable), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. 2. As the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the fluctuation time that can be selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol only when the jackpot is won, or the fluctuation time shorter than that may be selected. With this configuration, the second special symbol, which accidentally played a right-handed game during the normal state and started to fluctuate, shows a big hit after a long time (for example, 10 minutes later) (third). It is possible to prevent the situation where the jackpot game is started by stopping at the symbol).

In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the small hit is won, and the small hit game is started after the long fluctuation, the small hit game is started at the timing when the small hit game is started. If it is determined whether or not the game is being performed (determining whether or not the demo is waiting) and it is determined that the game is not being performed (demo waiting), what is the normal small hit game display? It may be configured to display different standby small hit display modes. With this configuration, even if the player stops the game during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hit game is started in a state where the game is not played (demo display state), it is different from the usual one. Since the small hit display mode during standby is displayed, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort.

As the waiting small hit display mode, it is desirable that the display mode does not emphasize that the small hit game is being performed rather than the display mode displayed during the normal small hit game. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the small hit game is being performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player who plays the game only during the small hit game to play the game.

Each configuration used in the third to seventh embodiments described above (contents of various tables, each element of the control flow of the main control device 110, each element of the control flow of the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114). (Each element of the control flow) may be appropriately combined, and for example, an area for storing the holding ball of the second special symbol may be provided for the configuration used in the third embodiment (see the fourth embodiment). ), When one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (until the jackpot ends), and the other is temporarily stopped after the jackpot ends. A configuration (see the fourth embodiment) for resuming the fluctuation of the special symbol of the above may be used.

Further, in the configuration (simultaneous variation configuration) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol described in the third to seventh embodiments described above can be drawn (variable) in parallel, one of the special symbols When it is determined that the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, jackpot) (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 103) executed during the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 102)). In the case where it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (see Y405 in FIG. 103)), a restriction determination means for executing the restriction determination so that the jackpot is not won when the other special symbol starts to fluctuate newly is provided. It may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the winning result is discarded even though the jackpot is won. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read as a jackpot, and (corresponding to the jackpot winning) in advance. It is possible to suppress a defect when performing a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot was won (before the change of the special symbol to be performed is started).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol (state with electric support) is set is the sum of the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for a predetermined period (for example, the number of changes). A configuration is used in which the number of times is set as a predetermined number of times (the period until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times)), but other configurations may be used. , The period until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (total number of fluctuations) reaches 100 (first period), or the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (30 times). It may be configured to be set until it reaches any period of the period until it reaches (the second period). With this configuration, when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, how should the game be performed in order to quickly shift to the game state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player? For example, a game aiming to enter the first ball entrance 64, which is a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, or a game aiming to enter the second ball entrance 640, which is a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. Since the player can play the game while predicting which one to perform), there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, in this case, in the probabilistic state as in each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entry port (for example, the second ball entry port 640) that facilitates the entry of the ball and the ball even when the game state is changed. When the game state is changed as the end condition of the high probability state (the state with electric support) of the normal symbol by providing the ball entry port (for example, the first ball entry port 64) in which the ease of entering the ball is not variable. Even so, the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of a single special symbol (first special symbol) triggered by the entrance where the ease of entering the ball is not variable reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). It is advisable to set an end condition in which the condition is satisfied when it is determined that the condition has been achieved.

With this configuration, in the probabilistic state, a game (first game) aiming at the entrance where the ball is difficult to enter is performed in order to quickly shift to the latent probable state, or the ball is in the probabilistic state. A game (second game) is performed aiming at the ball entrance that makes it easier to enter the ball, and the player selects whether to play advantageously in the probabilistic state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

When the above-described configuration is used, when the probability variation state is set, the condition for shifting to the latent probability state in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol (with electric support) It is preferable to provide an end condition display means for displaying the end condition of the state) and a progress display means for displaying how much the current game status is progressing with respect to the end condition displayed by the end condition display means. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a guideline for the player to select the game content to be performed during the probabilistic state.

The end condition displayed by the above-mentioned end condition display means and the progress status displayed by the progress status display means may be a display mode showing a specific value (variation of each special symbol (number of lottery)) or end. It may be a suggestion mode that suggests a condition or progress. Further, the end condition displayed by the end condition display means based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player during the probability change state, and the lottery content of the special symbol or the normal symbol. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide a display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the progress status displayed by the progress status display means to a display mode that is easy for the player to grasp.

Further, as described above, in the probabilistic state, based on the number of lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol (state with electric support) When the end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol in the probability variation state are configured so as not to make a large difference. Then it is good. As a result, each special symbol can be changed according to the game (first game, second game) selected by the player, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. effective.

In addition to the above-mentioned example, an element other than the number of fluctuations may be set as an end condition of a high probability state (state with electric support) of a normal symbol, for example, the number of times a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery. , The end condition may be that the number of operations of the V winning device 650, which operates when the small hit game is executed, reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Further, only a part of the above-mentioned many end conditions may be used, or each may be appropriately combined.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned example, as a condition for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol, a fall lottery means for executing a fall lottery for shifting (falling) from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state of the special symbol is provided. , It is advisable to provide a configuration so that the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol is satisfied when the fall lottery means is won. As a result, the period in which the game state (latent state), which is advantageous to the player, is started and the period in which the game state ends can be changed according to the content of the game, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. Can be done. In addition, at least a part of the end conditions of the high-probability state (state with electric support) of the normal symbol may be configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. As a result, the period during which the latent state can be set can be set more complicatedly, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation state is set, and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the latent probability state is set. Although the configuration different from the display mode of the effect to be performed has been described, other configurations may be used, for example, when the probability variation state is set and the latency state is set, the execution is performed. The display mode of the effect to be performed may be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the latent probability state is set even though the probability change state is set, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play. When using such a configuration, it is preferable to set the fluctuation pattern so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is appropriately executed even in the probability variation state. For example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is small. In the case of hit or miss, it is preferable to configure so that a fluctuation period slightly longer than or equivalent to the fluctuation pattern set during the latent state is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set gaming state based on the fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

Further, in the state where the probability change state is set, the configuration in which the display mode of the effect executed when the latent probability state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to the above-mentioned high probability state of the normal symbol. It is even better to combine it with a configuration in which a plurality of termination conditions are provided to terminate (with electric support). In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state by providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high probability state (state with electric support) of the normal symbol, and the probabilistic change. In the state where the state is set, the display mode of the effect executed when the latent state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the game in the probabilistic state is executed or the latent state is executed. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the game is being executed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first modification (see FIG. 218) of the third embodiment described above, the period in which the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set is referred to as the first advantageous period. As a configuration that can be set as a second advantageous period that is more advantageous than the first advantageous period, it is configured to refer to different fluctuation pattern tables in the first half and the second half of the latent state, and the first half of the latent state. It was configured so that the player has an advantageous period (second advantageous period) that is more advantageous to the player, but other configurations may be used. For example, the latter half of the latent state is more advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be an advantageous period (second advantageous period). Further, a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is switched so that the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period are alternately switched.

Further, by using the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the fourth embodiment described above as the configuration of the first modification of the third embodiment described above and performing a right-handed game in the latent state, a lottery of the first special symbol is drawn. A distribution unit 660 that can alternately insert balls into the ball entry port (first ball entry port 64) that triggers the ball and the ball entry port (second ball entry port 640) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. It may be provided so that the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period are periodically switched (for example, every time a special symbol lottery (variation) is performed).

With this configuration, for example, when the latent probability state is set, the advantageous state of the latent probability state can be greatly changed depending on which entry port is the first ball entry port. And can perform more complicated games. In this case, the first lottery (variation) of special symbols executed after the latent state is set is the first advantageous period (first variable scenario), and the second is the first advantageous period. It is advisable to provide a variable scenario (second variable scenario) to be executed so that the variable scenario to be executed is different based on the winning jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution mode of the distribution unit 660 from being adjusted in advance so that the latent state becomes more advantageous.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be changed according to the game status even if the hit type is the same)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, privilege game execution means that executes privilege games that are advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and privilege game execution. As a type of award game executed by the means, a type determining means for determining one type of award game from a plurality of predetermined types, and a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine provided with The first variable means and its first variable means that can be changed to an open position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position in which it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, the first variable means and the first variable means after the privilege game is started with respect to the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern. The first variable control means that is variable by any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that has a different period until the open position is changed, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means A second position that can be changed to a first position that allows the ball to enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means and a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable control means and the privilege game are being executed, in which the two variable means and the second variable means are changed in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. When the gaming ball enters the specific area, the gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state after executing the privileged game to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and the specific determination result are obtained. A determination means for determining one variable pattern to be changed by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on a game state at a time point and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. The first variable pattern is such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball-entry means during a period in which the first variable means is variable to the open position can enter the specific region. The two variable patterns are such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is variable to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being present.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a time-saving state that makes it easier to start and win a prize than usual as a bonus after winning. In this conventional gaming machine, after a big hit, the time saving state is given or not, and the time saving period when the time saving state is given is changed according to the gaming state at the time of hitting. There are some that diversify the state of the game and improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if diversity is given in a short period of time, the winning lottery probability is fixed according to the type of winning, so that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved. Was difficult.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Is variable. Based on the result of a specific determination by the determination means, the first variable pattern and the period from the start of the privilege game for the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position. The first variable means is variable by the variable control means in any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which is at least different. The first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means has a specific determination result determined by the second variable control means based on the determination result. It is variable. When the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is executed is set to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. Based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privileged game determined by the type determining means, one variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from a plurality of variable patterns is the determining means. Is determined by. The first variable pattern is configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period when the first variable means is variable to the open position can enter a specific area, and the second variable pattern is a second variable pattern. It is configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period when the variable means is variable to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern.

As a result, the rate at which the first variable pattern that facilitates entry into the specific area is set is variable based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the advantageous gaming state is set can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second variable pattern in which the first variable pattern is more difficult to determine than the first advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that an advantageous gaming state is included at least.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes the first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and the first advantageous gaming state rather than the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous gaming state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when the gaming ball enters a specific area, the game is performed with the expectation that the first advantageous gaming state will be determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous gaming state is a game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. Machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. When the first advantageous gaming state is reached, the advantageous gaming state is likely to be set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction when the first advantageous gaming state is reached.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the gaming state setting means after executing the privilege game is the advantageous game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous than the state, and the game state setting means moves to the specific area during the execution of the privilege game based on the specific determination result obtained in the disadvantageous game state. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, when a ball enters, the ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is higher than the ratio of setting the second advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is executed is set to the disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. Will be done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in an unfavorable game state, the rate at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is determined. It is configured to be higher than the rate at which the second advantageous gaming state is set.

As a result, when the privilege game is executed in the disadvantageous game state, the first advantageous game state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the unfavorable game state.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming state setting means is performing the privilege game based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that when the gaming ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is high.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the privilege game is being executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When a game ball enters a specific area, the ratio of the first advantageous game state being set by the game state setting means is high. Therefore, once the first advantageous game state is reached, a plurality of privilege games are played. It becomes easy to set the first advantageous gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged gaming is continuously completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for the first advantageous gaming state can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming state setting means is the first advantageous gaming when the second advantageous gaming state is set and a specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state is satisfied when a specific condition different from the end of the privileged game is satisfied. Since the first advantageous gaming state is set by the setting means, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous gaming state with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The first variable position in which the game ball can enter into the ball entry discriminating means, the ball entering discriminating means in which the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed when the ball enters the gaming machine A6, and the first variable position thereof. As a variable mode of the third variable means that can be changed to the second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position and the third variable means thereof, the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and the first variable mode thereof. A control means that can be controlled at least in a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than in the first variable mode, and in the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is said by the control means. The gaming machine A7, which is controlled in the second variable mode, is characterized in that the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first variable mode.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entry determination means and a second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. .. As the variable mode of the third variable means, at least the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and the second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable position are controlled by the control means. To. In the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, and in the second advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode.

As a result, in the second advantageous gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the first advantageous gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed, so that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous gaming state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latency by missing support)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means, and the privilege game execution. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the means is completed, the first game state in which the probability of the specific determination result being obtained by the determination means is set as the first probability, and the first game state is higher than the first probability. A gaming state setting means that can at least set a second gaming state set to the second probability and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state and in which the second probability is set, and the game state setting means thereof. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state without triggering the end of the privilege game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by providing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability-changing state in which the probability of winning a lottery is high as a privilege after winning. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined upper limit number of times is set for the number of lottery in the probabilistic state, and if the lottery does not reach the predetermined upper limit number of lottery, the winning is won. In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is a method of shifting to a state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, which is different from the probability change state. If you win in this special state, the game value given to the player will be greater than if you win in the probability change state, so even if the probability change state ends before the hit, the player's motivation for the game will be motivated. It can be maintained (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in the special state set after the probability change state ends, the winning lottery probability becomes the normal probability, so that the lottery probability may be lost over a relatively large number of lottery times. The sex becomes high. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the determination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific determination result. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, the first game state in which the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means is set as the first probability, and the first game state is higher than the first probability. The second gaming state set in the second probability and the third gaming state which is more advantageous than the second gaming state and in which the second probability is set can be at least set by the gaming state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means without triggering the end of the privileged gaming state.

As a result, even if the game is not a privileged game, the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means, so that the player's interest in the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

When the third game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means in the game machine B1, the second game is performed for at least a predetermined number of times including the privilege game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a gaming state in which a probability is set is easily set.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the privileged game Since the continuous state is set by the continuous state setting means, which makes it easy to set the game state in which the second probability is set over the privileged game, the game can be performed with the expectation that the continuous state will be set. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming state setting means ends the privilege game when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than the privilege game is executed in the third game state. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the gaming state after the game to the first gaming state is high.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the award game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the award game is executed in the third gaming state, the award gaming is performed. Since the ratio of the first game state being set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end is high, in the second game state, the game state changing means is used before the privilege game is executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect that the third game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming state setting means is either the second gaming state or the third gaming state when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed. The gaming machine B4, which is characterized in that the above can be set.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed, the second gaming state and the third gaming state are set by the gaming state setting means. Since either of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the privilege game is completed. Therefore, since the gaming state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that the player can be pleased by entering the third gaming state.

A ball-entry means in which discrimination by the discriminating means is executed when a game ball enters in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a first position in which the game ball becomes difficult to enter into the ball-entry means, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means as compared to one position, and the variable means thereof are provided from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine including a variable control means that changes to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second gaming state is more likely to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state. B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry means as compared with the first position. .. The variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The second gaming state is more likely to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state.

As a result, the determination by the determination means can be easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second game state.

Based on the fact that the second gaming state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a counting means for counting the number of consecutive deviation determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state based on the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaches a specific number of times. The gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the setting of the second game state, the counting means counts the number of consecutive deviation determination results that are different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means based on the number of consecutive deviation determination results counted by the counting means reaching a specific number of times.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the deviation discrimination result will be continuous rather than the specific discrimination result, so that a gaming machine having a novel game property can be provided. It has the effect of being able to.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines B1 to B6, a type determination means for determining the type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are included. The ball-possible entry means, the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. 1 The first variable position in which the variable means and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the first variable position thereof are compared with each other. Based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second variable means and the discrimination means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific region, the first variable means and the said As the variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the predetermined variable pattern variable by the variable control means, the first variable means is entered during the period when the first variable means is changed to the open position. At least a first variable pattern that allows a gaming ball that has entered the ball means to enter the specific area and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. The game state setting means is provided with a decidable determining means, and when the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the gaming state after the privilege game is completed is the second. It is set to either the gaming state or the third gaming state, and the determining means includes the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained, and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a variable pattern of 1 is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is variable to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. A first variable position in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and an entry into a specific area as compared with the first variable position. The second variable means is variable to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discriminating means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter a specific area while the first variable means is variable to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern, is configured to be at least determinable by the determining means. When the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. .. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means.

As a result, the ease of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area is made different based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of award game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the second probability is set after the end of the privilege game can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are characterized in that the period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position is at least different. The gaming machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, since the operation of the second variable means is the same for the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern, there is one way to control the second variable means. It is only necessary to specify variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic C group> (Direction that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, a first path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path described above. A first ball-entry means arranged on one path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball, or the first ball-entry means. 2 A privilege to execute a discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means and a privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. When the game ball is launched into the first path rather than the second path when the privileged game executed by the game executing means and the privileged game executing means is completed, the discrimination by the discriminating means is likely to be executed. 1 from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is facilitated when a gaming ball is launched into the second path rather than the first path. A condition determining means and its condition for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by a gaming ball launched by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the gaming state and the gaming state setting means. Based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the effect execution means for executing the specific effect of the mode suggesting a route that facilitates the determination by the determination means as the path for launching the game ball. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a time-saving state in which a starting prize is likely to occur, at least in a part of the winning. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided in the gaming board, and the game balls can easily win a prize in some of the starting winning openings due to the shortened time. This gaming machine provides a more understandable game by executing an effect (suggestion effect) that suggests which start winning opening the game should be aimed at according to whether or not the time is shortened. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-230825).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the time is shortened after hitting, the suggestion effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation of whether or not the time is shortened is maintained only until the end of the jackpot at the longest. There was a problem that it could not be done.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the first path through which the launched gaming ball can pass and the first path thereof. A second route different from the above is provided. A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the first path, and a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the second path. Discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the privilege game is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the execution means. When the game ball is launched from the second route to the first route when the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means ends, the first game state and the first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means becomes easier to be executed. One game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means becomes easier to be executed when the game ball is launched on the second path rather than the path. After the game state 1 was set by the game state setting means, it was determined by the condition determination means whether the predetermined condition was satisfied by the game ball launched by the launching means, and it was determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition was satisfied. Based on this, the effect executing means executes a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a route that facilitates the determination by the discriminating means as the path for launching the game ball.

As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the expectation that the more advantageous game state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine C1, it is variable to a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the second position as compared with the first position. The second gaming state includes the means and the variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the second gaming state is more specific than the first gaming state. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the conditions are easily satisfied.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entry means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second gaming state is configured so that specific conditions are more likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state.

As a result, in the second game state, the launching means can be operated in an attempt to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance while the variable means is changed to the first position. It has the effect of improving the willingness to participate in the game.

The pachinko / pachislot machine C2 includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a predetermined discriminating means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined discriminating means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result is obtained, and the predetermined condition is that the gaming ball launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a specific number of times. The gaming machine C3, which is characterized in that it is established when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. A specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a specific number of times.

As a result, the player can shoot the ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, as the passing means, at least a first passing means arranged in the first path and a second passing means arranged in the second path are provided. Amusement machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided as passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to launch the game ball to the player's favorite route and expect the predetermined condition to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is established when the played gaming ball first passes through the first passing means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

Thereby, the game ball can be launched to the first path in the expectation that the specific effect suggests the first path in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed in the advantageous first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from the establishment of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position is the period from the time when the variable means is changed to the first position by the launching means. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the gaming ball launched into the path is longer than the period required to reach the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from the establishment of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position is , When the set gaming state is the second gaming state because the gaming ball launched into the second path by the launching means is configured to be longer than the period required to reach the second entering means. In addition, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied based on passing through the passing means and the second path is suggested by the specific effect, the second ball entering means before the variable means is changed to the first position. The game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity of discrimination by the discrimination means can be fully utilized in the second game state.

The gaming machine C2 is provided with a predetermined ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, which is provided in the first path, and the predetermined condition is met by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is established when the launched gaming ball first enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined ball entry means different from the first ball entry means is provided in the first path. Then, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means first enters the predetermined ball entering means after the gaming state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, the ball can be launched aiming at the predetermined ball entry means in an attempt to satisfy the predetermined condition, so that there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball-entry means arranged on one path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball, or the first ball-entry means. 2 A privilege to execute a discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means and a privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. When the game ball is launched into the first route rather than the second route when the privilege game executed by the game execution means and the privilege game execution means is completed, the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed. 1 from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is facilitated when a gaming ball is launched into the second path rather than the first path. Based on the game state setting means capable of setting the game state, the timekeeping means for measuring the elapsed time since the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means, and the time specified by the timekeeping means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized by comprising, as an effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a path in which the determination by the discriminating means is easily executed, as a path for launching the game ball.

According to the gaming machine C8, the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the first path through which the launched gaming ball can pass is defined as the first path. A different second route is provided. A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the first path, and a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the second path. Discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the privilege game is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the execution means. When the game ball is launched from the second route to the first route when the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means ends, the first game state and the first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means becomes easier to be executed. One game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means becomes easier to be executed when the game ball is launched on the second path rather than the path. The elapsed time from the setting of one game state by the game state setting means is timed by the timekeeping means, and the determination means is used as a route for launching the game ball based on the time when the time has reached a specific elapsed time by the timekeeping means. The effect executing means executes a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a route that facilitates the determination.

As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation that the more advantageous game state is set is maintained until at least the specific elapsed time is reached. It has the effect of being able to.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines C1 to C8, a type determination means for determining the type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are included. It is possible to change between a variable ball-entry means that can ball and an open position where a game ball can enter the variable ball-entry means, and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball-entry means than the open position. The first variable position and the first variable position in which the gaming ball that has entered the first variable means and the variable entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable entry means. Based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second variable means that can be changed to the second variable position that makes it difficult to enter the specific region as compared with the position and the discrimination means, the first The first variable means is changed to the open position as the predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means that changes the variable means and the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the variable control means. A first variable pattern that allows a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period to enter the specific area, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. The gaming state setting means includes at least a determining means capable of determining a pattern, and the gaming state setting means is a gaming state after the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game. Is set to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area, a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The determination means determines one variable pattern based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine C9 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type of the privilege game is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is variable to an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. A first variable position in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a specific area as compared with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discriminating means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter a specific area while the first variable means is variable to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern, is at least determined by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means. The game state is set. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means.

As a result, the ease of setting a variable pattern that facilitates entry into a specific area is made different based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privileged game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the first game state or the second game state is set after the end of the privilege game can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C9, the determination means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the first variable is made by the determining means when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state rather than a specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is easily determined, it can be expected that the specific effect suggests a first route that facilitates the determination in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least different periods from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. The gaming machine C11 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the privilege game is started. Since the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position at least differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C11, the gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that there is only one way to control the second variable means. Only variable control needs to be specified, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic D group> (Non-V and time reduction is given during probability change and pullback time reduction)
The determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the privilege game execution means that executes the privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination by the determination means, and the establishment of the specific condition. A game state setting capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which discrimination by a discriminating means is more likely to be executed than the first game state. In a gaming machine equipped with means, a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and entry into the ball-entry means rather than the open position. The first variable means that can be changed to a closed position where the ball becomes difficult and the first variable means thereof are changed in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A first position in which the variable control means and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the specific area rather than the first position. The second variable control means and the second variable control means, which can be changed to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, are specified in advance based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. As a second variable control means that is variable by the variable pattern of the above and a variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area and a first variable pattern thereof. A determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area, and a game ball to the specific area during execution of the privilege game. The gaming state setting means includes a privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when the ball enters the specific area, and the gaming state setting means has the privilege. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the second gaming state can be set when the specific privilege is not granted by the granting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside a ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, the game is played. Some have a higher percentage of certain benefits that are beneficial to the person. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game is provided in which the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance provided with a specific area inside. Therefore, once the ball can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state, the privileged game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. Since it is easy to play, it forms an extremely advantageous state for the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a lottery for whether or not to grant a specific privilege is missed in an advantageous gaming state, the player falls to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. There is a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is greatly impaired.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and an open position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Is variable, and the first variable means is changed in a predetermined variable pattern by the first variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result. The first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is variable by a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result. Will be done. As variable patterns that are variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter a specific area and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from a plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of a privilege game, a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting means at a higher rate than when the ball does not enter the specific area. .. When a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the second gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means.

As a result, the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, is set when the specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game is impaired when the specific privilege is not given. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the first game state, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the second game state, the second game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, the second gaming state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the motivation of the player for the game in the second gaming state can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result is set as the first probability, and the gaming state setting means is the specific determination. It is possible to set a third gaming state in which the probability of the result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means is the third gaming state setting means as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that the gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained is set as the first probability. A third gaming state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. As a specific privilege, the privilege granting means is configured so that the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state.

As a result, when a specific privilege is given, a specific determination result is likely to be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for a specific privilege can be further improved.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, when a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state, the second game is performed by the gaming state setting means. Since the state is set, it is possible to suppress the setting from the third gaming state to the disadvantageous first gaming state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the entry of the game ball in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where the ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means. The third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position based on the predetermined determination means for executing the predetermined determination and the determination by the predetermined determination means resulting in a predetermined determination result. The gaming machine D5 including the third variable control means, wherein the second gaming state has a higher probability of obtaining the predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second variable position where the ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. A predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and the third variable means controls the 23rd variable based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means. It is variable from the second variable position to the first variable position by means. The second gaming state is configured to have a higher probability of producing a predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

As a result, a predetermined determination can be easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game more efficiently.

<Characteristic E group> (100% probability change in advantageous state)
A specific discrimination result was obtained by the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the ball entering means that the game ball can enter and the ball entering means and the discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on this, in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player and a variable ball-entry means for allowing the game ball to enter during the execution of the privileged game, the variable ball-entry means The game ball did not enter the specific entry area where the game ball placed inside and entered the variable entry means can enter and the specific entry area during the execution of the privilege game 1. In this case, the first gaming state is set, and when the gaming ball enters the specific entry area during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. As the ball entry rate of the game ball with respect to the specific ball entry area in the game state setting means and the privilege game of 1, the first ball entry rate and the second entry rate higher than the first ball entry rate. The ball entry rate setting means is provided with at least a ball rate setting means, and the ball entry rate setting means is provided with the privilege game in the first game state when the privilege game is executed in the second game state. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the rate of setting the second ball entry rate is higher than that in the case where is executed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is achieved by a lottery executed based on the starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set to an open state in which the ball can be entered. In some cases, benefits are given when a ball enters the winning opening. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, a specific ball entry area is provided inside the specific winning opening to give a probability fluctuation state when the ball enters the ball. In addition, the ease of entering a specific ball entry region differs depending on the type of hit (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245172).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the ease of entering a specific ball entry area is fixed according to the hit type, so that the probability fluctuates state when the hit type is known. The degree of expectation may be known, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability fluctuation state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the privilege game is executed in the second gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the ratio of setting the second ball entry rate is high, so that the second gaming state continues. During this period, there is an effect that the game ball can be continuously expected to enter the specific ball entry area.

In the gaming machine E1, at least a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided as the ball entry means, and the ball entry rate setting means is the second entry means. The specific determination result is obtained based on the entry into the ball means, and the specific determination result is obtained based on the entry into the first entry means in the second gaming state. When the rate of setting the second ball entry rate becomes high and the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entry into the first ball entry means in the first gaming state, the first ball entry rate is set. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that the ratio of playing machines is high.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, the ratio of setting the second ball entry rate is high when a specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed without worrying about the entry means into which the gaming ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the second game state.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position in which the game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and a second variable position in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first variable position. The first variable control means and the first variable means thereof are provided upstream of the first variable control means and the specific ball-entry region, which are variable according to a predetermined first variable pattern during the execution of the privilege game. A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can easily enter the specific ball entry area, and a game ball enters the specific ball entry area as compared with the first variable state. A second variable control that changes the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable state that becomes difficult to play and the second variable means according to a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. The first variable means, which is variable according to the first variable pattern, is moved to the first variable position as a period from the start of execution of the means and the privilege game to the start of control by the first variable control means. The first period in which the period in which the second variable means is changed according to the second variable pattern and the period in which the second variable means is in the first variable state are less likely to overlap, and the first variable means is more than the first period. The ball entry rate setting means is provided with a period setting means capable of setting a period in which the first variable position is reached and a second period in which the period in which the second variable means is in the first variable state is likely to overlap. Controls the period setting means to set the first period as the first ball entry rate, and controls the period setting means to set the second period as the second ball entry rate. The gaming machine E3, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, only the period from the start of the execution of the privilege game to the start of the control by the first variable control means is changed to enter the ball. Since the rate can be changed, it is not necessary to set a complicated variable pattern, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Demo control with AT type and special figure 1 waiting)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information, a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and a second determination by the second determination means. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is a specific second determination result is executed. In the case where the execution of the first effect is completed and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means, the first timing means for starting the first time and the execution of the second effect are completed. Then, when the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timing means for starting the second timing and the first timing based on the first set value. When the notification execution means for starting the execution of the first notification mode and the execution of the second notification mode is started based on the fact that the second timing has reached the second set value and the second acquisition condition are satisfied. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of switching between a first period for ending the first notification mode being executed and a second period for continuing the first notification mode.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during the game), so that the player can easily find a vacant platform. ..

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol and the second starting winning opening, in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting winning opening, are used to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the fluctuation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is different, and a long fluctuation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the fluctuation period of one symbol. There is something.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific screen (demo screen) is displayed when the variable display of both symbols is completed, the player immediately after the long-term variable period is executed. When the player finishes the game, the next player continues to be in a state (but the screen) where it is difficult for the next player to play the game on the game machine, so that there is a problem that the operation of the game is reduced. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine F1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed during the first effect period by the first effect execution means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed during the second effect period by the second effect execution means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When executed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is completed, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. In this case, when the first timekeeping means starts the first timekeeping, the execution of the second effect ends, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timekeeping means starts by the second timekeeping means. Will be done. The notification execution means starts the execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first time is set to the first set value, and the second notification is based on the fact that the second time is set to the second set value. Execution of the embodiment is started. In addition, the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied and the second period for continuing the first notification mode are switched and set by the setting means.

As a result, even when the second effect is being executed, it is possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, when the second effect is executed, the setting means can switch between the first period for terminating the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed and the second period for continuing the first effect. , It is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The configuration of the gaming machine F1 is, for example, a gaming machine in which the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time, and a period during which the second effect is not substantially executed according to the gaming state, and a second effect. It is preferable to use it for a gaming machine having a period during which the effect is substantially executed. In this case, during the period during which the second effect is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and during the period during which the second effect is substantially executed. Can terminate the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and the second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

This makes it possible to set the first period or the second period according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine F2, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the second period is set by the gaming state setting means. When the gaming state is set, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the first period is set.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and sets the first period when the second game state is set.

As a result, in the gaming state in which the first determination is likely to be executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in the gaming state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, the second determination is made. When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect according to the game state, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the notification executing means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition. ..

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second notification mode being executed is terminated by the notification executing means based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition. It is possible to execute an effect according to the execution state. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing obstruction of the first effect even when the first effect is executed. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the obstruction of the first effect even while the first effect is being executed.

As a result, it is possible to notify that the second effect is not being executed while the first effect is being executed, while suppressing the hindrance of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game in which the game situation is easy to understand.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. The gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are configured so that the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. There is an effect that the situation of the first effect and the second effect executed at the same time can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine F7, wherein in any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification executing means can execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode at the same time.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the notification executing means is configured to execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode at the same time. There is an effect that the situation of the production and the second production can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, when the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means notifies predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F8 that executes a predetermined notification mode.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means executes a predetermined notification mode for notifying predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode.

As a result, when the first effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent information indicating the result of the previously executed second effect from being notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect with the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, when the first effect is executed, the notification execution means executes the first effect indicating that the first effect is executed as the second notification mode. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that it executes a medium notification mode.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the first effect during execution notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed is executed by the notification execution means as the second notification mode.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the effect being executed, and there is an effect that the game situation can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, according to the case where the configuration of the gaming machine F6 is used, information on the first effect actually being executed among the first effect and the second effect that can be executed at the same time is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the game situation can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, a first display area for displaying either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means, and a second display for displaying the other. The display means having at least an area, the display control means for controlling the display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, and the display control means are the setting means. When the first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine F10, characterized in that the display content of the display means is controlled so as to be performed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a first display area in which either one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed, and a second display area in which the other is displayed. When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display content of the display means is controlled by the display control means.

As a result, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided to the player.

<Feature G group> (Demo control when the game state is variable)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. A second acquisition means for acquiring the second information, a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and a second determination by the second determination means. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is a specific second determination result is executed. In the advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times when a specific condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state setting means. Variable control that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination when the advantageous state is set, and makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination when the advantageous state ends. Means and the first setting is set when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and the second setting is set when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. Based on the setting means and the first setting being set when the advantageous state is set, the first display setting is set in the display means, and when the advantageous state is set, the first setting is set. The display setting means for setting the second display setting to the display means based on the setting of the two settings, and the display setting means is in the advantageous state in the state where the second display setting is set. When is finished, the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during the game), so that the player can easily find a vacant platform. ..

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol and the second starting winning opening, in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting winning opening, are used to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a case in which a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed are set according to the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the gaming state shifts while a specific screen (demo screen) indicating that the variation display of one of the symbols is finished is displayed, the player displays the display contents. There was a problem that it became difficult to grasp.

For example, in a predetermined game state, when the display area for a symbol that is likely to be variablely displayed is set to be larger than the display area for a symbol that is difficult to be variablely displayed, the displayed content becomes larger as the game state shifts. There was a problem that it would be different and the player would be provided with a game that was difficult to understand. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine G1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first determination is performed. The first effect based on the result of one determination is executed by the first effect execution means in the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second acquisition means acquires the second information, and the second determination means executes the second determination based on the second information. The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect executing means in the second effect period. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In that case, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, it makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for the predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for the predetermined second period. .. Further, based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set by the display setting means, the first display setting is set to the display means and the second setting is set when the advantageous state is set. Based on the setting being set, the second display setting is set in the display means. In addition, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is set, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

As a result, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is set, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting, so that the second display setting is set. Even in the state, the player can easily grasp that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine G1, the first display mode is set so that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is such that the predetermined second display mode is the display. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first display setting is set, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. To.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

When the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed in the gaming machines G1 or G2, the second effect is supported while the second display setting is maintained. The gaming machine G3, wherein the effect mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. ..

As a result, when the second effect is executed during the period when the second display setting is executed, the second effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, it is preferable to provide the configuration of the gaming machine G3 in, for example, a gaming machine in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is set short. In this case, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is executed, the player can easily execute the second effect in which the short second effect period is set.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second display setting is such that a setting for displaying a suggestion display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set is executed on the display means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the second display setting, the suggestion display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display means.

As a result, it is possible to display information on the gaming state to the player by utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game by effectively utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the advantageous state is set, a discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination thereof. When the establishment of a specific condition is determined by the means, the gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it has a regulating means for restricting the setting of the second display setting.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an advantageous state is set, the determination means determines the establishment of the specific condition based on the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when the establishment of the specific condition is determined, the regulation means. Restricts the setting of the second display setting.

As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is satisfied by not setting the second display setting. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods, and 1 other than the advantageous state. When the normal gaming state of is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set high. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that it has a probability-variable means for performing.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period is determined from the plurality of second effect periods by the second effect period determining means. Then, when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability variable means, it is longer than when the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means. The probability that the period will be selected is set high.

As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute the second determination more than when the normal gaming state of 1 other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game aiming at an advantageous state in which the second determination is often executed.

The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, so that the game can be efficiently executed.

<Characteristic H group> (Securing result production in AT type)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. Based on the establishment of the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second determination means for executing the two determinations, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination are A game when a specific first effect based on a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, the player is advantageous until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state, and a second effect period setting means that facilitates setting the second effect period shorter when the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. When the advantageous gaming state ends, a specific first effect period is set as the first effect period until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine H1 characterized by having a first effect period determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is set with an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the winning lottery probability and facilitating the lottery execution, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. There is a game result display such as the number of hits generated in the game and the number of prize balls won on the display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). In such a gaming machine, the gaming result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first symbol and the second starting winning opening, in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting winning opening, are used to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the above, and each symbol can be variable at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, it depends on the gaming situation whether the first symbol executed after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol. May be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as the fluctuation period in which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may be displayed depending on the first variable symbol after the end of the advantageous state. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time and the motivation of the player is lowered. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine H1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed during the first effect period by the first effect execution means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed during the second effect period by the second effect execution means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When executed, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played from a plurality of game states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the person is configured to be set by the gaming state setting means and the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second effect period is set short by the second effect period setting means. When the advantageous gaming state ends, a specific first effect period is set as the first effect period until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. It is determined by a determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can understand the content of the effect to be executed when the advantageous game state ends. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player's motivation is lowered due to the inability to grasp the content of the production.

As an effect to be executed when the advantageous game state ends, it is preferable to execute an effect (for example, the number of jackpots executed during the advantageous game state or the total number of prize balls) indicating the game result during the advantageous game state. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result during the advantageous game state after the end of the advantageous game state.

Further, like the gaming machine H1, by setting the first effect period executed after the end of the advantageous gaming state as the specific first effect period, the first effect executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous. It can be executed after the game state ends. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to set the first effect period executed at the end (final stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, so that the player can smoothly execute the advantageous game state. effective.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is two or more times.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the predetermined number of times is set to two or more times, so that even if the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, the first effect is performed. It can be executed using a specific first effect period, and the player can be made to grasp the content of the effect to be executed when the advantageous gaming state ends, and the player cannot grasp the content of the effect. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where motivation is lowered.

In the gaming machines H1 or H2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous gaming state is set. The gaming machine H3, which is characterized by a high proportion of pachinko machines.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a period longer than the other first effect period only for a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state ends, so that the first effect can be set. By setting the first effect period to be executed to be long as a whole, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being slowed down and the motivation of the player from being lowered.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result in the first determination and the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result in the second determination are set to be the same. The second determination means has a predetermined probability of producing a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result when the second determination does not determine the specific second determination result. The privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game in which the privilege below the privilege game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. The gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result in the first determination and the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result in the second determination are set to be the same, and the specific second determination result in the second determination. If the determination is not made, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result is determined by the second determination means with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, the special privilege game in which the privilege below the privilege game is given by the privilege game execution means is executed.

As a result, the second determination in which the second effect is executed can be more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first effect is executed. Therefore, the advantageous gaming state in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is short and easy to be set can be surely set to the player's advantageous state, and there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. ..

According to the gaming machine H4, a special privilege game is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, thereby configuring an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. However, it suffices if the gaming state in which the second effect period is set to be short is configured to be an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, the second determination means is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability than that of the second determination means, or the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination means is the second determination means. It may be configured to be a privilege game having a lower value than the special privilege game (second special privilege game) executed based on the determination result.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the second determination is completed. The gaming machine H5 is characterized by having a variable control means that changes a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than a determination.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. It is variable by the variable control means.

Thereby, the advantageous gaming state can be made easier to execute the second determination as compared with the gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous gaming state can be changed to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to play aiming at the advantageous gaming state can be increased.

The variable control means of the gaming machine H4 includes, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production period between the first production period and the second production period is variable, and a configuration in which the ease with which the second acquisition condition is satisfied is variable. Can be considered.

In the gaming machine H5, the variable control means is characterized in that the selection ratio is variably set so as to change the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to change the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period by the variable control means.

This has the effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily changed.

<Characteristic J group> (AT type, even if one small hit, the other variable effect is continued, and after the small hit, the variable effect that adjusts the book tail is executed)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. A first effect period determining means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and a second determination means thereof. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determination means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means. A second effect period determining means determined from a plurality of effect periods, and a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. 2 In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is executed, the privilege game execution means When the privilege game is executed, the temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and the privilege game. To the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means even when the time is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means and the release means for releasing the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the above. When there is a continuation means for executing the first effect or the second effect, and even when the first effect or the second effect is completed, there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period. , A gaming machine J1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the remaining period.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variation display is executed for a predetermined period based on the above, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that one of the symbols has been won, the variation period of the other symbol being displayed in the variation is displayed. Some are configured to interrupt the measurement and resume the measurement of the suspended variable period when the winning game is completed.

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player expects that the fluctuation display based on the symbol whose measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted during the fluctuation display is stopped based on the interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation period. However, there was a problem that the variable display that I was watching was suddenly stopped, which was a cause of spoiling the interest of the game. Further, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display is continuously displayed, there is an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, an error corresponding to the suspension period). ) Will occur, and the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed, which will cause a loss of interest in the game. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means for the first effect period determined from the plurality of effect periods by the first effect period determining means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination means is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means for the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. When the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the first effect being executed The timekeeping of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means based on the end of the privilege game. Even when the timekeeping is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the continuation means causes the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means to execute the first effect or the second effect, and the first effect or the second effect is performed. Even when the above is completed, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the remaining period.

As a result, even if the timekeeping of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect executed by the temporary stop means is temporarily stopped, the first effect or the second effect is continuously performed. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the effect that the player is looking at while expecting it, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even when the first effect or the second effect is completed, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the remaining period. Even if there is an error between the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing at which the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable. It has the effect of enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine J1, the first effect is preset with an effect period corresponding to a plurality of the first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the first effect. 2. The gaming machine J2, which is preset with an effect period corresponding to a plurality of the second effect periods determined by the effect period determining means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is preset with an effect period corresponding to a plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is a plurality of second effects determined by the second effect period determining means. The production period corresponding to the production period is set in advance.

As a result, the effect period in which the first effect is executed and the effect period in which the second effect is executed are predetermined, and the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing of ending. Therefore, the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop of the time by the temporary stop means, so that the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. is there.

In the gaming machines J1 or J2, the first effect and the second effect are the results of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses, respectively. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that a definite effect mode indicating the above is set.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first effect and the second effect, a definite effect mode showing the result of the first determination or the second determination is set in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses.

As a result, even when the temporary stop of timing by the temporary stop means is not executed, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be shown by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine J3, the gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the final effect mode.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, since the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the final effect mode, the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is completed. Even so, there is an effect that the production can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the privilege game execution means is executed based on the determination by the first determination means that the first determination result is a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result. When the special first effect is executed, or when the second determination means determines that the special second determination result is different from the specific second determination result, the special second effect is executed. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that, when executed, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special first effect executed based on the determination of a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result by the first determination means is executed or specified by the second determination means. When a special second effect executed based on the fact that it is determined to be a special second determination result different from the second determination result of the above is executed, the player is made more than the privileged game by the privileged game execution means. A special game that is advantageous is executed.

As a result, the player can execute the game with expectations for both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that a special effect is executed for at least the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect or the second effect is completed during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the specific effect executing means, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed for at least the remaining period.

As a result, when the first effect or the second effect is completed and a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player even when an error occurs to the extent that the specific effect alone is insufficient.

As a special effect used in the gaming machine J6, an effect different from the specific effect is used by using a period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. May be configured to execute, or in the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period, the first effect or the second effect is completed. Therefore, a new effect may be executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the privilege game, and the specific effect may be executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. .. In this case, the latter configuration has an effect that the capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the remaining period for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. The gaming machine J7 is characterized by having a period determining means and a specific effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of the determination by the remaining period determining means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period is determined by the remaining period determination means, and is specified based on the determination result. The effect mode of the effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means.

As a result, since the production mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period. In this case, an effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the specific effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including the mode of notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. As a result, for the player who cannot grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and for the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect. By notifying that the production mode of the first production or the second production is extended, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the first production or the second production is not completed due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to.

In addition, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully grasp the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect. It is preferable that the effect mode is such that information other than (information indicating the determination result of the determination means) can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide new information to the player by using the remaining period, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

In the gaming machine J7, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means is at least one of the final effect modes as the specific effect effect mode. A gaming machine J8 characterized in that it determines a specific production mode composed of parts.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode that is composed of at least a part of the final effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect is the privilege effect mode determination means. Determined by.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the specific effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine J7 or J8, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means may use the first effect or the first effect as the effect mode of the specific effect. The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that it determines a specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the second effect.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J7 or J8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect is used as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege production mode determination means.

As a result, it is possible to provide new information to the player by using the remaining period, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

<Feature K group> (ST count display control)
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times by satisfying a predetermined condition, a number update means for updating the number of games in which the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, and The remaining number of times determining means for determining the remaining number of the specific number of times, the number of times notifying means for notifying the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and the number of times notified by the number of times notifying means are increased. The gaming machine K1 is provided with a privilege notification executing means capable of executing the privilege notification to be performed based on a predetermined rule, and a rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning a lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and the specific game is executed. Some display the remaining number of times to be performed on the display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the remaining number of times a specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, the motivation of the player is lowered when the remaining number of times when the advantageous state is set becomes small. There was a problem that it would end up. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the game machine K1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specified number of times is determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means is notified by the number of times notifying means. The privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

As a result, it is possible to notify the number of times that the specific game is executed or less than the remaining number of times. Therefore, even if the number of times of notification is reduced, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific game is continuously executed, and the motivation of the player can be suppressed from being lowered. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number-of-times notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is confirmed to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can play the game while maintaining an appropriate sense of security.

Further, since the rule for executing the privilege notification can be switched, the number of times of notification by the number notification means can be increased in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine K1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means based on the operation to the operating means that can be operated by the player.

Therefore, since the player can switch a predetermined rule according to his / her taste, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the rule switching means executes a lottery as to whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the lottery result. It is configured to be switchable between the first rule and the second rule that determines whether to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times notified by the number-of-times notification means is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. A game machine K3 that is characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first rule in which the rule switching means determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result, and the number notification means. It is possible to switch to the second rule in which whether or not to execute the privilege notification is determined based on the number of times notified by the user becomes less than or equal to the predetermined number of times.

As a result, the privilege notification can be executed according to the rules having different tastes, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means and the remaining number of times is the predetermined number or more. The gaming machine K4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means by the privilege notification executing means, if the remaining number of times is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the privilege notification is executed.

As a result, the privilege notification can be executed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times is increased within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit times. Pachinko machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times is increased within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit times.

As a result, it is possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic L group> (The production at the time of winning the attacker is decided by lottery)
A privilege game that executes one of a plurality of different privilege games based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. When the privilege game is executed by the execution means and the privilege game execution means, a predetermined condition is satisfied from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. A variable ball-entry means that changes until the ball enters the ball, a condition determination means that determines the establishment of the execution condition based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the condition determination means that determines that the execution condition is satisfied. An effect executing means capable of executing the effect when the effect is performed, a ratio variable means for variablely setting the ratio of satisfying the execution condition based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and a ratio variable means. The gaming machine L1 characterized by having the above.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, some gaming machines notify that a specific winning opening is opened when a winning game is executed and that a game ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-138735). .. In addition, there are cases in which a plurality of winning games having different opening patterns of the specific winning openings are set, and the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning openings is different depending on the winning games to be executed. In some cases, it is difficult to understand which hit game is being executed, and the player is made to predict the game to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the notification is executed every time the gaming ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening, it is possible to easily make the player know that the winning game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time the game ball wins in the specific winning opening, it is only necessary to grasp the notification content that is executed every time the game ball wins in the specific winning opening. There is a problem that the player can easily grasp the type of the game.

Further, in a gaming machine that shifts the game state after the end of the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of the winning game to be executed, it is difficult to understand the type of the winning game to be executed. However, when using such a gaming machine, if notification is executed every time a gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening, while expecting a gaming state that shifts after the winning game is completed. There is a problem that it becomes impossible to play a hit game and the player's motivation to play is reduced. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine L1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and one of the different privilege games is one of the privilege games based on the discrimination result being the specific discrimination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable ball entry means satisfies a predetermined condition from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. It is variable until it is done. The establishment of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, and when the condition determination means determines that the execution condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the effect. Will be done. Then, based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

As a result, it is possible to change the rate at which the effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means based on the type of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

The game machine L1 has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the player based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine L2, which is set based on the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game balls have entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as prize balls, and the prize balls paid out by the payout means. The production is set based on the number.

As a result, the effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machines L1 or L2, the privileged game executing means is the first privileged game in which the game ball is easily entered into the variable ball entering means, and the first privileged game in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first privileged game. At least the two privilege games can be executed, and the ratio variable means sets the ratio lower when the first privilege game is executed than when the second privilege game is executed. The gaming machine L3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine L3, the first privilege game in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means, and the second privilege game in which the entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. At least one of and is executed. Then, when the first privilege game is executed by the ratio variable means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is set lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

As a result, when the first privilege game and the second privilege game, which have different ease of entering the ball, are executed, it is possible to approximate the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine L2 is used, regardless of the type of the privileged gaming executing means, the gaming ball that first enters the ball entering means is always (with high probability) directed by the effect executing means. It is good to let the production be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and further, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player cannot easily grasp the type of the privilege game being executed.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the effect is to display the display mode on the display means as at least one of the effect modes.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the effect modes, so that the player can display the content displayed on the display means. There is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed based on the above.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, in the first privilege game, the period from when the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second privilege game. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L3 or L4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first privilege game, the period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second privilege game.

This has the effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game that is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

In the gaming machine L3 or L5, the first privilege game is characterized in that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set to be larger than that of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L3 or L4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set to be larger than that of the second privilege game.

This has the effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game that is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

In any one of claims L1 to L6, there is a second ratio variable means for variably setting the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine L7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the second rate variable means based on the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means.

This makes it possible to change the rate at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the effect more complicatedly.

In the gaming machine L7, the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege game in which a game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means, and a second privilege game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first privilege game. The second ratio variable means is characterized in that as the number of gaming balls entered into the variable means increases, it becomes more difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied. L8.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means and the second privilege game in which the entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. Is executed. Then, as the number of game balls entered into the variable means increases by the second ratio variable means, it becomes more difficult to satisfy the execution condition.

As a result, it is possible to approximate the number of effects executed by the effect executing means between the case where the first privilege game is executed and the case where the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the effect executing means pays out the divided display mode indicating the number of the prize balls paid out by the payout means as the effect. The gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L2 to L8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect executing means sets the divided display mode indicating the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means as an effect divided into a plurality of pieces corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of divided display modes with one effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privileged game and reducing the motivation to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Further, even if the gaming machines have privileged games with different numbers of prize balls, there is an effect that the same effect can be obtained by executing the effect using the divided display mode.

<Characteristic M group> (Variable number of additions by PUSH production)
At least one of a privilege information determining means for determining privilege information advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means, and the privilege information stored in the storage means. Corresponds to the privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player corresponding to a part, and the privilege information stored in the storage means when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The privilege information updating means for updating the privilege information reduced from the privilege, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means, and the display means for displaying the identification information. Corresponding to the determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means up to the upper limit, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation timing when the operation means is operated. The setting means for variably setting the privilege information, the variable setting means for changing the privilege information set by the setting means based on specific conditions, and the setting means based on the operation of the operation means. It has a display update means for acquiring the privilege information set by the above and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means to the corresponding identification information. A game machine M1 characterized by being there.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an operating means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player, and as a kind of hobby effect, an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means can be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263523). In this conventional gaming machine, by operating the operation buttons in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated, a hit is notified, and the like, the player's interest is improved.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect (the hit is). It had nothing to do with (whether or not it was notified). For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation and production. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine M1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determining means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means is stored in the storage means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored privilege information is given by the privilege giving means. When the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the privilege information update means updates the privilege to the privilege information reduced from the privilege corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on the privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means up to the privilege information stored in the storage means. When the operating means is operated by the player, the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is changed by the variable setting means based on a specific condition. The privilege information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operation means, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display update means. ..

As a result, it becomes possible to update the privilege information based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation production can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The game executing means includes, and the privilege giving means holds a high probability state for increasing the probability of being determined as the specific determination result by the determination means a predetermined number of times until the determination by the determination means is executed. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it is continuously set as the privilege each time the determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. Based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, a high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is given as a privilege each time the determination is executed until the determination is executed by the determination means a predetermined number of times. It is continuously set.

As a result, the high-probability state is set because the privilege is continuously set until the judgment means executes the judgment a predetermined number of times in the high-probability state that increases the probability that the judgment means determines the specific judgment result. The player can easily grasp what is happening. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high probability state is determined to be continued and notified.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the identification information indicates the number of times that the high probability state is confirmed and notified.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of times that the high probability state is confirmed to be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the suggestion display control means for displaying the suggestion display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means on the display means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means. The gaming machine M4 is characterized by having a suggestion display mode determining means for determining based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a suggestion display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means is determined based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means by the suggestion display mode determining means.

As a result, by operating the operation means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on the display means, the privilege information is given, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In the gaming machine M4, the suggestion display mode is a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode that can discriminate the privilege information set in the setting means according to the variable display mode. The gaming machine M5, characterized in that is at least displayed.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and the discriminating mode capable of discriminating the privilege information set in the setting means is displayed according to the variable display mode.

As a result, the privilege information given by the display content displayed as the variable display mode can be determined, so that it is possible to aim the timing at which the player operates the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played.

<Characteristic N group> (Suppresses the frequency of small hits)
A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result, and a privilege granting means. It has a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of establishments of the discrimination condition and a suppression means for suppressing the frequency at which the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means, and the suppression means is stored in the discrimination condition storage means. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it makes it easier to suppress the frequency of execution of the determination when the number of the determination conditions is less than the predetermined number and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls to the starting winning opening, and the symbols are variablely displayed, and the player is drawn by lottery after the variable display is completed. There is something to inform the result of. Some such gaming machines are configured so that lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening can be held and stored a plurality of times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). ..

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the frequency of winning the game ball to the starting winning opening is high, the number of gaming balls to be paid out is larger than that of the case where the winning frequency of the game ball to the starting winning opening is low. Since many lottery will be executed and the benefits to the player will differ greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game ball to the starting prize opening, the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening will be greatly different. There was a problem that the operation of the gaming machine, which is infrequent, was reduced. In addition, in order for the player to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game ball to the starting winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and a fair game machine is provided to the player who executes the game. There was a problem that it could not be done. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine N1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the player is given a privilege by the privilege giving means. Benefits are given to. A plurality of determination conditions are stored by the discrimination condition storage means. The frequency with which the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppressing means tends to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is more than a predetermined number than when the number is less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In the gaming machine N1, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means, and a dynamic display thereof. It has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the executing means, and the suppressing means has a longer dynamic display by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine N2, characterized in that the frequency with which the determination is executed is suppressed by setting a period.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency of execution of the determination by the suppressing means is suppressed.

As a result, by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency at which the discrimination is executed is suppressed, so that the frequency at which the discrimination is executed can be reliably suppressed, which is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the satisfaction of the second discriminating condition, and the second display means that displays the second discriminating information indicating the result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. In the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means and the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that it has a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means so that the second determination condition can be easily satisfied. ..

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the second determination means based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the second determination condition is easily satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the suppression means from giving a privilege that facilitates the establishment of the second determination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In the gaming machine N2, the second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the satisfaction of the second discriminating condition, and the second display means that displays the second discriminating information indicating the result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. In the second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means and the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second. A game characterized by having a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, the determination condition can be easily satisfied. Machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the second determination means based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second action in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is given to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, the determination condition is easily satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the provision of the second privilege that facilitates the establishment of the discrimination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to the player who executes the game.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the suppressing means makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the discrimination is executed when the discriminant result by the discriminating means is the specific discriminant result. The gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the frequency of execution of the discrimination is likely to be suppressed by the suppression means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the determination is executed when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which many benefits are granted in a short period of time.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N5, the suppressing means has a number of discriminant conditions stored in the discriminant condition storage means, which is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number of less than the predetermined number. 2. The gaming machine N6 is characterized in that it makes it easy to suppress the frequency at which the determination is executed in the case of a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N2 to N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency with which the discrimination is executed by the suppressing means is high. It becomes easy to be suppressed.

As a result, the discrimination is executed when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is less than a predetermined number and the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. Since it is easy to suppress the frequency of discrimination, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of the discrimination when the game is intentionally played while the number of stored determination conditions is small. It has the effect of being able to provide a fair game machine.

<Characteristic O group> (variable range of hold notice)
The information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit, and the information storage means. Based on the above information, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player are executed based on the determination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game executing means, a pre-determining means capable of executing a pre-discrimination before the determination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the information storage means, and the information. With respect to the identification symbol display control means for displaying the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means on the display means corresponding to each of the information, and the information before being discriminated by the discriminating means. Among the variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means and the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the variable means variable by the variable means. A game machine O1 having a determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbols corresponding to the hold-stored numbers are displayed, and the displayed hold symbols are displayed. Some of them are configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect capable of notifying information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, it is suggested that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is expected to be a big hit, so that the variable display is started before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the expectations of the players.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not subject to the hold notice, and the motivation for playing is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine O1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, based on the information stored in the information storage means, the pre-discrimination is executed by the pre-discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. The identification symbol corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each piece of information is displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. The identification symbol is changed by the variable means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the prior determination means with respect to the information before the determination by the determination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols variable by the variable means is determined by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols that can be changed by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable means for all the identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the gaming machine O1, the variable means provides the information corresponding to the identification symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the information based on the result of the prior determination is variable so as to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied by the variable means, the information based on the result of the preliminary determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol is satisfied. Is variable in the manner in which is displayed.

This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine O1 or O2 has a specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol for a specific period by using the identification symbol changed by the variable means. The gaming machine O3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, the specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means for a specific period.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect mode using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, when the operating means that can be operated by the player and the identification symbol are changed by the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine O4 characterized by having a specific effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

This has the effect that a specific effect mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification symbol changed by the variable means.

In the gaming machine O4, when the pre-discrimination means determines the specific determination result, the number of the identification symbols is changed by the variable means more than when it is determined that the result is other than the specific determination result. The gaming machine O5 is characterized by having a variable number setting means for setting a large number of machines.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the pre-discrimination means determines a specific determination result, the variable number setting means sets a larger number of identification symbols that are variable by the variable means than when it is determined that the result is other than the specific determination result. To.

This has the effect that the frequency with which the identification symbol is displayed can be changed according to the game state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic P group> (Perform a specific effect when the remaining number of STs is less than the specified number and a big hit)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. As a gaming state after the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is completed, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting one of the game states and the game state setting means, the identification is more likely to be established as the number of times of execution of the determination by the determination means increases. Based on the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming. A game state changing means for changing to a state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. , When the comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the actual ease of establishment of the specific condition and the comparison result by the comparison means are specific comparison results. The gaming machine P1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines change the symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning a lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and the specific game is executed. Some players do not notify the player of the number of times the game is played (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the player is not notified of the number of times the specific game is executed, if a winning is won during the execution of the specific game, the remaining number of times of the specific game cannot be grasped, and the game is played. There was a problem that it was not possible to sufficiently provide the player with a feeling of satisfaction with the result. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine P1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and based on the fact that the discriminating by the discriminating means results in a specific discriminating result, the privileged game advantageous to the player is the privileged game. It is executed by the means of execution. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. One of the game states is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition discriminating means determines whether or not a specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of executions of the discrimination by the discriminating means increases. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which a specific condition is satisfied is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. When the easiness of establishing the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishing the actual specific condition are compared by the comparison means, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result, the predetermined condition A specific effect corresponding to a specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of.

As a result, when the easiness of establishing the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishing the actual specific condition are the specific comparison results, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, the player can be made to grasp the current state of the second game state, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, by configuring so that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the privilege game is executed. Will be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state.

The gaming machine P1 has a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of executions by the discriminating means that satisfies the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine P2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets a predetermined number of executions by the determination means that satisfies the specific condition.

As a result, the specific condition can be set based on the number of times the discriminating means is executed, so that the number of times the second gaming state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while being aware of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and there is an effect that the motivation for the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, it is easy to establish the actual specific effect by performing the suggestion effect being executed based on the establishment of the effect condition. The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a variable effect means for varying the suggestion effect close to.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the suggestion that the suggestion effect being executed by the variable effect means approaches the ease of establishing the actual specific effect based on the establishment of the effect condition. It is variable to the production.

As a result, the number of times that the second game state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can execute the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine P3, the suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the remaining number of discriminations by the discriminating means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect means is a suggestion effect showing a number of discriminations close to the remaining number of discriminations. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being variable to.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of remaining discriminations is suggested by the discriminating means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestion effect, and the variable effect means changes the suggestion effect to indicate the number of discriminations close to the remaining number of discriminants.

As a result, it is possible to suggest the number of discriminations that is close to the number of remaining discriminations, which is effective in giving the player a sense of tension.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the privilege game is executed when the comparison result is other than the specific comparison result, the gaming machines P1 to P4 have a means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Characterized gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed when the comparison result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

As a result, the player can grasp that the second privilege game has been executed when the effect different from the specific effect is executed and the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic Q group> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol sequence)
A display means for displaying the identification information, a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information columns composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, and the dynamic display means thereof. A game provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stop display of a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the display execution means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the machine, the stop display is based on the fact that a combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string. The new identification information string is displayed by the identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string and the identification information column display means while stopping and displaying at least a part of the combination of the identification information. Based on this, when at least a part of the combination of the stop-displayed identification information and the combination of the predetermined identification information using the new identification information string are stopped and displayed, the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by having an executing means for executing the privileged game by means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given (for example). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-265). In such a gaming machine, while one symbol is changing and another symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the stopped and displayed symbols form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and a hit is achieved. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility that the hit state will be reached at that time, and the player's game will be affected. There was a problem that spoiled the interest. The purpose is to solve the problems illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the display means executes the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fact that the combination of the identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the stop-displayed identification is based on the fact that a combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string. A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information column display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the display of the new identification information string by the identification information string display means, at least a part of the combination of the stop-displayed identification information and the combination of the identification information predetermined by using the new identification information string. Is stopped and displayed, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means by the execution means.

As a result, a new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information once stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed, which gives the player an unexpected effect. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means has a direction in which a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is a gaming machine Q2 characterized in that it is dynamically displayed in different directions.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the identification information string display means is dynamically displayed in a direction different from the direction dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is displayed.

As a result, the dynamic display direction of the symbol sequence can be changed to a different direction, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine Q3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means.

As a result, the player can easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has changed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Q1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string is displayed. When the new identification information string is displayed by the display means, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is set to be hidden. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays a new identification information string. If this is the case, at least one of the plurality of identification information columns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is set to be hidden by the non-display setting means.

This makes it possible to dynamically display a new identification information string without changing the area for displaying the identification information string. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the dynamic display can be reduced.

In the game machine Q1 or Q4, the display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are displayed. The display data for display is set at the same opportunity, and as an area set in the display area of the display means, a determination to determine the display data to be displayed among the set display data. A game machine Q5 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 or Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display data for displaying a new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the display data for displaying the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are Of the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined by the determination means as the area set in the same opportunity and set in the display area of the display means.

This has the effect of reducing the control load of the dynamic display.

<Characteristic R group> (Variable degree of advantage in advantageous state at the time of transition)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, and the discrimination means. When the determination result is a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result, the small privilege game execution means for executing the small privilege game different from the privilege game and the above-mentioned execution by the privilege game execution means. A first game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state as a game state after the privilege game is completed. When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state without triggering the end of the privileged gaming state. A second gaming state setting means that can be variably set to the second gaming state, and a first advantageous state are set when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. The gaming machine R1 is characterized by comprising an advantageous state setting means for setting a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability-changing state in which the probability of winning a lottery is high as a privilege after winning. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined upper limit number of times is set for the number of lottery in the probabilistic state, and if the lottery does not reach the predetermined upper limit number of lottery, the winning is won. In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is a method of shifting to a state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, which is different from the probability change state. If you win in this special state, the game value given to the player will be greater than if you win in the probability change state, so even if the probability change state ends before the hit, the player's motivation for the game will be motivated. It can be maintained (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in the special state set after the probability change state ends, the winning lottery probability becomes the normal probability, so that the lottery probability may be lost over a relatively large number of lottery times. The sex becomes high. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, the second gaming state can be set by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means, and the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. Different advantageous states are set depending on the case and the case where the second gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means.

As a result, it is possible to shift to the second gaming state without becoming a privileged game, and further, the advantage in the second gaming state can be different depending on the transition to the second gaming state. 2 There is an effect that the player's interest in the game in the game state can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means for a predetermined period and then stopping and displaying the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. The advantageous state setting means has the dynamic display period group storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as the dynamic display period, and the advantageous state setting means is the dynamic. The first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the first dynamic display period group stored in the display period group storage means, and the second dynamic different from the first dynamic display period group. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the second advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set using the display period group and the second advantageous state are set.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of dynamic display period groups having a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set as dynamic display periods for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means are stored in the dynamic display period group storage means. Then, the advantageous state setting means sets the dynamic display period using different dynamic display period groups for the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

As a result, different dynamic display periods can be set for the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and by extension, the interval at which the small privilege game is executed can be adjusted, and the degree of advantage of the player can be adjusted. Can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the first dynamic display period group is likely to have a longer dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display period group is configured to easily set a longer dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period group. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to shorten the interval at which the small privilege game is executed in the second advantageous state using the second dynamic display period group than in the first advantageous state using the first dynamic display period group. , It can be in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the gaming machine R2 or R3 has a first ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the discriminating means is the first-entry means. The first determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball means, and the second determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The display executing means has a first dynamic display for showing the first identification information corresponding to the result of the first determination and a second dynamic display for showing the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second determination. The display can be displayed at the same time, and the small privilege game executing means executes the small privilege game when the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. The featured gaming machine R4.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines R2 or R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination and the second dynamic display for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination are displayed at the same time. When the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result, the small privilege game is executed by the small privilege game execution means.

From this, by making the dynamic display period of the first dynamic display different from the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display, there is a difference between the number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the number of executions of the second determination, which is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine R4, the second advantageous state is a dynamic display shorter than the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine R5 characterized in that a period is set.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined determination result, the state in which the second advantageous state is set is shorter than the state in which the first advantageous state is set. The display period is set. Therefore, the second advantageous state can be set to the gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the gaming state setting means can also set a third gaming state different from the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second advantageous state is the first. As the first dynamic display for showing that the determination result of the determination is the determination result in which the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the privilege game is completed among the specific determination results. The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that a dynamic display period longer than that of the first advantageous state is set.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4 or R5, the following items are played. That is, in the second advantageous state, when the determination result of the first determination means is the determination result in which the third gaming state is set among the specific determination results, the dynamic display of the first dynamic display is more dynamic than that of the first advantageous state. The display period is set longer. Therefore, in the state where the second advantageous state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to set the third game state depending on the determination result of the first determination than when the first advantageous state is set. The state can be played for a longer period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed at the same time, the second dynamic display ends first, and the specific determination result is obtained. The gaming machine R7 having a terminating means for forcibly terminating the execution of the first dynamic display when the second identification information for indicating the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R4 to R6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are executed at the same time, the operation 2 dynamic display for showing a specific determination result is completed, and the second identification information is displayed. The first dynamic display being executed is forcibly terminated by the termination means. Therefore, it is possible for the player to concentrate on the privileged game and play the game.

In the gaming machine R7, when the execution of the first dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, the identification information variable for displaying the first identification information indicating the discrimination result different from the discrimination result of the first discrimination. A gaming machine R8 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution of the first dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, the identification information variable means displays the first identification information indicating the discrimination result different from the discrimination result of the first discrimination. (1) It is possible to notify the player that the dynamic display has been forcibly terminated without discomfort, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In the gaming machine R8, the identification information variable means displays identification information as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display to show a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. The featured gaming machine R9.

According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information variable means displays identification information for showing a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result as the first identification information corresponding to the first dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In any of the gaming machines R7 to R9, the second advantageous state is the first advantageous state as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is the specific determination result. The gaming machine R10 is characterized in that a shorter dynamic display period is set.

According to the gaming machine R10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines R7 to R9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second dynamic display for indicating that the determination result of the second determination is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period in which the second advantageous state is shorter than that in the first advantageous state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic S group> (Multiple advantages are set for small hit RUSH)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. A second determination means that executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means, and the first effect. An effect executing means capable of simultaneously executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means, and a specific first determination to indicate that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. 1 As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the effect or a specific second effect for showing that the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result is executed. , At least when a predetermined second effect for showing that the result of the second determination is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result is executed, what is the privilege game? A small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game that is advantageous to different players, and at least the first game state and the small privilege game being executed rather than the first game state unlike the first game state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an easy second gaming state, when the second gaming state is set, the first advantageous state and the first advantageous state are further increased. The gaming machine S1 is provided with an advantageous state setting means capable of setting at least one of an advantageous second advantageous state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, based on the winning of the game ball to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a case in which a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed are set according to the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is easily changed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, and it is possible to provide various games to the player. However, since it is not possible to change the degree of advantage to the player in one of the gaming states, for example, the gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, when the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set, the advantageous state of the second gaming state is set. It is set to either the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state by the advantageous state setting means.

Therefore, the advantageous state in the second gaming state can be changed, and when the second gaming state is set, the game can be performed while expecting which advantageous state is set, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine S1, the effect period setting that can set the first effect period, which is the effect period of the first effect executed by the effect execution means, and the second effect period, which is the effect period of the second effect. The gaming machine S2 having means, wherein the effect period setting means can easily set an effect period shorter than the first effect period as the second effect period during the second game state. ..

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period during which the second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed can be shorter than the period during which the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed, the period is shorter than the period during which the first effect is executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute the second determination. This makes it easier to execute the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination, so that there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machines S1 or S2, the gaming state setting means sets either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the privilege game is completed by the privilege game executing means. It has a game state setting means and a second game state setting means for setting the second game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. The gaming machine S3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines S1 or S2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state that is advantageous to the player is set by the first game state setting means when the privilege game is completed, and the first game state is set by the second game state setting means. It is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state.

Therefore, since the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be set at various timings, there is an effect that the player can be expected to continuously shift to the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine S3, the advantageous state setting means sets the second advantageous state when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. S4.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means, the second advantageous state is set.

Therefore, since the second gaming state of the second advantageous state is set after the privileged game is completed, the game that is advantageous to the player can be continuously provided, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines S2 to S4, there is an effect period group storage means for storing a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as the effect period set by the effect period setting means. Then, the advantageous state setting means includes the first advantageous state in which the dynamic display period is set by using the first effect period group stored in the effect period group storage means, and the first effect period group. S5 is a gaming machine S5 for setting the second advantageous state in which the effect period is set using different second effect period groups.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S2 to S4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as the effect period are stored in the effect period group storage means, and different effect period groups are used for the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state depending on the advantageous state setting means. The production period is set.

As a result, different production periods can be set for the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and the interval at which the small privilege game is executed can be adjusted, so that the degree of advantage of the player is different. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the period of the production executed by the production execution means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between advantages and disadvantages during the small hit RUSH period)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. A second determination means that executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means, and the first effect. An effect executing means capable of simultaneously executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means, and a specific first determination to indicate that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. 1 As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the effect or a specific second effect for indicating that the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result is executed. , At least when a predetermined second effect for showing that the result of the second determination is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result is executed, what is the privilege game? A small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game that is advantageous to different players, and at least the first game state and the small privilege game being executed rather than the first game state unlike the first game state. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting an easy second game state, a second game state period in which the second game state is set is set as a first advantageous period and a first advantageous period thereof. The gaming machine T1 is provided with an advantageous period setting means that can be variably set as a second advantageous period, which is more advantageous than the period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, based on the winning of the game ball to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a case in which a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed are set according to the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is easily changed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, and it is possible to provide various games to the player. However, since it is not possible to change the degree of advantage to the player in one of the gaming states, for example, the gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the degree of advantage during the period in which the second gaming state in which the small privilege game is easily executed, that is, the gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set is variable by the advantageous period setting means. Will be done.

Therefore, the advantageous state during the second gaming state period can be changed, and even after the second gaming state is set, the game can be performed while expecting that a more advantageous advantageous state is set. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine T1, the effect period setting that can set the first effect period, which is the effect period of the first effect executed by the effect execution means, and the second effect period, which is the effect period of the second effect. The gaming machine T2 having means, wherein the effect period setting means can easily set an effect period shorter than the first effect period as the second effect period during the second game state. ..

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed during the second effect period in which the second effect is executed based on the result of the second determination. Since it can be made shorter than the period for which it is performed, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination. This makes it easier to execute the small privilege game that can be executed by executing the second determination, so that there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine T2 has an effect period group storage means that stores a plurality of effect period groups having a plurality of effect periods that can be set as the effect period set by the effect period setting means, and has the effect period. The gaming machine T3 is characterized by having an order-determining means that defines an order of reference to a plurality of the effect period groups stored in the group storage means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect period group referred to by the order defining means is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine T3, the order-determining means defines at least the order in which the first effect period group in which the first effect period can be set and the second effect period group in which the second effect period can be set are referred to. A gaming machine T4 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the order in which the first effect period and the second effect period are set is defined by the order defining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous state of the second game state can be properly managed.

<Characteristic U group> (The period during which the small hit RUSH is executed is indefinite)
A first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first determination means. A second determination means that executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means, and the first effect. An effect executing means capable of simultaneously executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the two determination means, and a specific first determination to indicate that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. 1 As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the effect or a specific second effect for indicating that the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result is executed. , At least when a predetermined second effect for showing that the result of the second determination is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result is executed, what is the privilege game? A small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game that is advantageous to different players, and at least the first game state and the small privilege game being executed rather than the first game state unlike the first game state. A game having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an easy second gaming state, and a transition condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine T1 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the transition condition determining means determines that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, based on the winning of the game ball to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol in which variable display is executed, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a case in which a game state in which the first symbol is easily changed and displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is easily changed and displayed are set according to the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the first symbol is easily changed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, and it is possible to provide various games to the player. However, since it is not possible to change the degree of advantage to the player in one of the gaming states, for example, the gaming state in which the second symbol is easily changed, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, it is determined by the transition condition determining means whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

Therefore, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state can be changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, so that the player can continue to have the expectation that the second gaming state will be set. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine T1 is characterized in that it has a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as the predetermined transition condition. Machine T2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transition condition setting means sets the first transition condition and the second transition condition as predetermined transition conditions. Therefore, since the second gaming state is set when any of the plurality of transition conditions is satisfied, the player should continue to have a sense of expectation that the second gaming state will be set. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that it has an end condition setting means for setting the end condition of the first gaming state, and the end condition set by the end condition setting means is used as the first transition condition. The gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, since the first transition condition is satisfied when the end condition of the first gaming state is satisfied, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be smoothly executed, and the game can be played. It has the effect of suppressing giving a person a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine T3, when the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means is executed, the end determination means for determining whether to end the first gaming state. The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the end condition setting means sets the end condition to determine that the first gaming state is to be terminated by the end determination means.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means is executed, the end determination means determines whether to end the first game state. Then, it is set as the end condition that the end condition setting means determines that the end determination means ends the first game state.

As a result, whether or not the first game state ends is determined based on the determination result of the end determination means, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the second game state is set. There is an effect that the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the second game state is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the second transition condition set by the transition condition setting means includes the number of executions in which the first determination is executed while the first gaming state is set and the number of executions. When the total number of executions obtained by adding the number of executions of the second determination reaches a predetermined number, or one of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination. The gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it is established when the number of executions reaches a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it has a plurality of establishment conditions based on the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination, it is possible for the player to select a game for satisfying the second transition condition. , It has the effect of being able to enthusiastically participate in the game.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening becomes a specific lottery result. is there. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types having different benefits given to the player as a winning state. As a result, the interest of the player has been improved by expecting a type to which more benefits are given when the hit state is reached (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-320110).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the benefits to be given are defined according to the type of winning, so if the winning type has few benefits, the motivation of the player may be lowered. there were. That is, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first acquisition means acquired by the first acquisition means. A first determination means that executes a first determination based on information, a second determination means that executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and the first determination means. An effect executing means capable of simultaneously executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination according to the above and a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means, and a result of the first determination. When a specific first effect for indicating that is a specific first determination result or a specific second effect for indicating that the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result is executed. A predetermined means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and a predetermined position for indicating that at least the result of the second determination is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result. When the second effect of the above is executed, the small privilege game execution means for executing the small privilege game which is advantageous to the player different from the privilege game, and at least the first game state and the first game state. Differently, the game state setting means capable of setting the second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than the first game state, and the predetermined transition condition in the state where the first game state is set are set. The game state setting means has a transition condition determining means for determining whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the transition condition determining means determines that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. To do.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 can set a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as the predetermined transition condition. It has a condition setting means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 has the ending condition setting means for setting the ending condition of the first gaming state in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the ending condition set by the ending condition setting means. Is the first transition condition.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, when the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means is executed. It has an end determination means for determining whether to end the first game state, and the end condition setting means sets as the end condition that the end determination means determines to end the first game state. Is.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, and the first gaming state is set as the second transition condition set by the transition condition setting means. When the total number of times the first determination is executed and the number of times the second determination is executed reaches a predetermined number, or the number of times the first determination is executed And one of the execution times in which the second determination is executed reaches a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, based on the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first information acquired by the first acquisition means. The first determination means for executing the first determination, the second determination means for executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and the first determination by the first determination means. An effect executing means capable of simultaneously executing a first effect based on the result of the above and a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means, and a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination. It is advantageous to the player when a specific first effect for showing that the result is one determination result or a specific second effect for indicating that the result of the second determination is a specific second determination result is executed. The privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and at least the result of the second determination are a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result. Is executed, the small privilege game execution means for executing the small privilege game which is advantageous to the player different from the privilege game, and at least the first game state and the first game state which is different from the first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the small privilege game is more easily executed than one game state, and whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state in which the first game state is set. The game state setting means has a transition condition determining means for determining, and sets the second gaming state when the transition condition determining means determines that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. ..
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, it has a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as the predetermined transition condition.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, it has an end condition setting means for setting the end condition of the first game state, and the end condition set by the end condition setting means is used as the first transition condition.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, it has an end determination means for determining whether to end the first gaming state when the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means is executed. The end condition setting means sets as the end condition that the end determination means determines that the first game state is to be terminated.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 2 to 4. That is, the second transition condition set by the transition condition setting means includes the number of executions in which the first determination is executed and the execution in which the second determination is executed while the first gaming state is set. When the total number of times, which is the sum of the number of times, reaches a predetermined number, or one of the number of executions in which the first determination is executed and the number of executions in which the second determination is executed is less than the predetermined number. It is established when a specific number of times is reached.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37 First symbol display device (display means)
64 1st ball entry port (1st ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
67 Through gate (passing means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S217 Part of the discrimination means S218 Variable game execution means
S222 Second game state setting means S305 Part of the discriminating means S512 Predetermined discriminating means S525 Variable control means S1211, S1212 Game state setting means S1722, S4002 Condition discriminating means
S3905 Third production execution means S4004, S4005 Second production execution means

Claims (2)

A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area based on the player's operation,
A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and
A first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball passing through the first path can enter a ball and a position where a game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter.
A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball passing through the second path can enter and a position where the game ball passing through the first path is difficult to enter.
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means.
A first state in which the game ball is possible ball entrance, a variable, variable ball entrance means, and a second state in which the game ball is difficult ball entrance than its first state,
A privilege-giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means,
Based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, the variable ball entry means executes a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period. Variable game execution means and
From the first game state in which the determination of the determination means is more easily executed when the game ball is launched to the first path than to the second path based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, and from the first path. A game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination of the discriminating means is more easily executed by firing a game ball on the second path. When,
Based on the completion of the execution of the variable game, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect configured by the common effect mode regardless of the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, and the first effect execution means.
A game that is different from the first effect and is after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect configured to include at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting a route corresponding to the game state set as the state to the player, and
Based on the fact that the first condition, which is at least different from the determination result of the determination means in the second gaming state, is satisfied, the first gaming state is performed without going through the variable game. It is equipped with a second game state setting means that can be set.
Even when the game ball is fired into said first path during the previous SL first effect, Oh configuration wherein even if the the game balls to the second path is fired specific conditions can be established A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

Images